Yamaha DM1000 Owner's Manual

Owner’s Manual
Keep This Manual For Future Reference.
E
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on
different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in
is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service
Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW :
EARTH
BLUE :
NEUTRAL
BROWN :
LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E
or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.
NEDERLAND
THE NETHERLANDS
● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen
back-up.
● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory
back-up.
● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de
batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde
van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service
Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the
disposal at the end of the service life please consult your
retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL
UTRECHT
Tel: 030-2828425
● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The above warning is located on the side
of the unit
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug
has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete
outlet.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus
has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
4
Important Information
Important Information
Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock
may result.
Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power
cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects
on a power cord covered by a carpet.
Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or
metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire
and electrical shock hazard.
Do not remove the unit’s cover. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal
inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer.
Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible, and
unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.
If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected.
Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard.
Use only the included power cord for this unit. Using other types may be a fire and electrical
shock hazard.
This unit has rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha
web site (see page 6) to see whether your card is compatible. Also check the total number of
cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may
cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit.
If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid
gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power switch off, remove
the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit
without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result.
Cautions
•
•
•
Keep this unit away from the following locations:
— Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam, such as near cooking stoves, humidifiers, etc.
— Unstable surfaces, such as a wobbly table or slope.
— Locations exposed to excessive heat, such as inside a car with all the windows closed, or
places that receive direct sunlight.
— Locations subject to excessive humidity or dust accumulation.
Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A
damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Operating Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
This unit has ventilation holes along the front, rear, top, and sides to prevent the internal
temperature from rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a fire
hazard. In particular, do not operate the unit while it’s on its side, is upside down, or while
it’s covered with a cloth or dust sheet.
If you are using the optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB1000
when moving this unit. Otherwise, the meter brackets may be damaged, the main unit may
malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls.
This unit is heavy. Use two or more people to carry it.
When you transport or move this unit with the MB1000 attached, do not permit impact or
stress on the cable connector that connects the MB1000 to this unit. Otherwise, malfunction may occur.
This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock.
Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet, be sure to ground the unit.
To relocate the unit, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet,
and remove all connecting cables. Damaged cables may cause fire or electrical shock.
If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time, such as when going on vacation, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Leaving it connected is a potential fire hazard.
Operating Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).
The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing defective
components.
Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone
away from the unit.
If the message “WARNING Low Battery!” appears when you turn on this unit, contact your
dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still
operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be lost.
Before replacing the batteries, back up your data to a memory card, or another unit by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise
occurs, relocate the affected equipment.
When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector
securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by
holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws
are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction.
When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some
devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your
speakers may be damaged.
Interference
This unit uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected equipment. Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise. In this case use the
telephone away from the unit.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
6
Important Information
Exclusion of Certain Responsibility
Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including
personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of this unit.
Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics, Inc.
Apple, Mac, and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of
Apple Corporation, Inc. HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Intel and Pentium are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg
Media Technologies AG. Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign
and/or Avid Technology, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac
are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. Waves is a trademark of Waves, Inc. Yamaha is a
trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Copyright
No part of this unit, its software, or this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or distributed
in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation.
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.
Yamaha Web Site
Further information about this unit, related products, and other Yamaha professional audio
equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at:
<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.
Package Contents
•
•
•
•
•
DM1000 Digital Production Console
CD-ROM
Power cord
This manual
Studio Manager Installation Guide
Optional Extras
•
•
•
•
MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge
SP1000 Wooden Side Panels
RK1 Rack Mount Kit
mini YGDAI I/O cards
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
About this Owner’s Manual
7
About this Owner’s Manual
This Owner’s Manual explains how to operate the DM1000 Digital Production Console.
The table of contents can help you familiarize yourself with the manual’s organization and
to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate specific information.
Before diving in, it’s recommend that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting on
page 27.
Each chapter in this manual discusses a specific section or function of the DM1000. The
Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus
Outs,” and “Aux Sends.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized in order of signal flow, from input to output.
Conventions Used in this Manual
The DM1000 features two types of buttons: physical buttons that you can press (e.g.,
ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical
buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “move the cursor to the ON
button.”
You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right
Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, the procedures reference only the [DISPLAY] button method. See “Selecting Display Pages” on
page 28 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected.
Installing the DM1000
The DM1000 should be placed on a strong and stable surface, in a location that complies
with the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional
purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
Copying of commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is
strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Contents
Contents
1
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installing an Optional Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3
4
5
6
7
Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Connections and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wordclock Connections and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
Analog I/O & Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Input Channels from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using MS Stereo Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
41
44
47
51
52
53
55
56
57
59
60
71
73
76
77
Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
About Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
37
79
80
81
86
87
88
89
Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Aux Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Contents
9
Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Patching Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Insert Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
10
Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Using the Talkback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11
Surround Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Grouping & Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13
Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
About the Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
About Surround Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
14
Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Storing and Recalling Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
15
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
16
Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting Up for Automix Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Punching In & Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fader1 &2 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
17
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
About Remote Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Nuendo Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Other DAW Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
MIDI Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Machine Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
9
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
10
Contents
18
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MIDI & the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
19
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Changing the Input and Output Connector Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) . . . . . . . 255
Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Using Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Using the AD824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking the Battery and the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Initializing the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
GPI Trigger Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
I/O Slot Spec (1–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
CONTROL Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Appendix D: About Optional Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Installing the SP1000 Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Welcome
11
1 Welcome
1
■ Hardware Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
17 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (for touch-sensitive selection of channels,
or for punching in and out during Automix recording)
Faders can set levels for Input Channels, Aux Sends, and Bus Outs.
Rotary Encoders enable you to control panning for each channel, AUX send levels, and
various parameters.
Six selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders and Encoders.
320 x 240 dot LCD display with fluorescent backlighting
Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of
channel mix parameters.
12 USER-DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control DM1000 internal
parameters.
Two expansion slots for optional digital I/O, AD, and DA cards.
■ Sonic Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters
Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters
20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate.
106 dB typical dynamic range
32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator)
■ Inputs and Outputs
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16 mic/line inputs with switchable +48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs
12 Omni Outs assignable to Stereo Out, Bus Out, Monitor Out, and Input Channel
Direct Outs.
Two optional slots allow a maximum of 32 inputs.
Two 2-track digital inputs, with sampling rate converters capable of converting sampling rates of 44.1 kHz through 96 kHz.
Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88.2/96 kHz on 44.1/48 kHz legacy multi-track digital recorders.
You can cascade two DM1000s while remaining in the digital domain.
Input patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths.
Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to
desired output jacks.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Welcome
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM1000 Digital Production Console.
The compact DM1000 Digital Console features 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing
without compromise, as well as 48-channel simultaneous mixing. The DM1000 covers a
broad range of needs and applications, including multi-track recording, 2-channel mixdown, and cutting-edge surround sound production. This integrated, comprehensive
audio system features remote control function for DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations) as
popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles.
The DM1000 offers the following features:
12
Chapter 1—Welcome
■ Channel Configuration
•
•
•
•
Simultaneous mixing of up to 48 Input Channels. Group multiple channels and pair
channels for stereo.
8 Bus Outs and 8 AUX Sends. Buses 1-8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group
Buses.
Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel
and Output Channel.
4-band EQ and dynamics processor equip all channels. Dynamics processor and EQ settings can be stored in libraries and recalled.
■ Effects
•
•
Four high-quality multi-channel effects (Apply effects via AUX Sends or Channel
Inserts).
Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings.
■ Scene Memory
•
•
Scene memories for storing and recalling the mix settings as Scenes.
Snapshot style automation with Scene memories recallable via Automix.
■ Surround Sound
•
•
Supports 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 channel surround sound production.
Joystick for adjusting each channel's surround pan.
■ Automix
•
•
Automated controls of channel faders and parameters via Automix. (Even more powerful when combined with an MTR, DAW, and MIDI sequence system.)
Control parameters of connected MIDI devices via Automix.
■ Remote Control
•
•
•
Control and manage your DM1000 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Manager software
Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations), including
Pro Tools, Nuendo, etc.
Control an external recorder via MMC commands and P2 commands.
■ MIDI
•
•
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection.
Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI
Control Surface & Rear Panel
13
2 Control Surface & Rear Panel
2
Control Surface
SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 19)
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
14
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
0
0
-60
-16
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
Headphones
& Talkback
Section
(p. 21)
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
MIDI
AUX SELECT
Section (p. 16)
DIO
SETUP
REMOTE
UTILITY
METER
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
VIEW
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
OVER
0
EFFECT
Display Section
(p. 18)
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUX SELECT
DISPLAY
AUX5
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
ENCODER
MODE Section
(p. 16)
1
2
3
4
-8
-10
-12
-12
5
6
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
7
8
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
MONITOR
Section (p. 22)
DISPLAY
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
Q
-6
-8
-10
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
FREQUENCY
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
Data Entry
Section (p. 21)
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
FADER MODE
Section (p. 16)
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SCENE MEMORY
Section (p. 20)
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
15
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
40
50
1
17
2
33
AUX 1
18
3
34
AUX 2
19
4
35
AUX 3
20
5
36
AUX 4
21
6
37
AUX 5
22
7
38
AUX 6
23
8
39
AUX 7
24
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
Channel Strip Section (p. 15)
26
11
42
BUS 2
27
12
43
BUS 3
28
13
44
BUS 4
29
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
LAYER Section
(p. 20)
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
STEREO Section (p. 15)
USER DEFINED KEYS
Section (p. 21)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface & Rear Panel
AD Input Section (p. 14)
DISPLAY ACCESS Section
(p. 17)
14
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
AD Input Section
1
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
OFF
6
+48V
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
-60
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
2
PAD
-16
16
15
14
+48V
ON
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
3
4
5
A +48V ON/OFF switches 1–16
These switches turn on or off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT.
B PAD switches 1–16
These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input.
C GAIN controls 1–16
These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input. Input sensitivity is +4 dB to
–40 dB when the Pad is on, and –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.
D PEAK indicators 1–16
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad
switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak.
E SIGNAL indicators
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
15
Channel Strip Section
2
SEL
3
SOLO
4
ON
1
+10
0
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
20
15
30
20
40
30
50
40
60
70
50
5
1
17
33
AUX 1
B [SEL] buttons 1–16
These buttons enable you to select desired channels. The [SEL] button indicator for the currently-selected channel lights up. The channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the
currently-selected button in the LAYER section (see page 20).
These buttons also allow you to select channels for Automix recording and playback, create
or cancel channel pairs, and add channels to (or remove them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and
Compressor groups.
C [SOLO] buttons 1–16
These buttons solo the selected channels. The [SOLO] button indicator of the currently-soloed channel lights up.
D [ON] buttons 1–16
These buttons turn the selected channels on or off. The [ON] button indicators for On
channels light up.
E Channel faders 1–16
These are touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized faders. Depending on the button selected in
the FADER MODE Section (see page 16), the faders will adjust the input or output level of
the selected channels or buses, or adjust the AUX Send level.
STEREO Section
1
AUTO
2
A [AUTO] button
When this button is turned on, you can use the [SEL] buttons 1–16 to turn the Automix
function on or off.
SEL
3
ON
B [SEL] button
Selects the Stereo Bus.
C [ON] button
Turns the selected bus on or off.
0
5
10
15
D [STEREO] fader
This touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo
Bus.
20
30
40
50
60
70
4
STEREO
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
2
Control Surface & Rear Panel
A Encoders 1–16
These rotary Encoders adjust the channel parameter settings. Depending on the button
selected in the ENCODER MODE section (see page 16), the Encoders will adjust the channel pan setting (when the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button indicator is lit), the AUX Send
level (when the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button indicator is lit), or any parameter (when
the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit).
These Encoders also feature push switches that are used to view the value of the parameter
currently assigned to the Encoder, or to punch in or out during Automix recording.
1
16
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
AUX SELECT Section
1
AUX SELECT
DISPLAY
2
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an Aux-related page (see page 97).
B [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons
These buttons select an Aux Send. When you press a button to select an AUX Send, the corresponding button indicator lights up.
ENCODER MODE Section
1
ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
2 3 4
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an Encoder page, enabling you to assign functions to Encoders 1–16
(see page 35). To use a function assigned to an Encoder, press the [ASSIGN] button to turn
on the button indicator.
B [PAN] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel panpots.
C [AUX] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel Aux Send. The Send destination is selected in the AUX SELECT Section.
D [ASSIGN] button
If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as
assignable controls for the parameters assigned on the Encoder pages. (By default, Input
Patches of the corresponding Input Channels are assigned.)
FADER MODE Section
FADER MODE
1
FADER
AUX
2
3
A [FADER/AUX] button
Toggles between the desired parameter to be adjusted by channel faders 1–16. The faders
adjust the Channel or Bus level when the FADER indicator is lit, and adjust the Aux Send
level when the AUX indicator is lit.
B FADER indicator
C AUX indicator
An indicator lights up to indicate the parameter selected via the [FADER/AUX] button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
17
DISPLAY ACCESS Section
1 2 3 4
2
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
INPUT
PATCH
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
7
8
L
K
SCENE
M N O P
A [AUTOMIX] button
This button displays an Automix page, enabling you to make Automix settings (see
page 181).
B [DIO] button
This button displays a DIO page, enabling you to make digital I/O settings (see page 53).
C [SETUP] button
This button displays a Setup page, enabling you to make the DM1000 internal settings.
D [UTILITY] button
This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view
information about installed optional cards.
E [MIDI] button
This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to make MIDI settings (see page 238).
F [REMOTE] button
This button displays a Remote page, enabling you to control a DAW remotely and make
machine control settings (see page 205).
G [METER] button
This button displays a Meter page, which displays Input Channel levels, or Bus Out or Aux
Send Out levels (see page 37).
H [VIEW] button
This button displays a View page, enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific
channel (see page 69).
I [PAIR/GROUP] button
This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling you to pair channels, group multiple faders, or mute channels (see page 74 and 141).
J [ /INSERT/DELAY] button
This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling you to switch the signal phase, set the
signal to be inserted, or set the delay parameters (see page 60 and 150).
K [INPUT PATCH] button
This button displays an In Patch page, enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to the desired Input Channels (see page 105).
L [OUTPUT PATCH] button
This button displays an Out Patch page, enabling you to patch Bus Out and Insert Out signals to the desired destination (see page 108).
M [PAN/SURROUND] button
This button displays a Pan/Surr page, enabling you to adjust stereo or surround pan settings
(see page 67 and 121).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface & Rear Panel
6
5
9
J
AUTOMIX
18
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
N [DYNAMICS] button
This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you to control channel gates and compressors (see page 62).
O [EFFECT] button
This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and
use optional plug-in cards (see page 151).
P [SCENE] button
This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to store and recall Scenes (see page 155).
Display Section
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
1
F1
5
F2
F3
-8
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
2
3
F4
4
6
A Display
This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a fluorescent backlight.
B Stereo meters
These 32-segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus.
C Contrast control
This control adjusts the display contrast.
D [F1]–[F4] buttons
These buttons select a page from a multi-page screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the
screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page. (See page 28 for more
information on displaying a page.)
E Left Tab Scroll [ ] button
F Right Tab Scroll [ ] button
If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, use these
buttons to display the additional tabs. These buttons are available only when the left or right
Tab Scroll arrow appears.
Tab Scroll arrow
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
19
SELECTED CHANNEL Section
1
5
2
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
J
6
2
HIGH
Q
2
3
4
N
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
Control Surface & Rear Panel
1
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
HIGH MID
FREQUENCY
7
8
LOW MID
LOW
GAIN
9
K
L
M
GRAB
A ROUTING [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a Routing page, enabling you to route selected channels to the desired
Bus, and adjust the level of the signals routed from Buses 1–8 to the Stereo Bus (see page 68
and 83).
B ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons
C ROUTING [STEREO] button
D ROUTING [DIRECT] button
These buttons select the desired Bus for routing the selected Input Channel signals. The corresponding button indicator for the currently-selected Bus lights up.
E EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button
This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set the selected channel equalizer (see
page 64 and 65).
F EQUALIZER [HIGH] button
G EQUALIZER [HIGH-MID] button
H EQUALIZER [LOW-MID] button
I EQUALIZER [LOW] button
These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW). The corresponding button indicator of the currently-selected band lights up.
J EQUALIZER [Q] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q.
K EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band frequency.
L EQUALIZER [GAIN] control
This control adjusts the currently-selected band gain.
M [GRAB] button
This button enables Joystick control of the surround pan setting for the currently-selected
Input Channel. This button can be turned on only when the surround pan setting is available.
N Joystick
The Joystick is used to set the surround pan position (see page 126).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
20
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
LAYER Section
2
1
3
A [1-16]/[17-32]/[33-48] buttons
These buttons select an Input Channel Layer. The channel strips control Channels 1–16,
17–32, or 33–48, depending on the button selected here. (See page 31 for more information
on Layers.)
B [REMOTE 1]/[REMOTE 2] buttons
These buttons select the Remote Layer, which can be used to control external devices,
including DAWs. (See page 205 for more information on the Remote Layer.)
C [MASTER] button
This button selects the Master Layer, which can be used to control Bus and Aux Send. (See
page 31 for more information on the Master Layer.)
SCENE MEMORY Section
SCENE MEMORY
STORE
RECALL
12 3 4 5
A Scene memory display
The number of the currently-selected Scene memory is displayed here.
B Edit indicator
If you adjust a mix parameter after a Scene has been recalled or stored, a dot flashes here.
C [STORE] button
This button enables you to store the current mix settings (See page 155 for more information on Scene Memories).
D Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons
These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments
the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down
either key increments or decrements the selection continuously.
E [RECALL] button
This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
21
USER DEFINED KEYS Section
1
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a User Def page, enabling you to assign functions to buttons 1–12 (see page 257).
USER DEFINED
KEYS
DISPLAY
2
Data Entry Section
3
DEC
INC
A Parameter wheel
This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display. Turning it
clockwise increases the value; turning it counterclockwise decreases the value.
This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for
entry (see page 30).
4
B [ENTER] button
This button activates a selected (highlighted) button on the display, and confirms the edited parameter values.
1
C [DEC] & [INC] buttons
These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one. Pressing the
[INC] button increments the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements
the value. Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously.
2
ENTER
D Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor around the display pages, or select parameters
and options. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously
in the respective direction.
Headphones & Talkback Section
1
2
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
3
4
0
10
PHONES
LEVEL
PHONES
A TALKBACK LEVEL control
This control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone. (See page 119 for more
information on the Talkback function.)
B Talkback mic
This built-in microphone is used for talkback.
C PHONES LEVEL control
This control sets the level of the PHONES. (See page 115 for more information on monitoring through the headphones.)
D PHONES jack
You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
2
Control Surface & Rear Panel
B [1]–[12] buttons
These buttons perform the functions assigned in the User Def pages.
22
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
MONITOR Section
1
MONITOR
DISPLAY
2
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
4
STEREO
7
DIMMER TALKBACK
3
5
6
8
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
9 J K
A [DISPLAY] button
This button displays a Monitor page, enabling you to adjust monitor settings (see page 115
and 131).
B [SOLO] indicator
This indicator flashes when a single or multiple channels are soloed.
C [CLEAR] button
This button “unsolos” all soloed Channels.
D [2TR D1] button
E [2TR D2] button
F [STEREO] button
These buttons select the Control Room Monitor output signal. When the [2TR D1] button
indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 jack is selected. When the [2TR D2]
button indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 jack is selected. When the
[STEREO] button indicator is lit, the Stereo Bus signal is selected.
If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page (see page 116), you can
monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the
[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
G [SLOT] button
H [BUS] button
These buttons select the Surround Monitor signal source. When the [BUS] button indicator
is lit, the Bus 1–8 signals are selected. When the [SLOT] button indicator is lit, the signals
from Slots 1/2 are selected. (See page 131 for more information on the Surround Monitor.)
I [DIMMER] button
This button activates the Dimmer function, which lowers the Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. This function is convenient when you wish to talk in the control room during
mixdown. The [TALKBACK] button indicator flashes while the Talkback function is active
(see page 116).
J [TALKBACK] button
This button turns on the Talkback function. While the button indicator is lit, the Talkback
mic signal is sent to any desired Bus or Slot (see page 119).
K MONITOR LEVEL control
This control adjusts the monitor level.
Note:
• The DM1000 allows you to patch source signals to any output jack (other than the PHONES
jack). Therefore, the console does not feature a dedicated monitor output jack. Instead, you
can route monitoring signals to any desired output jack (typically to OMNI OUT jacks
1–12).
• By default, monitoring signals are assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 11 and 12.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
23
Rear Panel
Rear Panel
AD Input and Output Section (p. 23)
2
15
3
OMNI
IN
14
2
13
1
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
INPUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SLOT
Control Surface & Rear Panel
16
4
SLOT
POWER
ON
OFF
AC IN
SMPTE IN
METER
REMOTE
MIDI
OUT
IN
TO HOST
USB
CONTROL
WORD CLOCK
OUT
Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 24)
1
2
2
AES/EBU
Power Section (p. 25)
2TR IN
DIGITAL
1
IN
COAXIAL COAXIAL
AES/EBU
SLOT Section (p. 24)
AD Input and Output Section
1
16
4
15
3
OMNI
IN
14
2
13
1
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
INPUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
A INPUT connectors 1–16
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and microphone signals. The nominal signal level
ranges from –60 dB through +4 dB.
3
Male XLR plug
1 (ground)
3 (cold)
2 (hot)
B OMNI IN connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals. The nominal signal
level is +4 dB.
C OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output any Bus signals and
channel Direct Out signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB.
Female XLR plug
2 (hot)
3 (cold)
1 (ground)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
24
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
SLOT Section
SLOT
SLOT
1
A SLOT 1 & 2
You can insert optional mini-YGDAI cards into these slots. (See page 26 for more information on installing these cards.)
Digital I/O & Control Section
1
METER
SMPTE IN
REMOTE
MIDI
OUT
CONTROL
2
IN
TO HOST
USB
WORD CLOCK
OUT
3
4
5
6 7
2TR IN
DIGITAL
1
IN
8
2
1
2
AES/EBU
COAXIAL COAXIAL
AES/EBU
9
JL
K
A METER connector
This connector enables you to connect an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.
B CONTROL connector
This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface).
Through this connector, the Talkback function can be turned on and off from external
equipment, or external equipment can be started or stopped from the DM1000 (see
page 259).
C SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector
This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode to synchronize
the Automix function.
D REMOTE connector
This 9-pin D-Sub connector is used to remotely control external equipment that supports
the Yamaha AD824 and Sony P2 Protocol (remote control commands that are used on TASCAM DA-98HR and other professional video recorders). Use a reverse cable to connect an
AD824, and use a straight cable to connect a P2 Protocol device. Use a reverse cable to connect two DM1000s to each other. Connecting two DM1000s to each other enables communication via MIDI Protocol and SOLO Logic synchronization.
E MIDI IN & OUT ports
These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports enable you to connect the DM1000 to other MIDI
equipment.
F TO HOST USB port
This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port.
G WORD CLOCK OUT connector
This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the DM1000 to a connected external
device.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Rear Panel
25
H WORD CLOCK IN connector
This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the
DM1000.
J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2
This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector
is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.
K 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-32-type connector accepts AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is
typically used to connect the digital stereo output (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.
L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2
This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector
is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,
MD recorder, or CD recorder.
Power Section
1
POWER
ON
OFF
2
AC IN
3
A Grounding screw
Be sure to use this screw to ground the DM1000 to protect yourself against electrical shock.
The supplied power cord features a three-pin plug. If the ground terminal of the AC outlet
is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufficiently via the power cord. If the AC outlet
does not provide a suitable ground, this screw must be connected to a suitable ground
point. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other
noise.
B POWER ON/OFF switch
This switch turns the power to the DM1000 on or off.
Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in
the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, DM1000, monitoring power amplifiers.
C AC IN connector
This connector enables you to connect the DM1000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power
cord.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
2
Control Surface & Rear Panel
I 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-31-type connector outputs AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is
typically used to connect the digital stereo input (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder, MD
recorder, or CD recorder.
26
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
Installing an Optional Card
Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is
supported by the DM1000. Also, verify the number of cards (including other Yamaha or
third-party cards) that can be installed in the unit.
<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.
Follow the steps below to install an optional mini-YGDAI card.
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.
Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
5
3
OM
N
IN I
14
2
13
1
12
12
11
10
11
PO
W
ON ER
OF
F
9
10
DIG
MO ITAL
DE MIX
L D IN
M1 G C
000 ON
SO
LE
9
INP
UT
8
7
8
6
7
AC
IN
6
ME
TE
R
CO
5
4
5
SL
OT
4
NT
RO
L
SM
3
2
3
PT
E IN
2
1
1
RE
MO
TE
SL
OT
MID
I
OU
T
IN
TO
H
USOST
B
WO
RD
OU
T
CL
OC
K
IN
1
2
AE
S/E
BU
CO
AX
IAL
2T
DIGR IN
ITA
L
2
1
CO
AX
IAL
AE
S/E
BU
3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,
as shown below.
You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector.
5
3
OM
N
IN I
14
2
13
1
12
12
11
10
11
PO
W
ON ER
OF
F
9
10
DIG
MO ITAL
DE MIX
L D IN
M1 G C
000 ON
SO
LE
9
INP
UT
8
7
8
6
7
AC
IN
6
CO
NT
RO
L
5
4
5
SL
OT
ME
TE
R
4
SM
3
2
3
PT
E IN
2
1
1
RE
MO
TE
SL
OT
MID
OU
T
I
IN
TO
H
USOST
B
WO
RD
OU
T
CL
OC
K
IN
1
AE
S/E
BU
2
CO
AX
IAL
2T
DIGR IN
ITA
L
2
1
CO
AX
IAL
AE
S/E
BU
4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews.
Tighten the screws firmly, or else the card may not be grounded correctly, which may cause
the DM1000 to malfunction.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Operating Basics
27
3 Operating Basics
This chapter describes basic operations on the DM1000, including how to use the display
and operate the controls on the top panel.
3
About the Display
3Current Scene
4EDIT indicator
5MIDI indicator
6Surround mode indicator
7Sampling rate indicator
1Selected DISPLAY
2Selected channel
9Page title
8Timecode counter
JChannel name
KPage area
LPage tabs
MTab Scroll arrows
A Selected DISPLAY
This section indicates the currently-selected display page group.
B Selected channel
This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or fader. The first four characters are the Channel ID (e.g.,
CH1–CH48, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are
the channel’s Short name. You can edit the channel’s Short name if you desire (see
page 76 and 89).
C Current Scene
This section indicates the number and title of the currently-selected Scene memory (see
page 156). If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( ) appears.
D EDIT indicator
This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene
that was most-currently recalled. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on the
Scene Memory display.
E MIDI indicator
This indicator appears when the DM1000 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port,
USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Operating Basics
The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate
the DM1000. The display indicates the following items:
28
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
F Surround mode indicator
This indicator identifies the currently-selected Surround mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or
6.1) (see page 121).
G Sampling rate indicator
This indicator identifies the DM1000’s current sampling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz
(48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k).
H Timecode counter
This counter displays the current position in the MIDI timecode being received via the
MIDI IN port, USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card. It
works in unison with the timecode counter on an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.
If MIDI clock is selected as the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page, this
counter indicates the current MIDI clock position in bars:beats:clocks.
I Page title
This section indicates the title of the current page.
J Channel name
Depending on which page is currently selected, the channel name is the Long name of
the channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or the cursor buttons.
K Page area
This page area displays various page contents.
L Page tabs
These tabs enable you to select a display page.
M Tab Scroll arrows
These arrows indicate that more pages are available.
Selecting Display Pages
To select a display page:
1 Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page
group.
Display pages are grouped by function. To select a page group, press the [DISPLAY] button
in the following sections: AUX SELECT, ENCODER MODE, ROUTING, EQUALIZER,
MONITOR, USER DEFINED KEY. You can select additional page groups by pressing the
desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section.
2 You can select pages that have currently-displayed tabs by pressing the
[F1]–[F4] buttons.
If the selected display page group contains multiple pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons
below the corresponding tab to select a specific page.
3 To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed, press either the
Left or Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button (depending on where the page is
located) to display the page tab, then press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] button.
If display page groups contain more than four pages, either the left or right arrow appears.
To display the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button.
You can also select a page from a page group as follows:
• Selecting the next page in a page group:
Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly. This enables you to select a page that has
a hidden tab.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Display Interface
29
• To select the previous page in a page group:
Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1. The screen steps back through the
pages one by one. Release the button when the desired page is displayed. This enables you
to select a page that has a hidden tab.
• To select the first page in the group:
Double-click the button you selected in Step 1.
Tip: The DM1000 remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page
group. If you return to the previous page group, the DM1000 displays the correct page, with
the same parameter selected. You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the
top panel (see page 250).
Display Interface
This section describes how to use the display interface.
Rotary Controls & Faders
The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the continuously variable parameter values, including Input Channel levels and effects parameters. Press the cursor buttons to move the
cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons
to modify the value.
Buttons
The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on (enabled)
or off (disabled). Move the cursor to the appropriate button,
then press the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (highlighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one of two
options or to execute certain functions.
Parameter Boxes
The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple
options. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a
parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the setting.
You may need to press the [ENTER] button to confirm the
change of certain parameter box. If you edit a value in this type
of parameter boxes, the value flashes. Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the change, and the flashing stops. If you move
the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing, the edit is cancelled.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
3
Operating Basics
4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor (a bold frame) to a button,
parameter box, rotary control, or fader so that you can change the value.
30
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Confirmation Messages
For certain functions, the DM1000 prompts you for confirmation before executing the
functions, as shown here.
Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute the function, or move the cursor to
NO and press [ENTER] to cancel.
If you take no action for awhile, the confirmation window closes automatically and the
function is not executed.
Title Edit Window
The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories, Automixes, and so on. You can enter 4, 12, or 16 characters, depending on the item.
The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. The figure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers.
Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press the [ENTER] button to enter them
into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. Use
the Parameter wheel or the Left and Right cursor buttons to move the cursor within the title.
Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters, and use the SPC
button to enter a space.
To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, move
the cursor to the INS button and press [ENTER].
To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left,
move the cursor to the DEL button and press [ENTER].
When you have finished, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm
the title. To cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press
[ENTER].
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Layers
31
Selecting Layers
Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux Outs) are arranged into layers, as
illustrated below. There are six layers altogether.
3
1
33
AUX 1
2
34
35
36
17
1
33
AUX 1
18
2
34
19
AUX 2
3
35
20
AUX 3
4
36
Input Channel Layer 33–48
17
1
33
AUX 1
18
2
34
50 30
60
70 40
50
19
AUX 2
3
35
4
36
Master Layer
17
1
33
AUX 1
18
2
34
3
35
4
36
Remote Layer 1
17
1
33
AUX 1
18
2
34
3
35
20
AUX 3
4
36
Remote Layer 2
17
1
AUX 1
33
20
18
2
AUX 2
34
19
3
AUX 3
35
5
37
20
20
AUX 4
36
22
6
38
37
7
39
20
22
6
AUX 6
24
38
8
40
23
7
AUX 7
25
39
24
9
41
40
26
10
42
27
41
26
11
43
28
BUS 3
12
44
29
13
45
28
BUS 4
30
44
14
46
29
BUS 5
31
45
47
30
14
BUS 6
32
46
48
15
BUS 7
47
0 +10
15
20
32
10
0
0
5
5
10
10
15
15
20
20
30
30
40
50
60
70
0
5
15
20 10
15
20
5
5
0
5
30
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
30
50 30
60
70 40
50
31
STEREO
0 +10
5
5
0
5
40
15
20
30
40
40
50
60
70
16
10
15
5
10
10
15
20
0
0
5
0
5
30
20
50
60
70
BUS 8
0 +10
15
20
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
30
5
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
20 10
30
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20
5
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
STEREO
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
15
10
15
20
48
5
0
5
BUS 7
15
20 10
30
15
20
30
40
40
50
60
70
16
10
0 +10
5
5
10
10
15
20
0
0
5
0
5
30
20
50
60
70
BUS 8
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
5
0
10
40
32
15
20 10
15
20
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
30
5
5
0
5
40
0 +10
5
5
BUS 6
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
13
47
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
STEREO
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
15
10
40
20 10
15
20
48
5
0
5
BUS 7
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
5
30
31
0 +10
5
20 10
15
20
30
40
40
50
60
70
16
10
40
5
10
10
15
20
0
0
5
0
5
30
20
50
60
70
BUS 8
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
5
5
0
10
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
12
46
5
5
30
32
0 +10
5
15
20
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
30
5
5
0
5
40
20 10
0
10
40
BUS 5
15
15
20
14
BUS 6
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
20 10
30
30
0 +10
5
0 +10
5
47
5
30
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
STEREO
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
15
10
40
20 10
48
5
0
5
BUS 7
15
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
5
5
0
10
40
43
45
5
30
31
0 +10
5
20 10
0
5
40
BUS 4
15
11
13
10
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
46
5
20
15
20
30
30
50
60
70
16
10
40
5
10
10
15
20
0
0
5
0
5
40
50
60
70
BUS 8
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
BUS 5
5
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
27
29
0 +10
20 10
30
14
10
40
32
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
BUS 6
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
0 +10
5
30
0 +10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
40
42
BUS 2
44
5
20
47
5
5
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
10
40
20 10
0
5
30
BUS 3
15
20 10
50 30
60
70 40
50
10
12
10
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
45
5
20
15
BUS 7
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
BUS 4
15
15
0 +10
5
30
28
0 +10
5
20 10
5
5
0
10
40
BUS 1
43
5
20
13
10
40
31
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
BUS 5
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
BUS 2
15
9
11
10
40
29
0 +10
5
20
46
5
5
0 +10
0
5
30
20
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
10
40
20 10
15
30
BUS 3
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
25
27
5
50 30
60
70 40
50
20 10
20
44
5
5
14
BUS 6
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
10
40
0 +10
15
30
12
BUS 4
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
0 +10
0
5
28
0 +10
5
30
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20 10
5
5
10
40
AUX 8
42
5
20
45
5
5
40
0 +10
5
5
5
40
15
20
30
50
60
70
STEREO
0
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
10
15
20
20 10
0
5
30
BUS 1
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
8
10
10
40
20 10
20
43
5
20
13
BUS 5
15
20 10
0
5
30
BUS 2
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
30
26
0 +10
5
20 10
0 +10
0
5
11
10
40
29
0 +10
5
5
30
BUS 3
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
5
5
10
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
27
0 +10
5
15
20
44
5
0
10
40
20 10
0
5
30
AUX 8
15
20
41
5
10
40
20 10
15
30
9
BUS 1
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0 +10
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
25
0 +10
5
20 10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
40
42
5
30
12
BUS 4
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
10
10
15
28
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
BUS 2
0 +10
5
20 10
0
5
30
AUX 7
0 +10
0
5
8
5
10
40
26
41
15
20
43
5
5
40
48
0 +10
5
30
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
10
10
15
20
40
40
50
60
70
5
0
5
30
20
0
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
16
5
5
0
10
15
20 10
15
30
20
0 +10
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
32
BUS 8
0 +10
5
15
20 10
15
30
5
5
0
10
5
40
47
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
0 +10
5
5
5
30
20
31
BUS 7
0 +10
5
5
0
10
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
10
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
AUX 8
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
5
10
40
24
0 +10
5
20 10
20
23
AUX 6
15
AUX 5
39
15
30
9
5
10
40
11
BUS 3
15
20 10
15
30
BUS 1
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
7
5
10
15
25
0 +10
5
27
0 +10
5
5
40
20 10
15
20
42
5
0
10
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
AUX 7
5
20 10
20
21
23
0 +10
15
30
40
5
10
40
20 10
0 +10
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
4
38
8
AUX 8
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
15
20
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
24
0 +10
10
BUS 2
15
20 10
15
30
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
26
0 +10
5
0
5
40
20 10
0
5
30
AUX 5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
6
5
10
40
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
39
41
5
10
15
20
15
20
9
BUS 1
15
20 10
0
5
30
AUX 6
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
21
AUX 4
+10
5
0
5
10
15
20
22
5
20
7
5
10
40
25
0 +10
5
0
5
30
AUX 7
15
20 10
15
30
23
0 +10
5
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
40
5
10
40
20 10
20
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
19
AUX 2
30
40
50
37
5
0
5
30
20
5
AUX 5
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
38
15
30
8
AUX 8
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
50 30
60
70 40
50
21
AUX 4
+10
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
6
5
10
40
24
0 +10
5
20 10
15
20
0 +10
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
46
0
10
15
20 10
15
30
14
0 +10
5
5
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
30
BUS 6
20 10
15
30
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
5
5
15
20 10
15
30
20
0
10
5
15
20 10
15
30
45
0
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
13
0 +10
5
5
5
30
20
29
BUS 5
0 +10
0
10
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
5
0
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
5
5
0
5
30
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
30
AUX 6
15
50 30
60
70 40
50
20
AUX 3
10
15
20
22
0 +10
5
20
39
5
10
40
20 10
15
30
7
AUX 7
15
20
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
19
AUX 2
30
40
50
37
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
30
40
50
5
AUX 5
0 +10
0
5
30
20
23
0 +10
5
20 10
15
30
10
15
20 10
15
30
44
0
10
15
20 10
15
30
12
0 +10
5
5
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
28
BUS 4
0 +10
5
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
38
5
10
20
21
AUX 4
+10
5
0
5
40
6
AUX 6
15
20 10
15
30
50 30
60
70 40
50
20
AUX 3
10
15
20
22
5
0
5
40
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
43
0
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
11
0 +10
5
5
5
30
20
27
BUS 3
0 +10
5
5
0
5
30
20
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
30
40
50
37
5
0
5
30
20
5
AUX 5
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
40
21
AUX 4
+10
5
0
5
10
15
20
10
15
20 10
15
30
42
0
10
15
20 10
15
30
10
0 +10
5
5
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
26
BUS 2
0 +10
5
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
41
0
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
9
0 +10
5
5
5
30
20
25
BUS 1
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
40
0
10
15
20 10
15
30
8
0 +10
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
24
AUX 8
0 +10
5
0
5
30
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
39
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
7
0 +10
5
0
5
30
20
23
AUX 7
0 +10
10
15
20 10
15
30
20
5
0
5
15
30
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
38
5
10
15
20 10
15
30
6
0 +10
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
22
AUX 6
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
30
40
50
37
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
5
0 +10
5
0
5
30
20
21
AUX 5
+10
5
0
5
10
Input Channel Layer 17–32
10
15
20 10
15
30
4
AUX 4
5
0
5
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
20
0 +10
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
3
AUX 3
0 +10
0 +10
0
30
20
19
AUX 2
5
15
30
40
50 30
60
70 40
50
18
5
5
10
15
20 10
15
20
30
40
50
17
Operating Basics
+10
5
0
5
10
Input Channel Layer 1–16
40
50
60
70
16
BUS 8
48
STEREO
The currently-selected layer determines the function of the channel
strip Encoders, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and faders. Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the
channel strip controls.
The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons, and the
parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer.
LAYER buttons
Layers
Channel Strips
1–8
9–16
[1-16] button
Input Channel Layer 1–16
Input Channels 1–16
[17-32] button
Input Channel Layer 17–32
Input Channels 17–32
[33-48] button
Input Channel Layer 33–48
Input Channels 33–48
[REMOTE 1] button
Remote Layer 1
[REMOTE 2] button
Remote Layer 2
Operation depends on the selected
target (see page 205).
[MASTER] button
Master Layer
Aux Send masters
1–8
Bus Out masters
1–8
Tip: The function of each channel strip fader and Encoder depends on the currently-selected
Fader mode (see page 33) and Encoder mode (see page 34) respectively.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
32
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Selecting Channels
The SELECTED CHANNEL controls enable you to edit
main mix parameters for a channel selected from the Input
Channels and Output Channels (Aux Outs, Bus Outs, and
Stereo Out).
To select a channel for editing using the SELECTED
CHANNEL controls, follow the steps below:
1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a
layer that includes the desired channel (see
page 31).
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
EQUALIZER
2
HIGH
Q
3
4
5
6
7
8
HIGH MID
FREQUENCY
LOW MID
LOW
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
2 Use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to
select the desired Input or Output Channel.
The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indicator
lights up.
If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer2 page (see page 252),
operating a fader selects the corresponding channel.
The Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper-left corner of the display. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant channel parameter, the cursor moves to that
parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page
that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.
GRAB
Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel for which you pressed the [SEL] button
is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the paired partner flashes.
3 To select the Stereo Out, press the STEREO [SEL] button or touch the [STEREO] fader.
Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Stereo Out right channels.
If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves
to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.
Tip: If the Auto Channel Select parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see
page 250), operating a fader or Encoder, or turning on a [SOLO] or [ON] button selects the
corresponding channel.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Fader Modes
33
Selecting Fader Modes
The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode.
1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 31).
FADER
The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode.
LAYER buttons
[1-16] button
[17-32] button
[33-48] button
[REMOTE 1] button
[REMOTE 2] button
[MASTER] button
Fader Mode
Fader
Channel Strip Fader
1–8
9–16
Input Channels 1–16 level
Aux
Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level
Fader
Input Channels 17–32 level
3
AUX
Aux
Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level
Fader
Input Channels 33–48 level
Aux
Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level
Fader
Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).
Aux
No operation
Fader
Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).
Aux
No operation
No operation
Fader
Aux Send master 1–8
output level
Bus Out master1–8 output level
Aux
No operation
No operation
No operation
Note: You cannot select Aux mode while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Master
layer while the FADER MODE [AUX] indicator is lit, the indicator automatically turns off
and the [FADER] indicator lights up.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Operating Basics
FADER MODE
2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button to select a Fader
mode.
• When the [FADER]indicator
lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to
control Input Channel levels or
Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8,
Bus Out 1–8) master levels.
• When the [AUX] indicator
lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to control Input
Channel Aux Send levels.
34
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Selecting Encoder Modes
The function of Encoders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Encoder mode.
1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 31).
2 Press the corresponding ENCODER MODE button to
ENCODER MODE
select an Encoder mode.
• When the [PAN] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as
Pan controls for the
selected layer.
• When the [AUX] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as Aux Send level controls for the selected layer.
• When the [ASSIGN] button indicator
lights up: ...............................................Encoders control the parameters assigned to the
[ASSIGN] button for the selected layer. (See the
next section for more information on how to
assign parameters to the [ASSIGN] button.)
DISPLAY
PAN
AUX
The following table shows the Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode.
LAYER buttons
Encoder Mode
Pan
[1-16] button
[17-32] button
[33-48] button
Channel Strip Encoder
1–8
9–16
Input Channels 1–16 pan
Aux
Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level
Assign
Assigned parameter
Pan
Input Channels 17–32 pan
Aux
Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level
Assign
Assigned parameter
Pan
Input Channels 33–48 pan
Aux
Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level
Assign
Assigned parameter
Pan
[REMOTE 1] button
Aux
Assign
Pan
[REMOTE 2] button
Operation depends on the selected target (see
page 205).
Aux
Assign
Pan
[MASTER] button
Aux
Assign
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
No operation
Assigned parameter
ASSIGN
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button
35
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN]
button
While the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit, you can use Encoders 1–16
to control a parameter assigned to the [ASSIGN] button. Follow the steps below to assign a
parameter to the [ASSIGN] button.
2 Use the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a parameter in the right-hand box.
A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. Refer to the next page for a
complete list of assignable parameters.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Once assigned, press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button to turn on the button indicator. You can now use Encoders 1–16 to control the assigned parameter.
Note: When channels that do not feature the currently-assigned parameter are selected, the
Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the Master layer is selected, Encoders are inactive, because the Aux Sends and Bus Outs do not feature
Phase parameters.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
3
Operating Basics
1 Press the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button.
The Encoder | Encoder page appears. The name of the parameter currently assigned to the
[ASSIGN] button is displayed in the left-hand box. All assignable parameters are displayed
in the right-hand box. (The parameter currently-assigned to the button is highlighted in the
right-hand box.)
36
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
• Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List
#
Parameters
Encoder Operation
Push Switch Operation
—
—
1
No Assign
2
Attenuator
Attenuator
3
Input Patch
Input Channel patch
4
Insert In Patch
Insert In patch
5
Insert Out Patch
Insert Out patch
6
Direct Out
Direct Out patch
7
Phase:
Phase: normal/reverse
8
Insert On
Insert on/off
9
Aux pre/post
Aux pre/post
10
Delay On
Delay on/off
11
Delay Time
Delay Time
12
Delay FB.Gain
Delay FB.Gain
13
Delay Mix
Delay Mix
14
EQ On
EQ on/off
15
EQ Type
EQ Type
16
EQ Low Q
EQ Low Q
17
EQ Low F
EQ Low Frequency
18
EQ Low G
EQ Low Gain
19
EQ Low-Mid Q
EQ Low-Mid Q
20
EQ Low-Mid F
EQ Low-Mid Frequency
21
EQ Low-Mid G
EQ Low-Mid Gain
22
EQ High-Mid Q
EQ High-Mid Q
23
EQ High-Mid F
EQ High-Mid Frequency
24
EQ High-Mid G
EQ High-Mid Gain
25
EQ High Q
EQ High Q
26
EQ High F
EQ High Frequency
27
EQ High G
EQ High Gain
28
Gate On
Gate on/off
29
Gate Threshold
Gate Threshold
30
Gate Range
Gate Range
31
Gate Attack
Gate Attack
32
Gate Decay
Gate Decay
33
Gate Hold
Gate Hold
34
Comp On
Comp on/off
35
Comp Threshold
Comp Threshold
36
Comp Ratio
Comp Ratio
37
Comp Attack
Comp Attack
38
Comp Release
Comp Release
39
Comp Out Gain
Comp Out Gain
40
Comp Knee/Width
Comp Knee/Width
41
Surr L/R Pan
Surr L/R Pan
42
Surr F/R Pan
Surr F/R Pan
43
Surr Front DIV
Surr Front DIV
44
Surr Rear DIV
Surr Rear DIV
45
Surr LFE Level
Surr LFE Level
46
Surr Pan Wheel
Surr Pan Wheel
47
Scene Fade Time
Scene Fade Time
48
AD824 Gain
AD824 Gain
49
Ins AD824 Gain
Ins AD824 Gain
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Display the settings.
Confirm patch selection.
Display the settings.
Metering
37
Metering
This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages
or an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the Meter | Position page appears.
This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels.
3
Operating Basics
1
2
A INPUT section
This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel signals.
B OUTPUT section
This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel (Aux Out
1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals.
2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT
section, then press [ENTER].
You can select one of the following three positions in each section.
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ.
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader.
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader.
Tip: If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, changes on this page will be
reflected on the Input & Output Metering Position parameters on the Peak Meter Bridge.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- CH1-32 page
- CH33-48 page
These pages display the Input Channel 1–32 levels and Input Channel 33–48 levels
respectively.
- CH1-48 page
This page displays the Input Channel 1–48 levels altogether.
- Master page
This page displays the Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels
altogether.
- Effect page
This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4 input and output levels altogether.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
38
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
- Stereo page
This page displays the Stereo Out or Control Room Monitor output level.
Tip: You can also select the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page using the
LAYER buttons. In this case, if an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the Peak
Meter Bridge displays the same signal meters in unison with the DM1000 meters.
4 If you selected the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page, use
the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering
signal types:
• GATE GR....................... The amount of gain reduction for the gate (except for the Master page)
• COMP GR..................... The amount of gain reduction for the compressor
• LEVEL ........................... Input Channel input level, or Output Channel output level
• CH1-32 page
• CH33-48 page
• CH1-48 page
• Master page
Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION parameter. This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position page setting.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Metering
39
5 If you selected the Stereo page, use the METER MODE parameter to select
one of the following two metering signal types:
• C-R .................................Control Room Monitor output signal
• STEREO.........................Stereo Out signal
3
Operating Basics
This parameter setting affects the meters on the Meter | Master page, the ST meter on the
Stereo page, and the stereo meter on the right side of the display.
6 To activate the Peak Hold function, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button, then press [ENTER].
The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak level is held on the meters on the page and
on the Peak Meter Bridge. To cancel the Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button
off. If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, its Peak Hold function switches
in unison with the DM1000 meters.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
40
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Connections and Setup
41
4 Connections and Setup
This chapter explains how to connect and set up your DM1000.
Connections
The following section explains three typical ways to connect the DM1000 to external equipment, although there are numerous others.
Synthesizer
Synthesizer
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
SONG SCENE
REC
REC
MY8-AD96
etc.
MY8-AD96
etc.
Effects processor
Connections and Setup
■ Configuring an analog 32-channel mixing system
SLOT 1
Master recorder
SLOT 2
88
2TR IN DIGITAL
connector
OMNI IN connector
2
1
+48V
OFF
OMNI OUT connector
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
1
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PHONES
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
-8
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AUTOMIX
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
Q
FREQUENCY
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12
DISPLAY
FADER
INPUT connector
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
VOL
Guitar
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
INPUT connector
VOL
Monitoring system
ENTER
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
40
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
40
50
1
17
2
33
AUX 1
18
3
34
AUX 2
19
4
35
AUX 3
20
5
36
AUX 4
21
6
37
AUX 5
22
7
38
AUX 6
23
8
39
AUX 7
24
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
11
42
BUS 2
27
12
43
BUS 3
28
13
44
BUS 4
29
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
PHONES jack
15
10
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
4
STEREO
In this system, the DM1000, with optional AD cards (MY8-AD, MY8-AD96, etc.) installed
in Slots 1 and 2, is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re-enforcement mixer. Up to 32 analog channels, including Inputs 1–16 and line inputs on the AD cards, are available for mixing.
Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the cards.
For more information, see your AD card documentation.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
42
Chapter 4—Connections and Setup
■ Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder
Computer
HDR (Hard Disk Recorder)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MY8-AT
etc.
Effects processor
OUT
MY8-AT
etc.
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
TO HOST USB port
IN
MIDI OUT
OUT
MIDI IN
IN
WORD CLOCK IN connector
WORD CLOCK OUT connector
Master recorder
88
2TR IN DIGITAL
connector
OMNI IN connector
2
1
+48V
OFF
OMNI OUT connector
Synthesizer
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
1
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PHONES
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
-8
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
Q
STEREO
SONG SCENE
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
OUTPUT
PATCH
REC
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
FREQUENCY
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12
DISPLAY
FADER
INPUT connector
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
VOL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
INPUT connector
VOL
Monitoring system
ENTER
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
5
0
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
20
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
15
30 15
40
50
30 15
1
17
30 15
2
33
AUX 1
18
30 15
3
34
AUX 2
19
30 15
4
35
AUX 3
20
30 15
5
36
AUX 4
21
30 15
6
37
AUX 5
22
7
38
AUX 6
23
30 15
30 15
8
39
AUX 7
24
30 15
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
30 15
30 15
11
42
BUS 2
27
30 15
12
43
BUS 3
28
30 15
13
44
BUS 4
29
30 15
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
PHONES jack
15
20
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-TD, etc.)
installed in Slots 1 and 2, is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR, such as
a hard disk recorder. This system will support track recording, overdubbing, track bouncing, and mixdown. You can also control the hard disk recorder’s transport section by sending MMC commands from the DM1000 to the recorder.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Connections
43
■ Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio
Workstation)
Computer
4
Connections and Setup
MIDI interface
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Audio interface
MY-16AT
etc.
Effects processor
OUT
MY-16AT
etc.
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
TO HOST USB port
IN
MIDI OUT
OUT
MIDI IN
IN
WORD CLOCK IN connector
WORD CLOCK OUT
connector
Master recorder
88
2TR IN DIGITAL
connector
OMNI IN connector
2
1
+48V
OFF
OMNI OUT connector
Synthesizer
+48V
ON
OFF
1
+48V
ON
OFF
2
5
4
3
+48V
ON
3
6
+48V
OFF
ON
4
OFF
+48V
ON
5
7
+48V
OFF
6
8
ON
OFF
7
9
+48V
ON
OFF
8
10
+48V
ON
9
OFF
+48V
ON
10
11
OFF
+48V
ON
11
12
OFF
12
13
+48V
ON
OFF
13
14
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
15
16
15
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
16
2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
PAD
20dB
20dB
-60
-16
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
TALKBACK LEVEL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
10
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PHONES
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Surface
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
-4
-6
Q
-6
-8
-8
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
STEREO
SONG SCENE
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
OUTPUT
PATCH
REC
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX5
AUX2
AUX3
AUX6
AUX7
AUX4
LOW MID
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
FREQUENCY
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
OMNI OUT
connectors 11–12
DISPLAY
FADER
INPUT connector
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
VOL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
INPUT connector
VOL
Monitoring system
ENTER
SEL
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
5
0
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
20
20
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
15
30 15
40
50
30 15
1
17
30 15
2
33
AUX 1
18
30 15
3
34
AUX 2
19
30 15
4
35
AUX 3
20
30 15
5
36
AUX 4
21
30 15
6
37
AUX 5
22
30 15
7
38
AUX 6
23
30 15
8
39
AUX 7
24
30 15
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
30 15
30 15
11
42
BUS 2
27
30 15
12
43
BUS 3
28
30 15
13
44
BUS 4
29
30 15
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
PHONES jack
15
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-AE, etc.)
installed in Slots 1 and 2, is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). The DM1000 can provide audio input and output for the DAW. If you connect the
DM1000 and the computer via USB, the DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control
the DAW’s locate and transport functions and change the parameters.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
44
Chapter 4—Connections and Setup
Wordclock Connections and Settings
About wordclock
Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred
from one device to another. Even if both devices use identical sampling rates, digital signals
may not transfer correctly, or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital
audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each
other.
Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each
other. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, transmitting wordclock signals, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing
to the wordclock master.
If you are digitally connecting the DM1000 to other equipment, you must decide which
device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves, then set up all the
devices accordingly. The DM1000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source.
Wordclock connections
To establish wordclock synchronization between the DM1000 and external devices, you can
distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you can use clock information derived from digital audio connections.
The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals independently on the DM1000. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock signals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors.
• Daisy Chain Distribution
In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each
device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock
in connector of the next device. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger
systems.
Wordclock
master
WC OUT (BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
WC OUT
(BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
WC OUT
(BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
Device A
Device B
Device C
Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave
• Star Distribution
In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution box (such as a Yamaha IFU4) is used to
supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually.
Wordclock
master
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
WC OUT
(BNC)
Wordclock
distribution box
WC IN (BNC)
WC IN (BNC)
WC IN (BNC)
WC IN (BNC)
Device A
Device B
Device C
Device D
Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave
Wordclock slave
Wordclock Connections and Settings
45
If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors, you can use the clock
information included in the digital audio signals. In this case, digital audio signals and
wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks
or via the digital I/O cards installed in the rear panel slots.
Digital audio signal
+
Wordclock signal
External device
4
Digital I/O
card
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
1
+48V
ON
OFF
Connections and Setup
2
1
+48V
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PHONES
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
1
2
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
-4
-6
Q
-6
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
OVER
0
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
-8
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
3
4
5
6
7
8
FREQUENCY
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
15
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
50 30
60 40
70
50
30
40
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
1
17
50 30
60 40
70
50
2
33
AUX 1
18
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
34
AUX 2
19
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
35
AUX 3
20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
36
AUX 4
21
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
37
AUX 5
22
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
38
AUX 6
23
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
39
AUX 7
24
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
42
BUS 2
27
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
43
BUS 3
28
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
44
BUS 4
29
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
45
BUS 5
30
31
50
50
60
70
60
70
15
46
BUS 6
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
Specifying the Wordclock Source
To digitally connect the DM1000 to external devices, you must specify the wordclock source
for the system. Follow the steps below.
Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system,
some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to turn down your
monitoring device before changing wordclock settings.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] (WORD CLOCK)
button.
The Word Clock page appears. On this page, you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
46
Chapter 4—Connections and Setup
The source select button indicators are explained below:
A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, and it is in sync with the current
DM1000 internal clock.
No wordclock signal is present at this input.
A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, but it is out of sync with the current
DM1000 internal clock.
This input is the currently-selected wordclock source.
This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received.
This input cannot be selected as the wordclock source because (a) a wordclock signal
cannot be sourced from this input on this type of I/O card, or (b) no I/O card is
installed.
Tip:
• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.
• The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O cards.
• The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for
each installed I/O card.
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source, then press [ENTER].
The following are possible wordclock sources:
• SLOT1/SLOT2.............. These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O cards
installed in Slots 1 and 2 as the wordclock source. Inputs are
selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). The
SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O
cards. The number of pairs depends on the type of I/O card
installed.
• WC IN............................ This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD
CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel.
• 2TRD1 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 input as the wordclock source.
• 2TRD2 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input as the wordclock source.
• INT 44.1k, INT 48k,
INT 88.2, INT 96k........ These buttons select the internal clock generator as the wordclock source. The DM1000 will function as the wordclock master.
Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the
DM1000 and connected external devices, you need to set the data transfer format. See page 57
for more information.
Tip: If an external wordclock source fails, the DM1000 automatically switches to its internal
clock generator at the closest frequency (INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2k, INT 96k).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input and Output Patching
47
Input and Output Patching
The DM1000 is designed to enable you to patch (assign) signals to Inputs and Outputs.
This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the
assignment.
Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input, or if you are unable to monitor
an OMNI OUT, check the I/O patching, as explained below:
4
Patching Input Channels
Connections and Setup
By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
• INPUT connectors 1–16 .................... Input Channels 1–16
• Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 ....................... Input Channels 17–24
• Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 ....................... Input Channels 25–32
• Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1–4 ...................................... Input Channels 33–40
• L&R of 2TR IN DIGITAL
connectors 1–2 .................................... Input Channels 41–44
• OMNI IN connectors 1–4.................. Input Channels 45–48
Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears.
1
Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the
parameter boxes (1) beneath the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are
explained below:
• – .....................................No assignment
• AD1–AD16....................INPUT connectors 1–16
• OMN1–OMN4 .............OMNI IN connectors 1–4
• S1-1–S116......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
• S2-1–S216......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
• FX1-1–FX1-8 ................Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1–FX2-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1–FX3-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1–FX4-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
• 2D1L & 2D1R ...............2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
48
Chapter 4—Connections and Setup
• 2D2L & 2D2R ............... 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)
• BUS1–8.......................... Bus 1–8 Outputs
• AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Send 1–8 Outputs
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) for
which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• By default, you can also use the Encoders to select Input Channel sources. Rotate the Encoders
to display the In Patch/In Patch page and select sources. Press the Encoder push switches to
confirm the changes.
• To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch memory #00 (see page 168).
Patching Omni Outs
By default, the Omni Outs are patched as follows:
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 ..............Aux Sends 1–8
• OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 ............Stereo Bus L & R
• OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 ..........Control Room Monitor L & R
Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears.
1
Signals that are currently assigned to the OMNI OUT connectors are shown in the parameter boxes (1) underneath the connector numbers. The parameter indicators are
explained below:
• – .............................................................No assignment
• BUS1–BUS8..........................................Bus 1–8 signals
• AUX1–AUX8 ........................................Aux Send 1–8 Signals
• ST L/R....................................................Stereo Bus signals
• INS CH1–INS CH48 ...........................Input Channels 1–48 Insert Outs
• INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ..........................Bus 1–8 Insert Outs
• INS AUX1–INS AUX8 .........................Aux Send 1–8 Insert Outs
• INS ST-L/ST-R......................................Stereo Bus Insert Outs
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input and Output Patching
49
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) you
wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch memory #00 (see page 169).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
4
Connections and Setup
• SURR XXX
(“XXX” is a channel name). .............. Surround Monitor Outs
• CR-L/CR-R........................................... Control Room Monitor signals
• CAS BUS1–BUS8 ................................ Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
• CAS AUX1–AUX8 ............................... Aux Send 1–8 Cascade Outs
• CAS ST-L/ST-R.................................... Stereo Bus Cascade Outs
• CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ................... Solo Bus Cascade Outs
• SOLO-L/SOLO-R................................ Solo Bus signals
• M.MX XXX
(“XXX” is a channel name.) .............. Surround Monitor Outs
50
Chapter 4—Connections and Setup
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
51
5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O
This chapter describes the DM1000’s analog and digital input/output connectors as well as
the basic operations involving the digital I/Os.
Analog Inputs & Outputs
AD Input Section
• INPUT connectors 1–16
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and
microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB through
+4 dB.
9
8
INPUT
• OMNI IN connectors 1–4
These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals.
3 OMNI
2
IN
The nominal signal level is +4 dB.
• Phantom Power
1
+48V
OFF
ON
Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for
use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Individual
+48V [ON/OFF] switches on each input turn phantom power on
and off.
• PAD switches
Inputs 1 through 16 feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 20 dB.
1
PAD
20dB
• GAIN controls
-60
-16
GAIN
Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input
sensitivity. Input sensitivity ranges from +4 dB to –40 dB when the
Pad is on, and from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.
• PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators
The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level is 20 dB
PEAK
below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal
SIGNAL
level is 3 dB below clipping.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
The DM1000’s rear panel features Input connectors 1–16, which enable you to connect
microphone and line-level sources, and OMNI IN connectors, which enable you to connect
line-level sources. Signals input at these connectors can be patched to Input Channels. (See
page 105 for more information on patching Input Channels.)
52
Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Omni Outs
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–12
INPUT
The DM1000 rear panel features OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 for
9
8
connecting line-level sources, such as a monitoring system, master
recorder, external effects processor. The OMNI OUT connectors use
balanced XLR-3-32-type jacks, with a rated output level of +4 dB.
These outputs can be patched to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct
Outs. (See page 109 for more information on patching outputs to the
Omni Outs.)
Digital Inputs & Outputs
The DM1000 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to
connect external digital devices. Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and
outputs.
You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing optional I/O cards in Slots 1 and 2.
Digital I/O Connectors
• 2TR IN DIGITAL connector
These connectors accept signals from a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer
format digital audio device.
2TR IN DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-31-type connector and accepts
2TR IN
1
DIGITAL
AES/EBU format digital audio.
2
2TR IN DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and accepts conCOAXIAL AES/EBU
sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.
2TR D1
2TR D2
You can patch signals input at these connectors to any Input Channels (see page 110). You can monitor these inputs via the Control
Room monitors by using the MONITOR [2TR D1] and [2TR D2]
buttons.
• 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors
These connectors output signals to a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer format digital audio device.
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-32-type connector and outputs
1
AES/EBU format digital audio.
2
2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and outputs conAES/EBU
COAXIAL
sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.
You can patch outputs to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct Outs
(see page 110).
SLOT 1–2
These slots allow you to install optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O cards. These cards offer AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options and
digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including
AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any
Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 106).
You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs (see page 111).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs
53
The following mini-YGDAI I/O cards are currently available.
Card
Format
In
Out
MY8-AD
MY8-AD241
MY4-AD
Analog in
Phone jack (balanced) x8
—
XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4
8
Analog out
—
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 25-pin D-sub
4
20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
8
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
MY8-AE2
MY8-TD2
25-pin D-sub
AES/EBU I/O
8
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
Optical x2
ADAT I/O
16
16
Tascam
IEEE1394
Optical x4
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
8
MY8-mLAN2
8
8
25-pin D-sub
BNC wordclock output
6-pin 1394 connector x2
1. This card is a substitution for a 20-bit MY8-AD card.
2. These cards support 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.)
3. This card is identical to the MY8-AE96, except that it features a sampling rate converter.
See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on
I/O cards:
<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR
Digital Inputs
The DM1000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and an optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card feature
sampling rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs
to the current DM1000 sampling rate.
1 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the 2TR Digital Inputs,
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.
The DIO | Word Clock page appears. Use the following buttons to turn the sampling rate
converter on and off.
• 2TR IN D1.....................This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for
2TR IN DIGITAL 1.
• 2TR IN D2.....................This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for
2TR IN DIGITAL 2.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
MY16-AT
XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
MY8-AE96S3
MY8-AT2
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
4
MY8-AD96
MY8-AE96
Connectors
20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
8
MY4-DA
MY8-DA96
Resolution/Sampling Rate
54
Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the 2TR IN D1 or 2TR IN D2
button, then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2TR Digital Input turns on or off. When on,
the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling rate.
Tip:
• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.
• The AES/EBU and COAXIAL parameter fields display the converted sampling rate. (If the
current wordclock is not synched, they display “Unlock.”)
3 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the installed I/O card
inputs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears.
1
Use the buttons in the SRC sections (1) to turn the sampling rate converters on and off.
You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I/O cards on or off in pairs (odd &
even channels, in this order).
Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O
card. If you have installed other types of I/O cards in the slots, or if no cards are installed in
the DM1000, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled.
4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two-channel button in the
SRC sections (1), then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel input turns on or off. When on, the
sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling
rate.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status
55
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status
You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate, emphasis, etc.) of digital
audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Utility | CH Status page appears.
1
2
5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
3
4
5
6
On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to
view the channel status.
A SLOT1, SLOT2
These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent (odd and
even, in this order) channel signals connected to the digital I/O cards installed in Slots 1
and 2.
B 2TR IN
This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the
2TR Digital Inputs.
2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button, then press [ENTER].
Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. Channel Status information
includes the following items:
C FS
Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or if the incoming wordclock is
not synching to the internal clock, “Unlock” appears.
D EMPHASIS
Indicates the Emphasis on/off status.
E CATEGORY
Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This parameter can display the following values:
Parameter values
Description
General
Temporarily used.
Laser Optical
Laser optical device
D/D Conv
Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device
Magnetic
Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device
D.Broadcast
Digital broadcast reception
Instruments
Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string
signals
A/D Conv
A/D converter (without copyright information)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
56
Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Parameter values
Description
A/D Conv with(C)
A/D converter (with copyright information)
Solid Memory
Solid memory device
Experimental
Experimental device
Unknown
Unknown
Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3
(AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit).
F COPY
Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2
(S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit”
appears if copy-protected.
Dithering Digital Outputs
When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems, truncated bits may generate
unpleasant noise. To cancel the audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is
intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is called “dithering.”
On the DM1000, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs. For example,
you can apply dithering to the DM1000 stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit DAT recorder.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears. The dithering settings are displayed on the bottom of the
page.
2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dithering, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device.
Note:
• You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to “OFF.”
• Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of
the DM1000.
Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels, double-click the [ENTER] button.
The copy confirmation window is displayed.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates
57
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates
To operate the DM1000 at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer
digital audio signals to and from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer
format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.
The DIO | Word Clock page appears.
2 Select INT88.2k, INT96k, or an external device running at the higher sampling rates as the wordclock source.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.
The DIO | Format page appears.
5
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
1
4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN/OUT parameter field
(1), and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
set the data transfer format.
The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each
slot input and output.
• DOUBLE CHANNEL
In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at
a sampling rate that is exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate. Data is
handled by two channels. This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the
DM1000 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs.
Note:
• Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding
slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled.
• You cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operating at a higher sampling rate.
• DOUBLE SPEED
In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current higher
sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that support the
higher sampling rates transmit or receive data.
Note: This mode is available only on the slots in which optional Yamaha MY8-AE96 or
MY8-AE96S Digital I/O cards are installed.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
58
Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O
• SINGLE
In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half
(44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate of the DM1000. For example, this is useful
when you wish to send 44.1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the DM1000 running at 88.2 kHz.
Note:
• This mode is unavailable for slots in which optional Yamaha MY8-AE96 or MY8-AE96S
Digital I/O cards are installed.
• You cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operating at a higher sampling rate.
Tip:
• The parameter fields display “–” if the corresponding slots contain no I/O cards or if AD/DA
cards or other I/O cards that do not allow you to set the transfer format have been installed.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
59
Input Channels
6 Input Channels
This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Input Channel parameters.
About Input Channels
METER
(Gain Reduction)
INPUT PATCH
GATE
ATT
Keyin
12ch Group(1-12,13-24....)
AUX 1-8
AUX 8
AUX 1
SOLO
METER
INSERT
4BAND
EQ
INSERT
ON LEVEL
INPUT
DELAY
PAN
PAN
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
METER
LFE
METER
PRE/POST
ON
AUX
COMP
Keyin
Self or Stereo Link
•
6
Input Channels
METER (Out Meter)
METER
SOLO L
SOLO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
INPUT 1(...48)
STEREO L
STEREO R
The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to
the DM1000 and route the signals to Bus 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Aux Out 1–8. The following
diagram illustrates the Input Channel signal flow.
DIRECT OUT 1(...48)
(Phase)
This section switches the phase of input signals.
• GATE
This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking.
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander or limiter. The compressor
can be pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the
EQ. The attenuator enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and to correct signal levels that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid, low-mid, and low).
• INPUT DELAY (Input delay)
This section enables you to delay input signals. You can use this delay to fine-tune the timing
between channels, or as a delay effect with feedback.
• ON (On/Off)
This section enables you to turn the channel on or off. The channel is muted with the Off
setting.
• LEVEL
This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
60
Chapter 6—Input Channels
• PAN
This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus. You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels.
If the internal Surround Sound setting is activated, the Surround Pan settings for 3-1, 5.1,
and 6.1 channels are available (see page 121).
• AUX (Aux Send level)
This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Out 1–8. The signals can
be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position.
• INSERT
This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on-board I/O connectors or I/O cards, or insert the internal effect processors.
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page or on the optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. (See page 37 for more
information on selecting the metering position.)
Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store
the Gate, Compressor, and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries.
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top
panel to directly change the setting.
This section explains how to set the parameters via the display.
Switching the Signal Phase
To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the following /INS/DLY | Phase page appears.
Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for which you want to change the
phase, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting.
1
2
A NOR/REV
These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase. NOR buttons indicate
normal phase, and REV buttons indicate reversed phase.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
61
B GLOBAL
The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels
simultaneously.
Tip:
• The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the
screen.
• You can set the phase separately for each channel in a channel pair.
Delaying Input Channels
To set the delay for each channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until
the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
- DLY 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1–16.
6
- DLY 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17–32.
Input Channels
- DLY 33-48 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
1
2
3
A DELAY SCALE
•
•
•
•
•
The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec
value.
meter..............................Units are set to meters.
feet..................................Units are set to feet.
sample ...........................Units are set to samples.
beat.................................Units are set to beats.
frame..............................Units are set to timecode frames.
B GANG button
When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time can be
set for each channel in a channel pair individually.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
62
Chapter 6—Input Channels
C Channel section
•
•
•
•
You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay parameters include the following items:
msec............................... This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds.
meter/feet/sample/
beat/frame .................... The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples,
beats, or frames, which you select by using the DELAY SCALE
buttons.
MIX................................ This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel)
and wet (delayed) signals.
FB.GAIN ....................... This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback.
Tip:
• The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the DM1000 is operating. (For
example, at 44.1 kHz, the range is 0 through 984.1 msec.)
• If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to
the delay time based on sonic speeds (about 340 m/sec at 15 degrees Celsius). This option is
useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far
apart.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box for setting a note that represents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY
SCALE parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you
to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo.
Gating Input Channels
To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel,
then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F1] button. The Dynamics | Gate Edit page appears.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
A KEYIN SOURCE
Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate.
• SELF............................... The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source.
• CHANNEL.................... Another Channel’s input signal is the trigger source. Select the
desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL
button.
• AUX ............................... An Aux Send signal is the trigger source. Select the desired bus
in the parameter box below the AUX button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
63
B STEREO LINK
This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even
when the Input Channels are not paired.
C CURVE
This area displays the current gate curve.
D TYPE
This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCKING).
Note: You cannot change the gate type on this page. To change the gate type, recall a program
that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library.
E Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals and the amount of gain reduction.
F ON/OFF
G PARAMETER
These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See page 320 for more information on the parameters.)
Tip: You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which features preset programs that
can be used for various applications (see page 174).
Compressing Input Channels
To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input
Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to
display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
A POSITION
Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position of the compressor within the channel from the following options:
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ (default)
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader
B STEREO LINK
This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when
channels are not paired.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate on or off.
6
64
Chapter 6—Input Channels
C CURVE
This area displays the current compressor curve.
D TYPE
This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s compressor (COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)).
Note: You cannot change the compressor type on this page. To change the compressor type,
recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library.
E Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor signals and the amount of gain
reduction.
F ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s compressor on or off.
G PARAMETER section
These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters. (See page 320 for more
information on the parameters of each compressor type.)
Tip: You can store the compressor settings in the Compressor library, which features preset
programs that can be used for various applications (see page 175).
Attenuating Input Channels
To set the attenuator for each channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER
[DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels
appears.
- ATT 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 1–16.
- ATT 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 17–32.
- ATT 33-48 page
This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel
to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB. To reset the attenuation
amount to 0 dB, move the cursor to the desired knob, then press the [ENTER] button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
65
You can also copy the currently-selected Input Channel attenuation setting to all Input
Channels (including those not currently displayed on the screen). To do this, move the cursor to the source knob that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The
confirmation window appears. Select YES to execute the copy operation.
You can also set the amount of attenuation in bits. To set the amount in bits in the range of
+2 bits to –24 bits, move the cursor to the desired bit shift parameter below the attenuator
knob, then rotate the Parameter wheel. (This function is available only for the Input Channel attenuators. You cannot use this function for the Output Channel attenuators.) You can
copy the currently-selected attenuation setting in bits to all Input Channels. To do this,
move the cursor to the source bit shift parameter box that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The confirmation window appears.
Select YES to execute the copy operation.
6
EQ’ing Input Channels
The DM1000’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH)
parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ. The LOW
and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively.
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the channel for which you wish
to adjust EQ.
2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to
display the EQ | EQ Edit page.
2
3
4
1
5
6
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
Tip:
• You can also display the desired page by pressing the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.
• You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the
EQ | EQ Edit page.
66
Chapter 6—Input Channels
The parameters on this page are described below:
A EQ ON
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. You can
press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on
any parameter other than TYPE.
B TYPE
Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital
mixing consoles. TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm.
C ATT
Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in dB. It is the same Attenuator
parameter that appears on the EQ | ATT 1-16, ATT 17-32, and ATT 33-48 pages.
D CURVE
This area displays the current EQ curve.
E Meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel
and its available pair partner.
F LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections
These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters for the four
bands. These parameter values range as follows:
Parameter
Q
Frequency
Gain
LOW
LOW-MID
HPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps), L.SHELF
HIGH-MID
10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps)
HIGH
LPF, 10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps), H.SHELF
21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave)
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)1
1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF
respectively.
Tip:
• The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass filter when the Q parameter in the LOW section
is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L.SHELF.
• The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass filter when the Q parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H.SHELF.
3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then rotate the Parameter wheel
to change the value.
Tip:
• You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired
band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see page 71).
• You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be
used for various applications (see page 177).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
67
Panning Input Channels
Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63. To pan each
channel, press the [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until one of the following pages
that contains the desired channels appears.
- Pan1-32 page
This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 1–32.
- Pan33-48 page
This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 33–48.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. Move
the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value.
6
Input Channels
2
1
A Pan controls
These knobs adjust the channel pan settings.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected Pan control to center.
B MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned. There are
three Pan modes as follows:
• INDIVIDUAL...............In Individual mode, paired Input Channel
pan controls operate independently.
• GANG ............................In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan
controls operate in unison, maintaining the
current pan range.
• INV GANG....................In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel
pan controls operate in unison but move in
opposite directions.
Tip:
• You can use the Encoders to change the Input Channel pan settings (see page 71). This is
useful if you wish to change the pan settings quickly. You can also use the Joystick in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to change the pan settings, unless the DM1000 is in Surround mode.
• Surround Pan is available when the DM1000 is in Surround mode. Refer to Chapter 11
“Surround Functions” on page 121 for more information on Surround Pan.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
68
Chapter 6—Input Channels
Routing Input Channels
You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8, or its own Direct Out. With
the default setting, signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals
to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until
the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.
- CH1-16 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1–16.
- CH17-32 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17–32.
- CH33-48 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 33–48.
Tip: You can also display the desired page by pressing the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.
The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
8
A PAN buttons
These buttons determine whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the
paired Bus outs (Follow Pan function).
B Bus buttons 1–8
These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. If the
DM1000 is in Surround mode, the button indicators change as follows, depending on
the selected Surround mode:
Bus buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Surround mode: 3-1
L
R
C
S
5
6
7
8
Surround mode: 5.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
E
7
8
Surround mode: 6.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
E
8
L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround
Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back Surround
The above table shows the default assignment. The actual assignment may vary, depending on the settings on the Setup | Surround Bus Setup page.
C S button
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to the
Stereo Bus.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
69
D D button
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its
Direct Out. See page 111 for more information on the Direct Out.
E ALL STEREO button
This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page.
F ALL BUS button
This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels on the page.
G ALL CLEAR button
This button clears all routing assignments on the page.
H SURROUND MODE
This field displays the current Surround mode.
6
Viewing Input Channel Settings
■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page for a specific Input Channel, use the corresponding
[SEL] button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [ENTER] button to modify the setting.
43
1
5
2
6
7
8
A GATE section
This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics processor on or off and set the
parameters. (See page 62 for more information.)
B COMP section
This section enables you to turn the compressor-type dynamics processor on or off and
set the parameters. (See page 63 for more information.)
C INSERT section
This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out.
(See page 112 for more information.)
D EQ section
This section enables you to set various EQ parameters. (See page 65 for more information.)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the
View | Parameter or Fader pages.
70
Chapter 6—Input Channels
E Meters
These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its
available pair partner.
F
(Phase) section
You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected Input Channel. (See page 60
for more information.)
G DELAY section
This section enables you to set the currently-selected channel’s Delay function. (See
page 61 for more information.)
H PAIR section
This section indicates whether or not channels are paired. The heart icon ( ) is in one
piece when channels are paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are not
paired. (See page 73 for more information.)
■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux Send Level Settings
To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL]
button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
A PAN/ON/Fader section
• PAN control.................. This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan
parameter.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to Center.
• ON/OFF button ........... This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input Channel.
• Fader.............................. This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected
Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is
set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB.
B SURROUND PAN section
• SURROUND PAN ....... The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected Input
Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected.
See page 121 for more information on Surround pan.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface
71
C BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section
• BUS ROUTING ............This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the
selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the channel
signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter
box below the button.
• FOLLOW PAN..............This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan function).
When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs.
D AUX section
• AUX................................These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s Aux
Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 91 for more information on Aux Sends.)
E Meter section
F GROUP section
• FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP ............... These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ,
or Comp group, if any, the currently-selected
Input Channel is in. If the channel is in a group,
the group number appears. If the channel is not
in a group, “—” appears.
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for
Input Channels.
Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels
1 Press the LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48] button to select a Layer.
2 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.
3 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button, then rotate the corresponding
Encoder to pan the desired Input Channel.
When you rotate the Encoder, the current pan setting display pops up.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
• Meters............................These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected Input
Channel.
• PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER ...........The metering position is displayed below
the meters.
6
72
Chapter 6—Input Channels
Routing and EQ’ing Input Channels
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control.
2 To route each Input Channel, use the following buttons in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section:
• ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons ................These buttons route the currently-selected Input
Channel to a Bus.
• ROUTING [STEREO] button............When this button is turned on, Input Channel
signals are routed to the Stereo Bus.
• ROUTING [DIRECT] button............When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its
Direct Out. (See page 111 for more information
on Direct Out.)
The corresponding button indicator lights up.
3 To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following
buttons to select the band you wish to adjust:
• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band
• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band
• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band
• EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band
4 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,
frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 3.
See page 65 for more information on EQ.
Tip:
• Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 3 resets the corresponding band
parameter.
• Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously resets all
band parameters for the current EQ.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Input Channels
73
Pairing Input Channels
On the DM1000, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels
on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of
paired channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’ linked parameters and
non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below:
Linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Non-linked parameters
Input patches
Faders
Insert patches
Channel on/off
Output patches
Insert on/off
Comp insert position
Solo on/off
Phase
Solo Safe
Delay on/off
Aux on/off
Delay time
Delay feedback
Aux Sends as Pre or Post
Delay mix
Gate
Routing
Comp settings
Pan, Follow Pan
EQ settings
Surround pan
Fader group
Aux Send pan
Mute group
Balance
Fade time
Attenuators
6
Input Channels
Aux Send level
Recall Safe
Routing settings
To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the [SEL] buttons on the top panel
or access the Pair/Group pages.
■ Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons
1 While pressing and holding down the [SEL] button for one of the channels
you wish to pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. (The paired
channel numbers should be odd and even in this order).
Note: The settings of the first channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are
paired if the Pair Confirmation check box on the Preference1 page is not checked (default).
(If the selected channels have already been paired, this procedure will cancel the pair setting.)
The Channel Pairing window appears.
Note: You can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even (in this order) channels. Pressing
the [SEL] button for a non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot pair or cancel a pair
of vertical partners.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
74
Chapter 6—Input Channels
2 Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window, then
press [ENTER].
The following buttons are available in this window:
• CANCEL
Cancels the operation.
• CH x ➔ y
Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel.
• CH y ➔ x
Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel.
• RESET BOTH
Resets both channel parameters to the default settings (same as when Channel memory #01
is recalled).
Move the cursor to the desired button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the pair.
Tip: Pressing and holding down the first [SEL] button of the paired channels and pressing
the second [SEL] button cancels the pair.
■ Pairing Input Channels Using the Display
1 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Input page
appears.
1
2
3
The parameters on this page are described below:
A PAIR MODE
Determines how channels are paired.
B STEREO/MONO x2 buttons
These buttons turn pairs on or off.
C MS buttons
These buttons are available when an MS microphone is connected. MS Decoding can be
used to decode signals from MS microphones arranged as MS pairs. (See page 77 for
more information on MS Decoding.)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Input Channels
75
2 Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field (1), then select the
HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button.
The function of each mode is described below:
• HORIZONTAL.............This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default).
• VERTICAL ....................This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2
that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 & CH17, CH16 &
CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when you wish to use one
fader to control both stereo channels.
When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the
page also change.
3 Move the cursor to the desired channel’s MONOx2 button, then press
[ENTER].
The channels are paired.
4 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the desired channel’s STEREO button,
then press [ENTER].
Tip: You can also pair or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair/Group
| Output page (see page 87).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
6
Input Channels
Note:
• When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers change. The mix parameters of the
paired partners do not change.
• For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical, the Input Channel “2”
indication changes to Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not change. (If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.)
76
Chapter 6—Input Channels
Naming Input Channels
By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You can change these names if necessary. For example, it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel
with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | CH Name page appears.
1
2
You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right
column (2).
2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.
3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using MS Stereo Microphone
77
Using MS Stereo Microphone
The MS system is a type of stereo recording that uses two microphones; mono-directional
M (Middle) and bi-directional S (Side) microphones. An M microphone picks up main signals, and an S microphone picks up directional signals. These two signals are decoded by
calculating a sum (M plus S) and a difference (M minus S), and are recorded to L and R
channels.
An MS microphone is usually a stereo microphone that has both M and S functions. Use an
MS microphone in the following way:
R connector
9
9
INPUT
L connector
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Group | Input page
appears.
3 Turn on the MS button for the channels to which the MS microphone is connected.
The two channels are automatically paired and MS Decoding is turned on. With MS Decoding turned on, the faders and Encoders (Pan parameters) function as follows:
• Odd-channel faders.................M level (Controls the volume level.)
• Odd-channel Encoders ...........ML/MR balance
• Even-channel faders ................S level (Controls the left and right directional spread.)
• Even-channel Encoders ..........SL/SR balance
4 Use the faders and Encoders to adjust the MS microphone level and balance.
When the signals are routed to paired Buses or the Stereo Bus, a sum of signals (ML plus
SL) is sent to the odd-numbered Bus, and a difference of signals (ML minus SL) is sent to
the even-numbered Bus.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
6
Input Channels
1 Connect the R connector of an MS microphone to an odd channel input jack,
and the L connector to an even channel input jack.
Signals from the MS microphone are
MS microphone
input from the L and R connectors. To
use an MS microphone with the
DM1000, connect the L connector to
the input jack of an odd Input Channel, and connect the R connector to
the input jack of the partner channel.
78
Chapter 6—Input Channels
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Bus Outs
79
7 Bus Outs
This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Stereo Out and Bus Out parameters.
About Stereo Out
The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1–8 signals, mixes them into
two channels, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to two
channel output connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
METER METER
INSERT
ATT
METER
INSERT
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL
OUTPUT
DELAY
4BAND
EQ
STEREO R
• INSERT
This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on-board
connectors or I/O cards, or insert internal effects processors.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ.
The attenuator prevents post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too
low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW).
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander, or limiter. The processor can
be located pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader.
• ON (On/Off)
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off.
• LEVEL
The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels.
• Balance
This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to fine-tune the signal timing.
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed
on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen. (See page 37 for more
information on selecting the metering position.)
Note: By default, the Stereo Out signals are output to OMNI OUT 9–10. However, you can
patch these signals to other output connectors or I/O cards using the Output Patch pages.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
7
Bus Outs
Same as stereo master L
STEREO L
OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
COMP
80
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
Bus Out 1–8
The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses,
processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified output connectors or I/O cards.
The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
METER METER
INSERT
ATT
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
METER
INSERT
BUS 1(...8)
OUTPUT
DELAY
4BAND
EQ
ON
PAN
LEVEL
BUS to STEREO
TO INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
COMP
BUS 1(...8)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out. For more
information, refer to the explanation the Stereo Out (see page 79).
• Bus to Stereo
Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In addition to the ON, LEVEL, and
other parameters, you can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other parameters.
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses (in this order) for stereo operation (see
page 87).
Note: By default, channels 1–8 and 9–16 of Slots 1 and 2 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8
outputs. However, you can change this patching on the Output Patch page.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
81
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the
desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or
control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the display.
Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 105 for more information on
how to set inserts.
Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out
To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can
attenuate the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals.
7
Bus Outs
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 64).
Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the [
repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
/INSERT/DELAY] button
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
page 61).
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,
then press the [SEL] button or move the fader to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
82
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then
the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or
faders to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 63).
EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY]
button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to
select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 65).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
83
Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to the Stereo Bus
You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1/2, as well as to the Stereo Bus. You
can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This
is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group Bus.
To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the Routing | Bus To St page.
1
2
3
7
Bus Outs
Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.
A TO ST PAN
These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses.
B TO ST ON/OFF
These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing.
C TO ST Faders
These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels.
Note:
• The settings on this page do not affect the Bus output levels and on/off settings on the Master
layer.
• However, the Bus output levels and on/off settings on the Master layer affect the settings on
this page.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
84
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out
on the View | Parameter and Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select
the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except for the following items:
• The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase
parameters.
• The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter.
■ Viewing Faders and Other Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the
desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.
The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are slightly different.
• Stereo Out Fader page
1
2
3
A BAL
This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
B ON/OFF
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with the [ON] button in the STEREO section.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
85
C Fader
This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links with the [STEREO] fader. The
fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
• Bus Out (1–8) Fader page
345
1
2
7
Bus Outs
A ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) on or off, and links with the
[ON] (9–16) button in the Master layer.
B Fader
This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level, and links with the fader (9–16)
in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
C TO ST PAN
This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently-selected Bus
Out (1–8).
D TO ST ON/OFF
This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected
Bus Out (1–8).
E TO ST Fader
This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently-selected Bus Out
(1–8).
Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Routing |
Bus to St page.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
86
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for
the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8.
Setting the Levels
Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels. Press the [ON] button in the STEREO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off.
To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the
Master layer, then move faders 9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using
the [ON] 9–16 buttons.
EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the bus to which you want to
apply EQ.
2 To control the EQ of the currently-selected bus, select the desired band to
adjust by pressing one of the following buttons:
• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band
• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band
• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band
• EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band
3 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,
frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2.
See page 65 for more information on EQ.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends
87
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation.
Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available
for independent controls) are listed below:
Linked parameters
Non-linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Output Patching
Fader
Insert Patching
Channel on/off
Delay on/off
Insert on/off
Delay time
Solo on/off
Bus to Stereo Pan (*)
Comp settings
Comp insert position
EQ settings
Fader group
Mute group
7
Fade time
Recall safe
Bus Outs
Attenuators
Bus to Stereo on/off (*)
Bus to Stereo fader (*)
Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) are available only for Bus Outs.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the
Pair/Grup | Output page appears.
1
2
The parameters on this page are described below.
A STEREO/MONOx2
These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off.
B F.S
This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan
when the DM1000 is in a Surround mode. When this button is turned on, Aux Sends
follow the Input Channel Surround Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to
external Surround effects processors.
2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send,
then press [ENTER].
The buses or Aux Sends are paired.
3 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus
or Aux Send, then press [ENTER].
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
88
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
Attenuating Output Signals
To attenuate the DM1000’s output signals, display the EQ | Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually.
If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels and specify the amount of
attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals
quickly, regardless of the source signal patching.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Output Att page appears.
1
2
2 Move the cursor in the left column (1), then scroll the list up or down using
the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which
you want to adjust attenuation.
The following outputs and slot channels can be selected:
• OMNI OUT 1–12.....................OMNI OUT connectors 1–12
• SLOT 1-1 through 1-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
• SLOT 2-1 through 2-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
3 Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column (2), then rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of
attenuation.
The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB.
Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB, move the cursor to the
INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
89
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STEREO, etc.). It may be convenient
to name the buses “Monitor Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily identify the signal type.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | CH Name page appears.
1
2
7
Bus Outs
You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right
column (2).
2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.
3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
90
Chapter 7—Bus Outs
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Aux Sends
91
8 Aux Sends
This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8.
Aux Out 1–8
The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to
the specified internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O card connectors.
The DM1000 features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to send signals to the internal and
external effects processors and monitors.
The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal flow.
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
METER METER
INSERT
4BAND
EQ
INSERT
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
AUX 1(...8)
OUTPUT
DELAY
TO INPUT PATCH
AUX 1(...8)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 (see page 79).
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this order) for stereo Aux operation.
Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–8 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 and
Aux Out 1–4 are patched to internal effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this
patching on the Out Patch page.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Aux Sends
ATT
METER
OUTPUT PATCH
AUX 1
AUX 8
COMP
92
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for
Aux Out 1–8.
Setting Levels
To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the
Master layer, then move faders 1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using
the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons.
EQ settings
To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired Aux Out (1–8) using the corresponding [SEL] button or fader, then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are
the same as for Input Channels (see page 72).
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on
the screen and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen.
Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 105 for more information on
how to set inserts.
Attenuating Aux Outs
To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 64).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
93
Delaying Aux Outs
To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
/INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not have the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see page 61).
8
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,
then selecting the desired Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button or moving
the fader.
Aux Sends
Comp settings
To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button
to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and select the desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the
corresponding [SEL] buttons or faders.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 63).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
94
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
EQ settings
To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select Aux Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels (see page 65).
Viewing Aux Out settings
You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the
View | Parameter and Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select
the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1]
button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input
Channels, except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see
page 69).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
95
■ Viewing Faders and On/Off Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the
desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Aux Sends
• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) on or
off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the
Master layer.
• Fader ..............................This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level. It
links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master layer.
The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0dB.
96
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
Setting Aux Send Levels
You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux
Out (1–8). To do this, you can either use the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters
on the screen.
Using the Encoders
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the sends.
2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button.
When the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button is turned on, you can rotate the Encoders to
set Aux Send levels.
3 Select a layer that contains the source Input Channels, then rotate the corresponding Encoders.
The DM1000 displays the Send level of the currently-selected channel.
Note: If rotating the Encoders seems ineffective, check the Mode and Pre/Post parameters on
the Aux | Send page (see page 97).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Aux Send Levels
97
Setting Send Levels from the Display
You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux Sends.
2 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- Send1-32 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–32.
- Send33-48 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.
8
Aux Sends
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
• Aux Send rotary controls
These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels. The current numeric levels
appear below the rotary controls.
• PRE/POST
These buttons enable you to specify the Aux Sends signal source points. The PRE buttons
send pre-fader signals, and the POST buttons send post-fader signals.
• MODE
Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send
levels are fixed); and Variable (Aux Send levels are variable).
• GLOBAL
The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected
Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously.
Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary controls, PRE/POST buttons, and GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons. These ON/OFF buttons turn
on or off each Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux Send.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
98
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
3 Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for
the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode.
• Fixed Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal (0.0dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons
appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons.
• Variable Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader
or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons appear on the
screen.
Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Sends.
Note:
• In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF.
• When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST
buttons are set to POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –∞.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Aux Send Levels
99
4 If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the ON/OFF buttons turn on or off
each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send.
Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked
to each other.
You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Variable mode. To do this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control, then press
[ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.)
Tip:
• In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired Input
Channels are linked to each other.
• GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously (including those not displayed on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Aux Sends
5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3, the PRE/POST buttons and Send
level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send
levels.
100
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels
You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post
parameters.
This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously
adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1–8.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- View1–16 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–16.
- View17–32 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17–32.
- View33–48 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.
These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a
matrix. The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the
same.
1
2
3
A DISPLAY
Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters.
• LEVEL ........................... Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for
Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
• PRE/POST .................... Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for
Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
B FIX/VARI
These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable) for Aux Out 1–8 and are only
for display purposes.
C LEVEL
This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor.
2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE/POST button and press
[ENTER] to display the Level or Pre/Post parameters.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels
101
3 If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired
Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the [ENTER] button to
change the signal source point.
Note: You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode.
The “FIX” indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you cannot switch
Pre/Post.
• Aux Sends in Variable mode ............. The current Send levels are displayed by the bar
graphs. If the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N”
appears in the bar. The bars for Aux Sends that
are set to off are highlighted.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Aux Sends
4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired
Input Channel and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level or turn the currently-selected AUX Send on or off.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the Send level, and
press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off.
One of the following indicators appears, depending on the current Aux mode.
• Aux Sends in Fixed mode .................. A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and
a dot “ . ” appears for Off Aux Sends.
102
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
Panning Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for stereo operation. This enables
you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends.
1 Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 87 for more information on pairing channels.)
2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired
Aux Sends.
3 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
- Pan1–32 page
This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 1–32 to Aux Sends.
- Pan33–48 page
This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 33–48 to Aux Sends.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.
2
3
1
A Aux pan controls
These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired
Aux buses.
B MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned.
C INPUT PAN LINK
When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan.
4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel and
rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value.
5 If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE parameter box and rotate the
Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV GANG, then press
[ENTER].
This Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page. (See page 67 for
more information on Mode options.)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)
103
6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting, move
the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press [ENTER].
The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting, and the pan controls
on both pages are linked.
Tip:
• If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post
parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other.
• If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other.
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)
You can quickly exclude signals from certain channels from Aux Sends by using the controls
on the top panel. This operation is called “Mix Minus.”
For example, when Aux Sends are being used as monitors for the musicians or a narrator,
you can turn off the audio signals of the musicians or narrator, excluding them from the
monitor sound.
Note: If you release the button in the AUX SELECT section before you proceed to Step 2, you
will be unable to complete the Mix Minus operation.
2 Press the [ON] buttons of the Input Channels you wish to exclude from the
Aux Send. You can select multiple channels.
The selected channels’ [ON] button indicators turn off, and signals routed from those
channels to the corresponding Aux Send are turned off. “MIX MINUS FOR AUX * ”
appears on the bottom of the screen. (The asterisk represents an Aux number.)
Tip: At this time, the Send Level controls on the Aux | Send page are grayed out.
3 To reset the setting, while pressing and holding down the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8]
buttons you pressed in Step 1, press the [ON] buttons you pressed in Step
2.
The corresponding [ON] button indicators light up.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
8
Aux Sends
1 Press and hold down the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons of the desired
Aux Sends.
The [ON] button indicators in the channel strip section remain lit while you hold down the
button. This means that signals routed from channels with a lit [ON] button indicator to
the Aux Send are turned on.
104
Chapter 8—Aux Sends
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends
While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on
one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends.
This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the
same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.
1 Press and hold down the copy source layer (LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48])
button.
Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be
unable to complete the Copy operation.
2 Press one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired
Aux Send copy destination.
The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears.
3 To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then
press [ENTER].
To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another
Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input & Output Patching
105
9 Input & Output Patching
This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths within the DM1000 to its inputs,
outputs, and slot channels
Input Patching
Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 1–2, and Slot I/O
cards are patched to Input Channels for use.
Patch example:
Input Patching
Input Channel 1
INPUT connector 2
Input Channel 2
INPUT connector 3
Input Channel 3
INPUT connector 4
Input Channel 4
INPUT connector 5
Input Channel 5
INPUT connector 6
Input Channel 6
INPUT connector 7
Input Channel 7
INPUT connector 8
Input Channel 8
By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
Input Channels
Input connectors and Slot channels
1–16
INPUT connectors 1–16
17–24
Channels 1–8 of Slot 1
25–32
Channels 1–8 of Slot 2
33–40
Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1–2
41/42
2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)
43/44
2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)
45–48
OMNI IN connectors 1–4
You can change these patches, if you desire. To change input patching, you can either use
the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters on the display.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
9
Input & Output Patching
INPUT connector 1
106
Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching
Input Patching from the Display
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | In Patch page appears.
1
Inputs and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the
parameter boxes (1) below the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained
below:
Parameter values
Description
–
No assignment
AD1–AD16
INPUT connectors 1–16
OMN1–OMN4
OMNI IN connectors 1–4
S1-1–S116
Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
S2-1–S216
Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
FX1-1–FX1-8
Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
FX2-1–FX2-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
FX3-1–FX3-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
FX4-1–FX4-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
2D1L & 2D1R
2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)
2D2L & 2D2R
2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)
BUS1–8
Bus 1–8 Outputs
AUX1–8
Aux 1–8 Outputs
2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
The long name of the currently-selected channel is
1
indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (1).
2
Below the channel name is the long name of the
selected input/slot channel (2). (See page 249 for
more information on changing channel names.)
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels.
• You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Libraries” on page 165 for more information.
• The number of outputs of internal Effects processor 1 varies depending on the selected effect
program. (See page 147 for more information on effect programs.)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input Patching
107
Using the Encoders for Input Patching
By default, you can also use the Encoders on the top panel to change the Input Patching.
1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button. The button indicator lights up.
By default, you can use the Encoders to change Input Patching while the [ASSIGN] button
indicator is lit.
Tip: On the Encoder page, you can specify the Encoder function that works while the
[ASSIGN] button indicator is lit (see page 35).
2 Rotate the Encoder of the Input Channel for which you want to change
patching. (Alternatively, press the corresponding Encoder push switch.)
The In Patch | In Patch page appears, and the cursor moves to the corresponding Input
Channel parameter box.
3 Rotate the Encoder to select the desired input/slot channel number you
want to patch.
4 Press the Encoder push switch to confirm the setting (or press the [ENTER]
button).
9
Input & Output Patching
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
108
Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching
Output Patching
The DM1000’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals can be patched to any outputs
and slot channels.
Patch example:
Output Patching
Stereo Out L
OMNI Out connector 1
Stereo Out R
OMNI Out connector 2
Aux Out 1
OMNI Out connector 3
Aux Out 2
OMNI Out connector 4
Aux Out 3
OMNI Out connector 5
Aux Out 4
OMNI Out connector 6
Aux Out 5
OMNI Out connector 7
Aux Out 6
OMNI Out connector 8
By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs and slot output channels:
Output connectors and slot
channels
Signal flow
OMNI OUT connectors 1–8
Aux Outs 1–8
OMNI OUT connectors 9–10
Stereo Out L & R
OMNI OUT connectors 11–12
Control Room Monitor L & R
Channels 1–8 of Slot 1
Bus Outs 1–8
Channels 9–16 of Slot 1
Bus Outs 1–8
Channels 1–8 of Slot 2
Bus Outs 1–8
Channels 9–16 of Slot 2
Bus Outs 1–8
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (L)
Stereo Out L
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (R)
Stereo Out R
2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (L)
Stereo Out L
2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (R)
Stereo Out R
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple outputs and slot channels.
• You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15
“Libraries” on page 165 for more information.
You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for patching signals to output
varies depending on the output connectors and slots.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Output Patching
109
Patching Omni Outs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to OMNI OUT 1–8.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Omni Out page appears.
1
The OMNI 1–12 parameter boxes (1) indicate the currently-patched signals. The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values
Description
No assignment
BUS1–BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 signal
AUX1–AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 signal
ST L/R
Stereo Out signal
INS CH1–INS CH48
Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out
INS BUS1–INS BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out
INS AUX1–INS AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out
INS ST-L/ST-R
Stereo Out Insert Out
SURR XXX
(“XXX” represents a channel name.)
Surround Monitor Outs
CR-L/CR-R
Control Room Monitor signals
CAS BUS1–BUS8
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS AUX1–AUX8
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS ST-L/ST-R
Stereo Bus Cascade Outs
CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR
Solo Bus Cascade Outs
SOLO-L/SOLO-R
Solo Bus signal
M.MX XXX
(“XXX” represents a channel name.)
Surround Monitor Outs
Input & Output Patching
–
9
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15
“Libraries” on page 165 for more information.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
110
Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching
Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 1–2.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | 2TR Out page appears.
Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the 2TR digital outputs.
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Patching Slot Outputs
You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to optional mini-YGDAI cards installed in Slot
1 and 2.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Slot Out page appears.
Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the slot outputs.
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Patching Direct Outs
111
Patching Direct Outs
Input Channel 1–48 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs, as well
as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out. This patching is convenient when you wish to record each
Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Direct Out page appears.
1
2
9
The parameters on this page are described below.
These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs and slot channels) for Input
Channels 1–48.
B DIRECT OUT
Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options:
• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before Input Channel EQ
• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before Input Channel fader
• POST FADER ...............Immediately after Input Channel fader
2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–48) you wish to change, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination.
If necessary, specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Note: If you select a destination that has already been used for an output patch, the patch
parameter box indicates “– (no assignment).” If you assign the Direct Out to an unused destination, the parameter box indicates the corresponding output.
4 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel that is patched
to the Direct Out assigned in Steps 2 and 3.
5 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DIRECT] button.
The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs
or slot channels.
Tip: Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display
the Routing page. On this page, you can simultaneously route multiple Input Channels to
Direct Outs.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Input & Output Patching
A 1–48
112
Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching
Insert Patching
The DM1000’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out
1–8) feature independent Insert Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, slot channels, and internal
effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and
Outs. In this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or
insert internal effects.
Individual Insert Patching
You can patch the DM1000’s inputs, outputs, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and
outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and
Output Channels.
Effects
Input
Output connector
Insert Out
Output
Input connector
Insert In
Channel
1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of an Input Channel or Output
Channel for Insert patching.
2 Press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
page appears.
/INS/DLY | Insert
1
2
3
This page contains the following parameters:
A POSITION
This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor. The
insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Insert Patching
113
B INSERT section
• ON/OFF.........................This button turns Insert on or off.
• OUT ...............................This parameter enables you to select outputs, slot channels, or
internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination.
• IN....................................This parameter enables you to select inputs, slot channels, or
internal effects outputs as the Insert In source.
C COMP section
• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the compressor on or off.
• ORDER..........................This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and compressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point.
With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass through the
compressor first, then the Insert. With the “INS → COMP” setting, signals pass through the Insert first, then the compressor.
3 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box, and rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels,
or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out. The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values
Description
No assignment
S1-1–S116
Channels 1–16 of Slot 1
S2-1–S216
Channels 1–16 of Slot 2
OMN1–OM12
OMNI OUT connectors 1–12
2D1L & 2D1R
2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L/R)
2D2L & 2D2R
2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L/R)
FX1-1–FX1-8
Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
FX2-1 & FX2-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
FX3-1 & FX3-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
FX4-1 & FX4-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
9
Input & Output Patching
–
4 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press
the [ENTER] button, all settings on this page will be cancelled.
5 Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box, and rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the inputs or slot channels
to be patched to the Insert In.
Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter
values (see page 106).
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.
The Patch Select window appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to
select an item to be patched and press [ENTER]. Then, move the cursor to the YES button and
press [ENTER]. The selected item is now patched.
7 To enable the specified Insert patch, move the cursor to the ON/OFF button
in the INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it on or off.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
114
Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching
Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch
You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels (or
all Output Channels). This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the
same patch.
1 To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Insert In page appears.
This page displays Input Channels 1–48 Insert In Patches.
2 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the
patching.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
4 To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Insert In page appears.
5 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the
patching.
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Room Monitoring
115
10 Control Room Monitoring
This chapter explains how to set up control room monitoring and use the Solo and Talkback
functions on the DM1000.
Control Room Monitor
SOLO L
SOLO R
The DM1000 features the Control Room stereo signal path to feed the control room’s main
monitors. By default, the Control Room signal source is patched to OMNI OUT connectors
11 & 12, which can feed the Control Room signal to the control room’s monitor.
SOLO TRIM
SOLO L
SOLO R
METER
DA
DA
SOLO LOGIC
PHONES
LEVEL
[PHONES]
OUTPUT SOLO
STEREO
2TR D1
OMNI IN1/2
2TR D2
OMNI IN3/4
8
8
MONITOR SELECT
2
DIMM
MONO
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
CONTROL ROOM
MONITOR
LEVEL
2
2
10
• SOLO bus
This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Control Room Monitor output,
bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus.
• OUTPUT SOLO
This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Control
Room Monitor output.
Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. The solo function for the most-recently soloed channels is enabled.
• MONITOR LEVEL
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to adjust the Control
Room Monitor level.
• DIMM (Dimmer)
The [DIMMER] button lowers the Control Room Monitor signal by the specified amount.
Note: The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Talkback or Oscillator function is active.
• PHONES
The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You can set the level
independently.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Room Monitoring
• MONITOR SELECT
As a Control Room Monitor signal, you can select one from Stereo Out output, 2TR IN
DIGITAL 1 input, and 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input.
If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page (see page 116), you can
monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the
[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
116
Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring
Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup
For control room monitoring and solo setup, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo/C-R page appears.
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
J
This page contains the following parameters:
A SOLO
This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By default, it is set to Enabled.
B MODE
This parameter determines how the Solo function works. There are two options. The
setting affects only Input Channels.
• RECORDING............... In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed
to the Solo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.
Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected by this
mode.
• MIXDOWN.................. In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed
to the Stereo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.
Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while
the Solo function is enabled.
Tip:
• Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while
recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected
• Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed
soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown.
C SEL MODE
This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the
[SOLO] button of each Channel. There are two options.
• MIX SOLO.................... In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed
simultaneously.
• LAST SOLO .................. In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time by
pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function that was previously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled.
D LISTEN
This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or
Post Pan. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Room Monitor and Solo Setup
117
E SOLO TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of –96 dB to
+12 dB.
F SOLO INTERRUPTION
When this parameter is set to Off, soloed channel signals are not fed to the Control
Room Monitor outputs. To monitor the Control Room Monitor signals and soloed
channel signals separately, change the output patching so that the soloed channel signals
are output independently from the Control Room Monitor outputs, then turn the Solo
Interruption parameter to Off.
G 2TR DIN FLIP
This parameter enables you to specify the signal source that will be monitored when you
press the MONITOR [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
• 2TR D1 & OMNI 1/2 ...These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 and OMNI IN 1/2
inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored
when you press the [2TR D1] button.
• 2TR D2 & OMNI 3/4 ...These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 and OMNI IN 3/4
inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored
when you press the [2TR D2] button.
H SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s return signal to Solo Safe, you can
monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals.
I CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL
This parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room
Monitor signal by the Dimmer function when you press the MONITOR [DIMMER]
button. The amount of attenuation can range from 0 dB to –96 dB.
J MONO
This button switches the Control Room Monitor signal into mono.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
10
Control Room Monitoring
For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they
are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals from
Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the
Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all Solo Safe
settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button.
118
Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring
Using the Control Room Monitor
1 Connect a monitoring system to the outputs (by default, OMNI OUT 11&12)
to which the Control Room Monitor signal is patched.
To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack.
2 Press the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TR D1], or [2TR D2] button to select the
monitoring signal source.
Each button selects the following monitoring signal sources:
• [STEREO] button ........ Selects the Stereo Out signal.
• [2TR D1] button .......... Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL1 signal.
• [2TR D2] button .......... Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL2 signal.
Note: In this case, the [2TR D1] and [2TR D2] buttons are effective only when external devices
are connected to the 2TR Digital Outputs respectively and are turned on.
Tip: If you change the 2TR DIN FLIP parameter setting on the MONITOR | SOLO/C-R page
(see page 116), you can monitor the 2TR Digital Input signal, instead of the OMNI IN signal,
by pressing the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.
3 Adjust the monitoring level using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control
while playing the sound sources.
To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONE LEVEL] control.
Using the Solo Function
You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and Bus Out 1–8 using the
[SOLO] buttons on the top panel.
1 Press the [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo/C-R page
appears.
2 Set the SOLO parameter to On and the SOLO INTERRUPTION parameter to
Off.
Set other parameters on the page, if necessary.
3 To solo and monitor Input Channels, press the corresponding LAYER button
to select a Layer that contains the desired channels, then press the channel
[SOLO] buttons.
The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the MONITOR [SOLO] indicator light up.
Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Control Room Monitor outputs.
Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the Monitor | Solo/C-R page, you can
solo multiple Input Channels simultaneously.
4 To solo and monitor Output Channels, press the LAYER [MASTER] button,
then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.
Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. For example, if you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel, the
first solo channel is temporarily cancelled.
If you solo an Output Channel first, then solo an Input Channel, canceling the Input Channel’s solo will activate the Output Channel’s solo.
5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel
[SOLO] buttons.
The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the
MONITOR [CLEAR] button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using the Talkback Function
119
Using the Talkback Function
The DM1000 features a built-in talkback microphone on the control surface. The Talkback
function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the specified outputs or slot channels. The
Talkback function is useful when you wish to communicate with the musicians in the studio
or record your comments to a recorder.
MONITOR
DISPLAY
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
DIMMER TALKBACK
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Talkback page appears.
1
3
4
This page contains the following parameters:
A OUTPUT ASSIGN section
The buttons in this section enable you to assign the Talkback mic signal to the desired
outputs. (You can select multiple destinations.)
B TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
When the Talkback function is active, this parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room monitor signals. The amount of attenuation can
range from 0 dB to –96 dB.
C USE ..... AS TALKBACK check box
Checking this box enables you to select an AD Input or slot input channel signal specified in the parameter box as the Talkback signal source.
D NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box
If this check box is checked, the Talkback function is enabled only while you are holding
down the [TALKBACK] button. When you release the button, the Talkback function
turns off. If the check box is unchecked, the Talkback function remains effective after
you press and release the [TALKBACK] button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Control Room Monitoring
2
10
120
Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring
2 Move the cursor to the number button of an output channel to which you
wish to assign the Talkback signal in the OUTPUT ASSIGN section, then press
the [ENTER] button to highlight the channel number.
3 If you wish to operate the [DIMMER] button during Talkback communication, move the cursor to the TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL control and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of
attenuation.
4 Press the [TALKBACK] button.
The Talkback function is enabled.
By default, pressing and releasing the [TALKBACK] button once enables the Talkback function. Press the button again to turn off the function. If you press and hold down the [TALKBACK] button for more than 300ms, the Talkback function is enabled as long as you hold
down the button, and the function is turned off when you release the button.
However, if you have checked the NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box on the Monitor |
Talkback page, the Talkback function remains effective only while you are pressing and
holding down the button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
121
Surround Functions
11 Surround Functions
This chapter describes surround panning, which determines how Input Channel signals are
panned within and across the stereo field. It also describes the DM1000’s surround monitoring capabilities, which enable you to monitor, in a surround sound environment,
DM1000 surround mixes or surround sources input via the slots.
Using Surround Pan
About Surround Pan
The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two-dimensional field using a
multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in relation to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you can use the Parameter wheel,
[INC]/[DEC] buttons, or Joystick.
You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene, or record the movement of the
sound image to Automixes. In addition to a normal Stereo mode, the DM1000 features the
following three Surround modes:
• 3-1
This mode uses four channels that include front
left, front right, front center, and rear.
Front L
Center
Front R
11
• 5.1
This mode uses six channels that include front left,
front right, rear left, rear right, front center, and
subwoofer.
Subwoofer
Front L
Center
Front R
Rear L
Rear R
• 6.1
This mode uses seven channels that include six
channels of 5.1 mode plus rear center.
Subwoofer
Front L
Rear L
Center
Rear center
Front R
Rear R
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Surround Functions
Surround
122
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel is routed to the
Buses specified on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 125).
The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in
each Surround mode.
Surround
Mode
3-1
5.1
6.1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
—
—
—
L
R
C
S
Front left
Front right
Center
Surround
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Subwoofer
—
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Rear center
Subwoofer
You can record each surround channel to a separate track to record surround panning. The
following diagram is an example in which each channel signal in 5.1 Surround mode is
recorded to digital MTR tracks.
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 1
BUS1 (L)
BUS2 (R)
BUS3 (Ls)
BUS4 (Rs)
BUS5 (C)
BUS6 (LFE)
DM1000
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 2
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 3
LFE LEVEL
Slot
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
8-TRACK DIGITAL
Track 5
Digital MTR
Track 6
MY8-TD etc.
Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with
them.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Surround Pan
123
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
To configure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1 Surround mode on the
DM1000 and connect a multi-channel monitoring system to the DM1000.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page appears.
2
1
3
A SURROUND MODE
B PAN/SURR LINK
When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are
linked.
C
Press this button to display the Surr Bus page, which enables you to change the Surround
Channel to Bus Out assignment.
2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use.
When you move the cursor to one of these buttons, speaker icons appear, indicating a typical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration.
• 3-1 Surround
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
•
•
•
•
This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons.
The button that is turned on (highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround
mode.
STEREO.........................The DM1000 uses normal stereo mode (default).
3-1...................................Selects 3-1 Surround mode.
5.1 ...................................Selects 5.1 Surround mode.
6.1 ...................................Selects 6.1 Surround mode.
124
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
• 5.1 Surround
• 6.1 Surround
3 Press the [ENTER] button.
The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears.
4 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 enters the selected Surround mode.
5 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning,
move the cursor to the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press [ENTER].
When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings
will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Surround Pan
125
6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment, move the cursor
to the SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER].
The Setup | Surr Bus page appears.
2
1
A BUS1–BUS8
These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes.
B INIT
These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting.
Tip:
• Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page.
• Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround
mode, Bus Outs 1–4 are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are available, and
in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are available.
8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out
Patch | Slot Out page appears, then make sure that each Bus Out is routed
to the desired channel on the digital I/O card.
To monitor signals routed to the digital I/O card in the surround environment, use surround monitoring (see page 131).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
7 To change the assignment, move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter,
rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel, then press [ENTER].
The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel
assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously.
126
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
Surround Panning from the Display
You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel from the display.
1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in one of the Surround modes, then press the
[SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the
Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page appears.
The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel, and its surround pan setting and
available pair partner.
The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround mode.
1
2
3
4
5
67
98
The following parameters are available on this page:
A Surround pan graph
This graph indicates the pan positions in the two-dimensional field, with the listening
position in the center. A small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan position, and a small square ( ) indicates the current position of the Joystick. You can move
the current surround pan position (
) directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon, then pressing [ENTER].
B Trajectory patterns
These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan
moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
C FAST
Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter
wheel.
D Trajectory pattern parameters
•
•
•
•
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
These parameters fine-tune the surround pan trajectory pattern.
WIDTH ................... This parameter sets the left-to-right width of the selected trajectory pattern.
DEPTH .................... This parameter sets the front-to-rear width of the selected trajectory pattern.
OFFSET ................... This parameter offsets the left-to-right direction of the selected
trajectory pattern.
OFFSET ................... This parameter offsets the front-to-rear direction of the
selected trajectory pattern.
Using Surround Pan
127
E LFE
This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal
routed to the subwoofer, and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes.
F DIV
This parameter control determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and
Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100%. When you set
the parameter to 100, the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you set
the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels. When
you set the parameter to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center
channels. This parameter control appears only in 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes.
6F & R
In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls appear, instead of the DIV control.
The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and
Right channels, and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal
is fed to the Left and Right surround channels.
G LINK
This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When you turn on this button, the
F and R controls are set to the same value, and linked together.
H ST LINK
Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that
are currently displayed on the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround
pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired.
I PATTERN
Tip: In 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes, operating the Joystick locates the Pan/Surr | Ch
Edit page.
3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding trajectory pattern button.
The following patterns are available:
•
...................... The sound image moves between left and right.
36
40
40
56
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
128
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
•
...................... The sound image moves between front and rear.
36
•
36
36
36
36
40
48
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
56
12
8
8
44
16
20
16
...................... The sound image moves from front left to rear right. With this pattern,
you can also fine-tune the trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
36
•
40
...................... The sound image moves from front right to rear left. With this pattern,
you can also fine-tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
36
•
40
12
8
8
44
16
20
16
...................... The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc.
With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the
arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )
parameters.
44
44
20
32
28
56
32
24
Using Surround Pan
•
40
48
...................... The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc.
With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the
arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )
parameters.
44
•
129
44
20
32
28
56
32
24
...................... The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval
using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
11
48
32
24
24
24
60
40
52
40
4 If necessary, fine-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET
( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameter values.
5 To set the surround pan position, move the cursor to anywhere outside the
parameter boxes, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
Tip: You can also adjust the pan position using the Encoders if you assign the surround pan
parameters to the Encoders.
6 To adjust the surround pan using the Joystick, press the SELECTED CHANNEL
[GRAB] button (the button indicator lights up), then operate the Joystick.
In this way, you can move the current pan position icons ( ) directly and quickly. Even if
the [GRAB] button is turned off, placing the small square ( ) over the small diamond ( )
will automatically turn on the [GRAB] button.
This Joystick function can be disabled by the Joystick Auto Grab preference (see page 252)
on the Setup | Prefer1 page.
7 To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page,
turn on the ST LINK button.
Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the
linked surround pan to move.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Surround Functions
44
130
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when different trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indicates the
movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the
linked partner.
Trajectory
Pattern
Note: If you record the movement of the linked channels in an Automix, the sound image
moves on both channels when you play the Automix.
8 To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/SURROUND]
button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Surr1–16, Surr17–32, or Surr33–48
page appears.
These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels.
1
2
3
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
131
Surround Monitoring
A Surround pan graphs
These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input
Channels. Move the cursor to the desired channel’s graph, then rotate the Parameter
wheel to adjust the pan settings along the selected trajectory pattern. Turning on the
[GRAB] button enables you to use the Joystick to set the surround pan of the currently-selected Input Channel.
Press [ENTER] while the cursor is on the graph to display the Ch Edit page for the
selected channel.
B
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel left and right.
C
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel front and rear.
Surround Monitoring
About Surround Monitoring
FROM CONTROL ROOM L/R
TO CONTROL ROOM DIMM
C-R to SURROUND MONITOR
SLOT1 1-8
SLOT2 1-8
8
8
8x8
Patch
8
8
MONITOR
LEVEL
SLOT
SURROUND
MONITOR
PINK NOISE
BUS1-8
8
BUS
1kHz, 50Hz
MONITOR
MATRIX
BASS
MANAGEMENT
MONITOR
ALLIGNMENT
DIMM
500-2kHz
BPF
TO OUTPUT PATCH
8
STEREO
2
MONITOR MATRIX OUT
To monitor the Surround Monitor signal via the surround system, you must connect
the system to the output connectors on the DM1000, then patch the Surround Monitor
signal source to these connectors.
For example, if the surround system is connected to the OMNI OUT connector, press the
[OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | OMNI Out page appears. This
page will enable you to patch the surround channel (indicated as “SURR XXX” where
“XXX” is the channel name) to the corresponding OMNI OUT connector.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
The DM1000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions that enable you to
monitor, in the optimum environment, the surround sources in the Buses or those input
from Slot 1 or 2. These functions include down mixing (which enables you to monitor signals on fewer channels) and fine-tuning of surround channel signals according to the monitoring environment.
The surround monitoring functions also feature an oscillator for testing speakers, a monitoring matrix for down mixing, Bass Management for optimizing channel signals for the
monitoring environment, and monitor alignment using individual Attenuator and Delay
parameters for each speaker.
132
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
The following diagram shows an example of 5.1 Surround Monitor signals patched to
OMNI OUTs 1–6.
Use the following two buttons in the MONITOR section on the top panel to select the Surround Monitor signal source.
• [BUS] button
This button selects the Bus Outs assigned to the surround channels
as the source. Turn on this button to check the effects of surround
pan and surround effect settings, or to monitor a surround mix currently being recorded to a digital MTR.
• [SLOT] button
This button selects the Inputs of Slot 1 or 2 as the source. Turn on this
button to monitor a surround mix from a connected multi-track
recorder.
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to
adjust the Surround Monitor level.
MONITOR
DISPLAY
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
DIMMER TALKBACK
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
Note: If you turn on the [BUS] button while Surround mode is set to Stereo, the Stereo Bus
signals are patched to Surround Monitor.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Surround Monitoring
133
Configuring Basic Surround Monitoring
You can set basic parameters for Surround Monitor, including monitor matrix, Bass Management, and monitor alignment.
To do so, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Setup
page appears.
1
This page displays the basic parameter settings in the MONITOR FLOW section (1).
• SURR. MODE
This parameter indicates the current Surround mode. (You cannot change the Surround
mode on this page).
Surround Mode
ST
3-1
5.1
6.1
STEREO
O
—
—
—
3-1
O
O
—
—
5.1
O
O
O
—
6.1
O
O
O
O
When you change the Monitor Matrix mode in the MONITOR MATRIX parameter box,
the area below the MONITOR FLOW section displays the Matrix flow diagram as well as
ATT parameter boxes that enable you to adjust the amount of attenuation for each signal
path. Adjust the attenuation, if necessary.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
• MONITOR MATRIX
This parameter selects a surround mode on the surround monitoring system. By default, it
is set to the same mode as the SURR. MODE parameter, though you can select any mode
that features fewer channels than the current mode. This function is useful when you wish
to monitor, for example, a 5.1 surround source through a stereo monitoring system.
Available modes depend on the current Surround mode.
134
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
The following diagram shows an example in 5.1 Surround mode and 3-1 Monitor Matrix
mode.
Note: You can patch the Surround Monitor Matrix channels to the output connectors.
• BASS MANAGEMENT
You can set the filter and attenuator settings for each Surround Monitor Channel using five
preset Bass Management modes. The following presets are available:
Presets
No.
Parameters
Title
HPF 1, 2, 3
LPF1
LPF2
ATT 1 & 2
AMP
1
DVD Mix w/BS
80–12
80–24
80–24
0
10
2
DVD Author w/BS
80–12
120–42
80–24
0
10
3
Film Mix w/BS
80–12
80–24
80–24
–3
10
4
Film Author w/BS
80–12
120–42
80–24
–3
10
5
Bypass
THRU
THRU
MUTE
0
0
ATT1: Adjusts the level difference between LR and LsRs.
ATT2: Adjusts the level difference between C and Bs.
AMP: Corrects the LFE channel level.
HPF1–3: Cut the low range so that the speakers’ supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with the
subwoofer signals.
HPF1–2: Cut the high range so that the subwoofer’s supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with
other speakers’ signals.
Tip: If you select 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode, use Presets 1 or 2 to establish an appropriate
monitoring environment.
You can set the Bass Management parameters in the following ranges:
Parameters
Range
HPF 1, 2, 3
THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L
LPF1
THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42
LPF2
THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, MUTE
ATT 1 & 2
0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps)
AMP
0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps)
The HPF 1, 2, 3, and LPF 1 & 2 values indicate a cut-off frequency and a filter response. For example,
“80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave.
“L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Surround Monitoring
135
The following diagrams show the Bass Management configuration for each Monitor Matrix
setting, with Bass Management turned on or off.
6.1 ON
5.1 ON
6.1 OFF
5.1 OFF
3-1 ON
ST ON
11
Surround Functions
3-1 OFF
ST OFF
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
136
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
• MONITOR ALIGNMENT
You can adjust the Attenuator and Delay for each Surround Monitor Channel. This function is primarily used to correct the level difference and delay time among speakers.
Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter in the MONITOR FLOW section. The
MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram is displayed in the area below the section.
Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter box and edit the Attenuator or Delay value.
The Attenuator parameters can be set to –∞ dB or from –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
The Delay parameters can be set from 0.00 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps.
Note: These parameter settings are effective only on the monitoring signals, not on normal
Bus Out signals.
Tip: You can store these settings in the Surround Monitor library. See page 179 for more information.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Surround Monitoring
137
Setting the Monitoring Level of the Sound System
1 Adjust the monitoring levels using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control.
All channel monitoring levels change simultaneously.
2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears.
This page enables you to solo or mute monitoring channels, store the [MONITOR LEVEL]
control setting, and select the monitoring source.
1
2
3
A MUTE/SOLO section
B SETTING section
• SLOT 1 & 2 ........................................... These buttons determine which Slot Inputs are
monitored through the Surround Monitor when
you press the [SLOT] button. Turning on both
buttons 1 and 2 mixes the two slot signals.
• C-R TO MONITOR L/R..................... When this button is turned on, the Left and Right
Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Control Room Monitors.
C STATUS section
This section enables you to set the output levels of the currently-selected Surround
Monitors.
• SURROUND MODE ...This parameter displays the current Surround mode.
• MONITOR LEVEL.......This parameter indicates the current Surround Monitor level.
• SET SPL85.....................This button enables you to calibrate the volume setting of the
[MONITOR LEVEL] control to 85 dB SPL, the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers, and
then store the value.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
This section enables you to mute or solo Surround Monitor Channels for each Bus.
• SOLO .............................This button turns the Surround Monitor Solo function on or
off. When this button is turned on, you can select speaker icons
(
) to solo certain Buses.
•
buttons .................These buttons mute or unmute the speakers. The meters connected to the speaker icons indicate the signal level of the corresponding Buses.
138
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
• SNAP TO SPL85........... Turning on this button resets the [MONITOR LEVEL] control
setting to the value stored by the SET SPL85 button.
Note: The Surround Monitor Mute and Solo functions are reset to the default condition when
you change the Surround mode.
3 Move the cursor to the SET SPL button, then press [ENTER] to turn on the
button.
The volume setting of the [MONITOR LEVEL] control is calibrated to 85 dB SPL and
stored.
If you store the cinema standard level in this way, moving the cursor to the SNAP TO SPL85
button and pressing [ENTER] always restores the stored value, even after you adjust the
[MONITOR LEVEL] control.
Tip: When the SET SPL button is turned on, the standard value (85.0 dB ) indicated in the
MONITOR LEVEL box is applied to the stored [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting.
Using the Oscillator for Surround Monitor
The DM1000 features a dedicated Oscillator that enables you to check the output and sound
of the surround sound speakers. You can send the Oscillator signal to certain speakers or to
each speaker in turn. This function is useful when you wish to check the volume balance
and phase of the surround monitor speakers.
Tip: This Oscillator is available only for Surround monitoring.
1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr
Setup page appears.
The SPEAKER SETUP section enables you to turn the Oscillator on or off and specify the
signal destination.
1
A SPEAKER SETUP
You can select the Oscillator waveform and the speakers to which the Oscillator signal is
sent.
• OSC. .............................. This parameter selects the Oscillator waveform.
• ON/OFF ........................ This button turns the Oscillator on or off.
• ROTATE ........................ When the ROTATE button is on, the Oscillator signal is output
by each speaker in turn, with an interval of five seconds (3-second signal and 2-second pause).
•
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
(Speaker) buttons.......................These buttons turn the Oscillator on or off for
each speaker.
Surround Monitoring
•
139
(SW Phase) button ..................... This button reverses the phase of the signal output to the Subwoofer (SW).
2 Make sure that the Speaker button (
) for the speaker to which you want
to output the Oscillator signal is turned on.
If the button is off, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to turn it on.
3 Move the cursor to the OSC. parameter box, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select one of the following Oscillator waveforms.
• PINK NOISE.................Pink noise
• 500–2 kH .......................Pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF
• 1 kHz..............................1 kHz sinewave
• 50 Hz..............................50 Hz sinewave
4 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn the Oscillator on.
The speaker specified in Step 2 outputs the Oscillator signal. If necessary, adjust the speaker
volume balance in the MONITOR ALIGNMENT section on the Surr Setup page (see
page 136).
Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels
You can patch individual Slot Inputs to Surround Monitor Channels as follows.
1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in the same Surround mode as the monitoring
source.
3 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr
Patch page appears.
This page enables you to make the Slot Input to Surround Monitor Channel assignment.
4 Move the cursor to a patch parameter for which you want to change the
assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel to select a slot channel to be
assigned to the Surround Monitor channel.
To assign no channels, select “–.” Set all unnecessary channels to “–.”
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
11
Surround Functions
2 Press the MONITOR [SLOT] button.
Slot 1 or 2 Input is selected as the surround monitor source.
140
Chapter 11—Surround Functions
5 If necessary, move the cursor to the LEVEL parameter box, then use the
Parameter wheel to adjust the Slot Input levels simultaneously.
You can adjust the signal levels in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB .
6 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears.
In the SETTING section of the Surround page (see page 137), you can select a Slot Input to
be monitored.
7 Move the cursor to the SLOT 1 or 2 button in the SETTING section, then press
[ENTER] to select the desired monitoring Slot Input.
You can now monitor the selected Slot Input source via Surround Monitor.
Tip: You can make a surround source channel assignment for each Surround mode.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
141
12 Grouping Channels & Linking
Parameters
This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple channels and link
the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation.
Grouping & Linking
On the DM1000, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple Input Channels or
multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8) and link the EQ or compressor
parameters.
The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Channels.
• Fader group
Input Channel or Output Channel faders can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel
Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups. When channel faders are grouped,
operating one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders while
maintaining the relative level differences.
• Mute group
Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be grouped. There are eight Input
Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON] buttons
are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the [ON] buttons for all the grouped channels
on or off. A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time, which
turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons.
• Compressor Link
Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked. There are four compressor
links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you
change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied
to all other linked channels.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
12
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
• EQ Link
Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked. There are four EQ links for Input
Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings. When you change an EQ
parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked
channels.
142
Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups
Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for Input Channels or Output
Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8).
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the
pages that contains the desired group and channels appears.
- Fader1–32 page
- Fader33–48 page
These pages enable you to set Fader groups (A–H) for Input Channels 1–48.
- Out Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs
(1–8).
• Fader1–32 page
- Mute1–32 page
- Mute33–48 page
These pages enable you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input Channels 1–32 and 33–48
respectively.
- Out Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).
• Mute1–32 page
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups
143
2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) button to select a group.
Example: Fader group C is selected.
3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the group.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the group.
Example: Input Channels 1–6, and 13–14 have been added to
Fader group C.
4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add
to the group.
The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the
faders when the channels were added to the group.
The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the [ON] button status when
the channels were added to the group.
5 To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE
column, then press [ENTER].
When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled.
6 To use a fader group, operate one of the faders for the grouped channels.
Note:
• If you wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page
is displayed, first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to
change the level from the group.
• If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL] button for the desired channels
to temporarily remove them from the group, then change the level balance.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
12
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair partner is automatically added to
the group.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.
144
Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
7 To use a mute group, press one of the [ON] buttons for the grouped channels.
All channels in the group switch their on/off status.
Note:
• While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off.
• If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off, first turn off the Enable button,
or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group.
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters
Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output
Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8). This function enables you to set EQ or compressor
parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the
following pages appears.
- In EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input Channels.
- Out EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters
145
- In Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for Input Channels.
- Out Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs
(1–8).
12
Example: EQ link C for Input Channels is selected.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) cursor button to select a link to which you want
to add channels.
146
Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor
link.
The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the link.
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 6, 9–10 and 14 have been
added to EQ link C.
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the
link.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.
4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add
to the link.
The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all subsequently-added channels.
5 After all desired channels are added to the link, edit the EQ or compressor
parameters for one of the linked channels.
The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Internal Effects
147
13 Internal Effects
This chapter describes how to use the DM1000’s internal effects processors.
About the Internal Effects
EFFECT 3
OUTPUT
1
2
EFFECT 4
1
2
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
1
2
OUTPUT
1
2
INPUT
EFFECT4 OUT 1-2
INPUT
EFFECT3 OUT 1-2
EFFECT 2
INPUT
EFFECT2 OUT 1-2
SELECT
EFFECT1 OUT 1-2
INPUT
FX1 SEND
1-8
FX2 SEND
1-2
1
2
INSERT OUT
EFFECT 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
The DM1000 also features the Effects library, which contains 52 preset programs and 76
user programs.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Internal Effects
1
2
FX3 SEND
1-2
AUX1-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FX4 SEND
1-2
The DM1000 features four internal multi-effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends
or by inserting them into specific channels.
These effects processors offer numerous types of effects, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multi-channel effects designed especially
for use with surround sound.
Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources. For example, effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to Input Channels (effects
send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux
Outs, or the Stereo Out.
Effects processor 1 features eight assignable inputs and outputs, and creates 1-in/2-out,
2-in/2-out, or multi-channel surround effects.
Effects processors 2 through 4 feature two assignable inputs and outputs, and create
1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effects.
148
Chapter 13—Internal Effects
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends
You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux
Outs, and effects processor outputs to Input Channels.
1 Recall an effect program you wish to use.
See page 169 for more information on recalling effect programs.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In
Patch | Effect page appears.
This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.
1
3 4
2
This page contains the following parameters:
A IN
These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors.
B OUT
These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects processors.
C FOLLOW SURROUND
When surround effects (see page 153) are recalled to Effects processor 1, this button
sorts the effect inputs and outputs displayed in the list according to the order specified
on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 125).
D
button
This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which enable you to adjust the effect
parameters.
3 To select a signal to be input to the effects processor, move the cursor to
the desired In parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select a signal
from the following options, then press [ENTER].
• – ..................................... No assignment
• AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Outs 1–8
• INS CH1–48 ................. Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out
• INS BUS1–8.................. Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out
• INS AUX1–8 ................. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out
• INS ST-L & INS ST-R .. Stereo Out L & R Insert Out
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends
149
• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor outputs
You cannot select outputs FX1–3 to FX1–8. In addition, you
cannot select the output of the effects processor you are currently using.
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select Aux 1–8 (in most cases).
You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2-in/2-out effect programs.
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs.
• Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select
window appears. This window enables you to select the input source quickly.
4 To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the
desired OUT parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select the signal
destination from the following options, then press [ENTER].
• – .....................................No assignment
• CH1–48 .........................Input Channels 1–48
• INS CH1–48..................Input Channel Insert In
• INS BUS1–8 ..................Bus Out 1–8 Insert In
• INS AUX1–8..................Aux Out 1–8 Insert In
• INS ST-L & INS ST-R...Stereo Out Insert In
• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor inputs
You cannot select the input of the effects processor you are currently using.
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select CH 1–48 (in most cases). The
channels you assign here will become the effects return channels.
You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect
program to create stereo effects.
Note: You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a
channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box
switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned).
5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor.
Refer to chapter 8 “Aux Sends” on page 91 for information on setting the Aux Sends.
Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor) on the effects
return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, causing a signal loop
and possibly damaging your speakers.
Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level. At this time, you
can view the level on the Meter | Master page (see page 37).
6 Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect
outputs.
Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux Sends with the original dry sound, set the
effect’s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
13
Internal Effects
Tip:
• You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes, as explained in
Step 3.
• The number of inputs and outputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of
effect programs initially recalled.
150
Chapter 13—Internal Effects
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels
You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus
Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out).
Note: If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert
them into other channels.
1 Select an internal Effects processor (1–4), then recall the desired effect programs.
2 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel or Output
Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects.
Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the left and right Stereo
Out channels.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/Ins/Dly | Insert page appears.
4 Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION
section.
5 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section, then select
the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1.
• FX1-1 through FX1-8 . Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1 & FX2-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1 & FX3-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1 & FX4-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
7 Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section, select the
outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 5 and 6, then press [ENTER]
to confirm the setting.
8 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the INSERT section, then press
[ENTER] to turn on the button.
Effect insertion is now enabled.
Tip:
• After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects,
according to the purpose and effects type.
• Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.
The Patch Select window appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Editing Effects
151
Editing Effects
To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish
to edit appears.
Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages:
• Effects Processor 1.......FX1 Edit page
• Effects Processor 2.......FX2 Edit page
• Effects Processor 3.......FX3 Edit page
• Effects Processor 4.......FX4 Edit page
These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters.
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
A EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects
processor.
B TYPE
C
button
Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for
the selected effects processor.
D
button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page,
which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.
E MIX BALANCE
This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals. When
the parameter is set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet
signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently-selected effects processor.
F TEMPO
This section displays the parameters that appear only when a delay effect type or a modulation-based effect type is selected. These TEMPO parameters calculate and set the
delay time for delay effects, or the modulation frequency for modulation effects, relative
to the specified tempo and note length. Use these parameters along with the SYNC or
NOTE parameter located at the bottom of the display page.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Internal Effects
This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects processor. The I/O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter.
13
152
Chapter 13—Internal Effects
When you turn on the SYNC parameter, the DM1000 recalculates the delay time or
modulation frequency based on the TEMPO parameter value (tempo) and the NOTE
parameter value (note). For example, if the TEMPO parameter is set to 120BPM and the
NOTE parameter is set to one eighth note, turning on the SYNC parameter sets the
delay time to 250 msec and the modulation frequency to 0.25 Hz.
Tip:
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the TEMPO or NOTE parameter, the DM1000
recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency.
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the delay time or modulation frequency, the
NOTE parameter value changes based on the TEMPO parameter setting.
• TEMPO ......................... This parameter control sets the TEMPO parameter value in
BPM.
• MIDI CLK..................... Turning on the MIDI CLK by moving the cursor to this button
and pressing [ENTER] updates the TEMPO data based on the
MIDI Clock information received at the specified MIDI Rx
port. (The TEMPO data is not updated if the MIDI Clock
tempo is outside the range of 25 to 300 BPM.)
• TAP TEMPO................. You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to this
button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The DM1000
calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your
two taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button. (The TEMPO data is
not updated if the tap tempo is outside the range of 25 to
300 BPM.)
Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect, the recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates the
current status.
G Meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively. There are eight meters when Effects processor 1 is selected; two when
Effects processors 2–4 are selected.
Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter | Effect
1–4 pages (see page 37).
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as
a new program in the Effects library (see page 169).
Note: You cannot change the effects type on this page. To change the effects type, recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
About Surround Effects
153
About Surround Effects
The effects types available for Effects processor 1 include surround effects that support
5.1-channel (AUTO PAN 5.1, CHORUS 5.1, etc.). Surround effects are multi-channel
effects that feature up to six inputs and six outputs, and enable you to create the effect of the
sound image moving or circling back and forth and left to right, and to process up to six
channel input signals simultaneously.
Note:
• Only Effects processor 1 enables you to recall Surround effects settings.
• Recalling certain surround effects into Effects processor 1 will disable Effects processors 2–4.
The DM1000 Surround mode setting does not affect the surround effects. For example,
even if the DM1000 is in Stereo Surround mode, you can recall a surround effect program
and use its 6-channel inputs and outputs. However, to monitor the effect signals correctly,
you must patch the effect outputs to Input Channels and monitor the signals using the Surround Monitor function (see page 131).
About Plug-Ins
If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot 1 or 2, you
can use plug-in effects in addition to the internal effects processors.
You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in input. The plug-in output
can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins.
To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-IN Edit1
or P-IN Edit 2 page appears. If you installed a mini-YGDAI card in Slot 1, use the P-IN Edit1
page to set the plug-in. If you installed the card in Slot 2, use the P-IN Edit2 page.
For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the plug-in card.
13
Internal Effects
As of February 2003, the DM1000 supports the following plug-in cards. Visit the Yamaha
web site for the latest information on compatible plug-in cards.
• Waves .............................Y56K
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
154
Chapter 13—Internal Effects
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Scene Memories
155
14 Scene Memories
This chapter describes Scene memories, which store DM1000 mix and effects settings.
About Scene Memories
Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of DM1000 channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a “Scene” in a special memory area.
There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the
controls on the top panel.
Tip:
• You can also recall Scenes by replaying Automixes (see page 181) or by transmitting Program
Changes from external MIDI devices (see page 239).
• You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see
page 246).
What is Stored in a Scene?
The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene:
Scene
Parameters
All channel faders
Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels
Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels
All channel [ON] button settings
All channel Phase & Delay settings
All channel Attenuator settings
Mix parameters
All channel Compressor settings
Input Channel Gate settings
All channel EQ settings
All channel Pan settings
All channel routings
Fader groups, Mute groups, EQ links, and Compressor links
All channel pair settings
Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1–4 and their
parameter settings
Remote Layer
Fader, Encoder and [ON] button status (only when Remote
Control Target is set to USER DEFINED)
Scene settings
Scene titles and Fade Time settings
Input Patching
Input Patch library numbers
Output Patching
Output Patch library numbers
Note:
• Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the
time the Scene is stored, but exclude current (edited) Input and Output patching.
• If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries, recalling a Scene
may change the current patching.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Scene Memories
Effects parameters
14
156
Chapter 14—Scene Memories
About Scene Numbers
Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #0 through #99. You can store Scenes in
Scene memories #1–99. When you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number (Ud, 00–99)
appears on the Scene memory display and at the top of the display page.
Scene memory #0 (#00 on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory
that contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To reset all mix parameters on
the DM1000 to their initial or default values, recall Scene memory #0.
Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250) enables
you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or –∞ dB when Scene
memory #0 is recalled.
Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory
that contains the mix settings immediately before you most recently recalled or stored
a Scene. To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory
#U.
When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit indicators appear (the dot in
the Scene memory display and “EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled. The contents of
the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained while the DM1000
is turned off. This allows the DM1000 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on
the power.
02
Scene memory display
02
Dot
Display
Edit indicator
The contents of recalled Scene memory
#2 match the current settings on the
DM1000, and the Edit indicator remains
off.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
The parameters of recalled Scene memory #2
were edited. Therefore, the Edit indicators
appear, indicating that the current settings on
the DM1000 do not match Scene memory #2.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
157
Storing and Recalling Scenes
You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the display.
Note:
• When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do
not want to store. Make sure that no settings, especially faders, have been adjusted unintentionally.
• If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments
you want, then store the Scene. You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene
memory, just in case.
Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY
Buttons
You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes.
1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to
store as a Scene.
2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene
memory number.
If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes on
the Scene memory display.
Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you
cannot store Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories (see
page 158).
3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button.
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored.
Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the
Utility | Prefer1 page (see page 250). In this case, the stored Scene will have the same name as
the one recalled most-recently.
5 To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to
select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL]
button.
Tip: If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the Utility | Prefer1 page, a Scene
recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled (see page 250).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
14
Scene Memories
4 Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.
158
Chapter 14—Scene Memories
Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page
On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of
Scenes.
1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to
store as a Scene.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Scene
page appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a
Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following buttons, then press
[ENTER].
The stored Scene memory titles are displayed. The DM1000 displays the message “No
Data!” for empty Scene memories.
A TITLE EDIT
Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit a selected
Scene title.
B RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory.
C STORE
This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. By default, a confirmation window appears before you store the Scene.
D CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory.
E PROTECT ON/OFF
This button switches on and off the write-protection of the contents of the selected
Scene memory. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is
write-protected.
F PATCH LINK INPUT
These parameters indicate the Input Patch library numbers selected at the time the
Scenes were stored. When you recall a Scene, the linked Input patch is recalled as well.
You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Auto Scene Memory Update
159
G PATCH LINK OUTPUT
These parameters indicate the Output Patch library numbers selected at the time the
Scenes were stored. When you recall a Scene, the linked Output patch is recalled as well.
You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
Auto Scene Memory Update
If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250) is
turned on, parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory, which is available for each Scene. This is called the Auto Update function.
If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled
are stored in the Scene’s Shadow memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of
the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately.
Therefore, even after you recall the Original Scene memory, you can recall the edited
version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits.
When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active
by viewing the Edit indicators.
02
Scene memory display
02
Dot
Display
Edit indicator
Original Scene
Shadow memory
If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored when you store the Scene. (The
contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical.) When recalling
Scenes in an Automix or via MIDI Program Change messages, the contents of the Original
memory are always recalled, even if the Auto Update function is enabled.
14
Scene Memories
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
160
Chapter 14—Scene Memories
Fading Scenes
You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders to move to their new
positions when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). The Fade Time setting
is stored in each Scene.
Fading Input Channels
To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–48, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the cursor to the desired channel parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
modify the Fade Time setting.
1
2
3
A Global Fade Time
When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the currently-specified Fade
Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.) This
check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page.
B ALL CLEAR
This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00.0 second.
C INPUT CH1–48
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range
of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in
unison with its partner.
Tip:
• After you set the Fade Time, if you operate a certain fader while recalling a Scene, the fader’s
Fade Time setting is ignored.
• You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time setting to all Input Channels
by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade
Time for all channels simultaneously.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Fading Scenes
161
Fading Output Channels
To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8),
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page
appears.
The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page.
1
2
3
A BUS1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out (1–8) in the range
of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds.
B AUX1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1–8.
C STEREO
This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out.
Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output
Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.
14
Scene Memories
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
162
Chapter 14—Scene Memories
Recalling Scenes Safely
When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situations, you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by
using the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories.
To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly
until the Scene | Rcl Safe page appears.
1
2
4
3
A Global Recall Safe
When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are
ignored and the current settings are retained.
B SAFE
This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function.
C MODE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain
unaffected by Scene recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following parameters:
ALL ................................ All parameters
FADER........................... Channel faders
ON.................................. Channel On/Off parameters
PAN................................ Channel Pan parameters
EQ .................................. Channel EQ parameters
COMP............................ Channel Comp parameters
GATE ............................. Channel Gate parameters
AUX ............................... Channel Aux Send levels
AUX ON ........................ Aux Send On/Off parameters
Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons.
D RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section
This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene
recalls, including Input Channels 1–48, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, internal effects processors. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and effects for
which the buttons are turned on.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Sorting Scenes
163
Sorting Scenes
You can sort Scenes in Scene memories.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Sort
page appears.
1
2
2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list (1) in the left column, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Scene memory you wish to move.
3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list (2) in the right column, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position
to which you want to move the source Scene memory.
4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination.
The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly.
14
Scene Memories
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
164
Chapter 14—Scene Memories
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Libraries
165
15 Libraries
This chapter describes the DM1000’s various libraries.
About the Libraries
The DM1000 features nine libraries that enable you to store Channel, Input Patch, Output
Patch, Effects, and other data. You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to
restore previous parameter values.
The DM1000 offers the following libraries:
• Channel Library
• Input Patch Library
• Output Patch Library
• Effects Library
• Bus to Stereo Library
• Gate Library
• Compressor Library
• EQ Library
• Surround Monitor Library
Tip:
• You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up your important data.
• You can also store library data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).
General Library Operation
Most library functions are the same for each library.
1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages.
The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter
part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page.
The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page.
15
Libraries
1
2
3
4
The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page. The message “No Data!”
appears in the title column of empty library memories.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
166
Chapter 15—Libraries
An “ ” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only preset memories. You cannot store,
clear, or edit the titles of these memories.
Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories. Recall memory #0 to reset the parameter settings to their initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store operations.
2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the
desired memory.
The selected memory appears inside the dotted box.
3 Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press
[ENTER].
A TITLE EDIT
This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit the title of the
selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm
the edited title. See page 30 for more information on entering characters.
B RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory. If you turn on the Recall
Confirmation parameter on the Setup | Prefer1 page, the DM1000 displays a memory
recall confirmation window.
C STORE
This button stores the settings to the selected memory. Before you store the settings, you
can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window. See page 30 for more information
on entering characters.
You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Confirmation parameter
on the Setup | Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the name “New Data”
will be used as a title for the Scene memory.
D CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected memory. After you press [ENTER], the
DM1000 displays a confirmation window. To execute the delete operation, move the
cursor to the OK button in the confirmation window, then press [ENTER].
Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation,
the settings will be lost. Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
167
Using Libraries
Channel Library
Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel parameter settings. The library contains two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable)
memories.
You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected channels from the Channel library.
For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to Bus Outs,
Aux Sends, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to
any channels.
Follow the steps below to use the Channel library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F3] button.
The View | Library page appears.
1
2
3
4
A SEL CH
This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel.
B CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel, its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here.
C Level meters
D STORED FROM
This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the
selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains Input Channel settings, its Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displayed below
this parameter.
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.
If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel,
an alarm mark ( ) and the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED FROM
parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the
currently-selected channel.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Libraries
These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected channel and the available partner.
15
168
Chapter 15—Libraries
The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode, Aux pair, and other non-channel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destination channel. However, if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination
channel match, you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed. (For
unmatched parameter settings, the DM1000 will use the settings in the memory that is to
be recalled.)
The following preset memories are available for the Channel library.
No.
Preset Name
Description
0
Reset (–∞ dB)
This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel
to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to (–∞ dB).
1
Reset (0 dB)
This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel
to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).
Input Patch Library
The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings. The library
contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Library page appears. For details on storing and recalling
memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.
Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
Input Channels 1–16
INPUT connectors 1–16
Input Channels 17–24
Channels 1–8 of Slot 1
Input Channels 25–32
Channels 1–8 of Slot 2
Input Channels 33–40
Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1 & 2
Input Channels 41–44
2TRD1 & D2
Input Channels 45–48
OMNI IN connectors 1–4
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
169
Output Patch Library
The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings. The
library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Library page appears.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.
The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
OMNI OUT connectors 1–8
Aux Outs 1–8
OMNI OUT connectors 9–10
Stereo Out L & R
OMNI OUT connectors 11–12
Control Room Monitor L & R
Channels 1–8 of Slot 1
BUS1–BUS8
Channels 9–16 of Slot 1
BUS1–BUS8
Channels 1–8 of Slot 2
BUS1–BUS8
Channels 9–16 of Slot 2
BUS1–BUS8
2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L)
Stereo Out L
2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (R)
Stereo Out R
2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L)
Stereo Out L
2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (R)
Stereo Out R
15
The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The
library contains 52 preset programs and 76 user (readable & writable) programs.
Note:
• The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processor 1
enables storing and recalling Surround effects settings.
• Certain effects type settings recalled to Effects processor 1 disable Effects processors 2–4.
To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must locate the corresponding
Effects processor’s page.
To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until
the library page for the desired Effects processor appears.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Libraries
Effects Library
170
Chapter 15—Libraries
Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below:
• Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ........... FX1 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ........... FX2 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ........... FX3 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ........... FX4 Lib page
1
2
5
3
4
A EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently used by the Effects
processor.
B TYPE
This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor. The
number of input and output channels for the currently-used effects appears below the
TYPE parameter.
C
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2
Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters.
D
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page
to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1–4.
E Level meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected Effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively.
For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.
The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library:
• Reverbs
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
2
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation with gate
3
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
4
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
5
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
6
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
7
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
1
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
171
• Delays
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
8
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
9
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Simple stereo delay
10
Mod.delay
MOD.DELAY
Simple repeat delay with modulation
11
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
12
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
• Modulation-based Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
13
Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
14
Flange
FLANGE
Flanger
15
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and
more complex modulation than normal chorus
16
Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
17
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
18
TREMOLO
TREMOLO
Tremolo
19
HQ.Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
20
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
21
Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
22
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
23
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
• Guitar Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
24
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
25
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
• Dynamic Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
26
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter
27
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
28
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
Libraries
• Combination Effects
No.
Preset Name
15
Type
Description
29
Rev+Chorus
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
30
Rev->Chorus
REV->CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
31
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
32
Rev->Flange
REV->FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
33
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
34
Rev->Sympho.
REV->SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
35
Rev->Pan
REV->PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
36
Delay+ER.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
37
Delay->ER.
DELAY->ER.
Delay and early reflections in series
38
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
39
Delay->Rev
DELAY->REV
Delay and reverb in series
40
Dist->Delay
DIST->DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
172
Chapter 15—Libraries
• Others
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
41
Multi.Filter
MULTI.FILTER
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
42
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler
43
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
Stereo reverb
44
Reverb 5.1
REVERB 5.1
6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround
451
Octa Reverb
OCTA
461
Auto Pan 5.1
AUTO PAN 5.1
6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround
471
Chorus 5.1
CHORUS 5.1
6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround
481
Flange 5.1
FLANGE 5.1
6-channel flanger for 5.1 surround
491
Sympho. 5.1
SYMPHO. 5.1
6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround
50
M. Band Dyna.
M. BAND DYNA.
Multi-band dynamics processor
511
Comp 5.1
521
Compand 5.1
REVERB2
COMP
5.12
COMPAND
8-channel reverb
Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround
5.12
Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround
1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processor #1.
2. If these effects types are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.
Note:
• Effects that include “5.1” in the names are multi-channel Surround effects that support 5.1
channels. These effects types are most effective when 6-channel outputs are connected to a
5.1-channel system.
• If REVERB 5.1, OCTA REVERB, COMP 5.1, or COMPAND 5.1 are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
173
Bus to Stereo Library
You can store Bus to Stereo settings (levels and panpots of signals routed from Bus Outs 1–8
to the Stereo Bus). The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Bus to Stereo library, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [DISPLAY] button
repeatedly until the Routing | Library page appears.
1
2
A CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
Bus Out (1–8) pairing information for the current configuration is displayed here.
Note: You can recall only Bus to Stereo library memories that have the same Bus Out (1–8)
pairing configuration as the current configuration.
B LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box
Bus Out pairing information for the configuration stored in the currently-selected
memory is displayed here. When the current configuration and the configuration in the
selected memory do not match, the word “CONFLICT” appears in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box, although you can still recall the memory.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on
page 165.
15
Libraries
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
174
Chapter 15—Libraries
Gate Library
The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings. The library
contains four preset memories and 124 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Gate library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears.
1
2
3
4
A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel gate type (Gate or Ducking).
B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current channel gate curve.
C GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate, and the
post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
D Type & Curve section
The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed
here.
Tip: If you selected an Aux Out (1–8), Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature a
gate, the DM1000 indicates “XXX HAS NO GATE!” (in which XXX represents a signal name).
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to
channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”
on page 165.
The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library:
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Gate
GATE
Gate template
2
Ducking
DUCKING
Ducking template
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
175
Compressor Library
This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and
92 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button.
The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears.
1
2
3
4
A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel comp type (Compressor,
Expander, Compander Soft, Compander Hard).
B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current compressor curve.
C GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor,
and the post-comp levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
D Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.
The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library:
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Comp
COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use
it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired
Input or Output Channels.
2
Expand
EXPAND
Expander template.
3
Compander (H)
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compressor template.
4
Compander (S)
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compressor template.
5
A. Dr. BD
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.
6
A. Dr. BD
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass
drum.
7
A. Dr. SN
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
15
Libraries
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library
memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
Operation” on page 165.
176
Chapter 15—Libraries
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
8
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.
9
A. Dr. SN
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare
drum.
10
A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are
not played, improving mic separation.
11
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and
ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It
automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals
are not played, improving mic separation.
12
E. B. Finger
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.
13
E. B. Slap
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a
slapped electric bass guitar.
14
Syn. Bass
COMP
Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of
a synth bass.
15
Piano1
COMP
Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.
16
Piano2
COMP
A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to
change the overall attack and level.
17
E. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by
playing different styles.
18
A. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing.
19
Strings1
COMP
Compressor for use with strings.
20
Strings2
COMP
A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.
21
Strings3
COMP
A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass.
22
BrassSection
COMP
Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong
attack.
23
Syn. Pad
COMP
Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle
sounds which, depending on the tones, could diffuse,
such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the
sound.
24
SamplingPerc
COMPAND-S
Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like
real acoustic percussion.
25
Sampling BD
COMP
A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass
drum sounds.
26
Sampling SN
COMP
A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare
drum sounds.
27
Hip Comp
COMPAND-S
A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops
and phrases.
28
Solo Vocal1
COMP
Compressor for use with main vocals.
29
Solo Vocal2
COMP
A variation on preset 28.
30
Chorus
COMP
A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.
31
Click Erase
EXPAND
Expander for removing a click track that may bleed
through from a musicians headphones.
32
Announcer
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the
music when an announcer speaks.
33
Limiter1
COMPAND-S
A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.
34
Limiter2
COMP
A “peak-stop” compressor.
35
Total Comp1
COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use
it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired
Input or Output Channels.
36
Total Comp2
COMP
A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
177
EQ Library
This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8,
Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the EQ library.
1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to
display the EQ | EQ Library page.
1
2
3
4
A CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel EQ type (TYPE I or II).
B CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current EQ curve.
C Level meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
D Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program are displayed here.
The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library:
No.
Preset Name
Description
1
Bass Drum 1
Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the
beater.
2
Bass Drum 2
Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.
3
Snare Drum 1
Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.
4
Snare Drum 2
Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.
5
Tom-tom 1
Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.
6
Cymbal
Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.
7
High Hat
Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.
8
Percussion
Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such
as shakers, cabasas, and congas.
9
E. Bass 1
Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
15
Libraries
2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to
channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”
on page 165.
178
Chapter 15—Libraries
No.
Preset Name
Description
10
E. Bass 2
Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.
11
Syn. Bass 1
Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.
12
Syn. Bass 2
Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.
13
Piano 1
Makes pianos sound brighter.
14
Piano 2
Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack
and low range of pianos.
15
E. G. Clean
Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a
slightly harder sound.
16
E. G. Crunch 1
Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.
17
E. G. Crunch 2
A variation on preset 16.
18
E. G. Dist. 1
Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.
19
E. G. Dist. 2
A variation on preset 18.
20
A. G. Stroke 1
Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.
21
A. G. Stroke 2
A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon
string guitar.
22
A. G. Arpeg. 1
Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.
23
A. G. Arpeg. 2
A variation on preset 22.
24
Brass Sec.
Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.
25
Male Vocal 1
An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID
parameters according to the voice quality.
26
Male Vocal 2
A variation on preset 25.
Female Vo. 1
An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID
parameters according to the voice quality.
28
Female Vo. 2
A variation on preset 27.
29
Chorus&Harmo
An EQ template for brightening choruses.
30
Total EQ 1
Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a
compressor.
31
Total EQ 2
A variation on preset 30.
32
Total EQ 3
A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output
Channels.
33
Bass Drum 3
A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.
34
Snare Drum 3
A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.
35
Tom-tom 2
A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.
36
Piano 3
A variation on preset 13.
37
Piano Low
Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.
38
Piano High
Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.
39
Fine-EQ Cass
Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.
40
Narrator
Ideal for recording narration.
27
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Libraries
179
Surround Monitor Library
This library enables you to store and recall Surround Monitor settings. The library contains
one preset memory that initializes the Surround Monitor settings, and 32 user (readable &
writable) memories.
To access the Surround Monitor library, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Lib page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 165.
15
Libraries
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
180
Chapter 15—Libraries
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
181
Automix
16 Automix
This chapter describes the Automix function, which automates real-time mix operation,
and explains how to use it.
About Automix
The DM1000 features an Automix function, which allows dynamic automation of virtually
all mix parameters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux Sends, Aux Send
Mutes, EQ, and effects.
Various mixing events can be recorded in Automix. You can also punch channels or parameters in and out of recording on-the-fly, and edit most parameters off-line with 1/4 frame
accuracy. Remote layer operations, and Scene and library recall operations can also be automated, which enables you to create mix automation that combines snap shots and dynamic
mix parameter changes.
You can store up to 16 Automixes in the Automix library. You can also store an Automix or
the entire Automix library to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
The following parameter events can be recorded in an Automix:
Input
Channels
Bus Out
Master
Aux Send
Master
Stereo Out
Channel levels (faders)
O
O
O
O
Channel mutes (ON/OFF)
O
O
O
O
Pan
O
—
—
—
Surround pan, LFE level, and DIV
O
—
—
—
EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)
O
O
O
O
Aux Send 1–8 levels
O
—
—
—
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
O
—
—
—
Parameters
Scene recalls
EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel
library recalls
Effects parameters
(certain parameters)
User Defined Remote Layers
(faders, [ON], Encoders)
16
Automix
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
182
Chapter 16—Automix
Setting Up for Automix Recording
This section describes the procedure you must perform before you start Automix recording.
Selecting the Timecode Source
Follow the steps below to select the timecode source and frame rate that the DM1000 uses
for the Automix function.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time
Ref page appears.
This page enables you to select the timecode source for the Automix operation, and the port
that receives the timecode.
3
1
2
A TIME REFERENCE section
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select one of the following timecode sources for the Automix operation.
INTERNAL ................... Internally generated timecode
SMPTE .......................... SMPTE timecode received via the TIME CODE INPUT
SMPTE connector
MIDI CLOCK............... MIDI Clock received via the Rx PORT (specified on the Setup
| MIDI/Host page)
MTC-MIDI ................... MTC received via the MIDI IN port
MTC-USB ..................... MTC received via the USB port
MTC-REMOTE ............ MTC received via the REMOTE connector
MTC-SLOT1................. MTC received via Slot 1 (for use with an optional MY8-mLAN
card installed in Slot 1)
B FRAMES
These parameter buttons select the SMPTE/MTC frame rate.
C
button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 quickly locates the
Automix | Main page.
2 Move the cursor to the TIME REFERENCE section and select the desired timecode source.
3 If you selected INTERNAL, SMPTE, or MTC timecode, move the cursor to one
of the FRAMES parameter buttons to select the desired frame rate.
If the DM1000 receives timecode with a frame rate that differs from the specified rate, the
error message “Frame Mismatch!” appears. If you select the SMPTE timecode, the error
message “Frame Jump!” may appear, depending on the selected frame rate.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Up for Automix Recording
183
4 If you select MIDI CLOCK, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears (see page 236). Then, in the
Rx PORT parameter box, specify the port or slot that receives MIDI Clock.
Tip:
• If you select the MIDI CLOCK source, Automix will respond to MIDI Start, Stop, and Continue messages.
• An Automix will play back correctly even if the frame rate differs from that used when the
Automix was originally recorded. However, an Automix recorded using MIDI Clock and
an Automix recorded using other timecode sources are not compatible with one another.
Creating a Time Signature Map
If you selected the MIDI CLOCK source, you must specify the initial time signature and any
time signature changes that follow, according to the song. (If you do not do this, the song
timing and Automix position may not match when playback starts in mid-song.)
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time
Sig page appears.
This page enables you to specify a measure number in the MEAS column and the time signature in the TIME column. By default, 4/4 is set in the first measure.
2 To change the initial time signature, move the cursor to the TIME value in
the first measure, and use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the desired time signature.
3 To insert a time signature change, specify the desired measure number in
an empty box in the MEAS column, and specify the corresponding time signature in the TIME column.
To delete a time signature change, select it, then press [ENTER]. You cannot delete the initial time signature entry at measure #1.
16
Automix
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
184
Chapter 16—Automix
Recording an Automix
This section describes a general procedure for Automix recording, including creating a new
Automix, as well as recording the fader, [ON] button, and other controller events real-time.
Creating a New Automix
Follow the steps below to create a new Automix and select the parameters you want to
record.
1 Connect a timecode source to the DM1000.
2 Select the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page (see page 182).
If you selected MIDI CLOCK timecode, create a time signature map (see page 183).
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Main page appears.
This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters, and record and play back Automixes.
4 Move the cursor to the NEW button located in the lower-right corner of the
page, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation window for creating a new Automix appears.
5 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
A new Automix is created.
6 Move the cursor to the AUTOMIX DISABLED/ENABLED button, then press
[ENTER] to switch it to ENABLED.
The new Automix is enabled.
7 In the OVERWRITE section, select parameters you want to record.
The seven buttons in the OVERWRITE section enable you to select parameters to be
recorded in the Automix, including the following. See page 187 for more information.
• FADER........................... Fader operation
• ON.................................. [ON] button on/off
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Recording an Automix
•
•
•
•
•
185
PAN ................................Pan operation
SURR .............................Surround pan operation
AUX................................Aux Send level operation
AUX ON ........................Aux Send on/off operation
EQ...................................EQ operation
Recording the First Event
Follow the steps below to select channels and start Automix recording.
1 Move the cursor to the REC button at the bottom of the page, then press
[ENTER].
The REC button flashes, indicating that the Automix is ready to record.
Tip: Alternatively, you could press the AUTO REC button (instead of the REC button), then
press [ENTER] to place the Automix in record ready mode. Whether you press REC or AUTO
REC will affect the way in which you cancel record ready mode.
2 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.
The button indicator lights up. If you turn on the [AUTO] button indicator while the REC
button is lit or flashing on the Automix Main page, the [SEL] buttons will allow you to
enable or disable the Automix function for each channel, or arm or disarm each channel.
Depending on the REC button status on the Main page, pressing the channel [SEL] buttons
will place the corresponding channels in the following state:
• When the REC button is flashing or lit:
Green
Ready for
Automix playback
Orange
Ready for Automix
recording
Off
Automix
disabled
Green
Ready for
Automix playback
Orange
Ready for Automix
recording
16
• When the REC button is off:
Automix
Off
Automix
disabled
Green
Ready for
Automix playback
3 Select the layer that contains the channels you wish to record, then press
the corresponding channel [SEL] buttons.
The button indicators light up orange. The corresponding channels are armed.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and the recording starts. The [SEL] button
indicators (illuminated in Step 3) change from orange to red (indicating that recording is
in progress).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
186
Chapter 16—Automix
5 Adjust the faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and other controls of the channels
selected in Step 3.
Tip: To punch channels out of recording, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons to change the
button indicators from red to green.
6 To record EQ events, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings of the currently-selected channel.
To select other channels, press the [AUTO] button to turn off the [AUTO] button indicator,
then use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
Tip: Scene and library recalls are always recorded, regardless of the selection in the OVERWRITE section and the [SEL] button status.
7 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or move the cursor
to the STOP button on the page, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation message appears asking whether you want to update the existing Automix
data (i.e., keep the edits just recorded).
Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to update the data, or move the cursor to NO
and press [ENTER] to discard the edits and return to the previous condition. Even after you
update the existing Automix data, unless you proceed to the next recording, you can still
restore the previous data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button on the Main page and
pressing [ENTER].
Tip:
• When you stop Automix recording, all channels are disarmed, and the [SEL] button indicators light up green.
• If you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button in Step 1, the AUTO REC button
will continue to flash after you stop Automix recording. In this way, you can resume recording
when you restart the timecode source. To cancel record ready mode, move the cursor to the
AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER].
• If the Mix Update Confirmation preference is off on the Setup | Prefer3 page, the confirmation window for updating the existing Automix data will not appear, and the edits just
recorded will be retained.
Note:
• You can rerecord events as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the first
pass, on subsequent passes existing events for the currently-punched in parameter are overwritten.
• You can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out only necessary
parameters using the buttons in the OVERWRITE section.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Recording an Automix
187
Parameter Recording
The following table summarizes the parameter recording operation for each parameter
available in Automix recording.
Parameters
Channel
OVERWRITE
Set Layer to Input, Fader
mode to Fader, use faders
Input
Channel Levels
(faders)
Channel Mutes
(ON/OFF)
Pan
Bus Out, Aux Send
Set Layer to Master, Fader
mode to Fader, use faders
Use Stereo Out fader
Input
Set Layer to Input, use [ON]
buttons
Bus Out, Aux Send
ON
Set Layer to Master, use [ON]
buttons
Pair/Group
Faders of paired channels and
grouped faders are recorded
together.
[ON] buttons of paired channels and grouped mutes are
recorded together.
Stereo Out
Use Stereo Out [ON] button
Input
PAN
Set Layer to Input, Encoder
mode to Pan, use Encoders.
Use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control
If Pan mode is Gang or
Inverse-Gang, paired channels are recorded together.
SURR
Use Joystick. If a surround
parameter assigned to an
Encoder, also use Encoders
If ST LINK button on Surround Edit page is on, adjacent partners are recorded
together.
Use SELECTED CHANNEL
EQUALIZER section. (If EQ
parameter assigned to an
Encoder, also use Encoders.)
EQ of paired channels, and
grouped EQs recorded
together.
If Fader mode is Aux, use faders. If Encoder mode is Aux,
use Encoders (also use Aux
Send or Aux View pages).
Aux send levels of paired
channels recorded together.
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, the send level to both
Aux Sends is recorded.)
Use Aux Send or Aux View
pages
Aux send mutes of paired
channels recorded together.
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, mutes for both Aux
Sends recorded.)
Input
EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)
Input, Bus Out,
Aux Send, Stereo Out
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
FADER
Stereo Out
Surround Pan
Aux Sends 1–8 Level
Operation
Input
AUX
Input
Scene recalls
EQ
AUX ON
—
—
Use SCENE MEMORY section
or Scene Memory page
—
EQ, Gate, Comp,
Effects, Channel
—
Use corresponding library
page
—
Effects parameters
(certain
parameters)
Effects processors 1–4
—
Use corresponding page
—
FADER
Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use faders
—
[ON] buttons
ON
Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use [ON] buttons
—
Encoders
PAN
Select User Defined Remote
Layer, use Encoders
—
Faders
User Defined
Remote Layer
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
16
Automix
Library recalls
188
Chapter 16—Automix
Punching In & Out
You can modify part of a recorded Automix or add events to an Automix (Punch In & Out).
You can punch in and out channels using the [SEL] buttons, or individual parameters using
other controls.
Punch In & Out Using the [SEL] Buttons
Follow the steps below to punch channels in and out using the [SEL] buttons.
1 Select parameters you wish to record in the OVERWRITE section.
2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,
then press [ENTER].
3 Press the [AUTO] button.
The button indicator lights up. At this time, make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for
all channels (including the channels you want to punch in) are lit green.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and parameter event recording is armed. However, no events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.
5 To punch in channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons.
The corresponding [SEL] button indicators light up red and the channels are placed in
record mode.
Note: If the punch-in channels already contain the parameter events selected in the OVERWRITE section, punching-in immediately overwrites the existing events. Be careful while
selecting parameters in the OVERWRITE section so that you will not delete events you wish
to retain.
6 Adjust the controls of the selected channels.
7 To punch out the channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons again.
8 Stop the Automix.
A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.
Tip: You can also select the recording channels first using the [SEL] buttons, start the timecode
source, then select the desired parameters in the OVERWRITE section to punch in and out.
Punching In & Out Individual Events
Even if you selected some parameters in the OVERWRITE section, you can punch in an
individual parameter by following the steps below:
1 In the OVERWRITE section, select the parameters you want to record.
2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,
then press [ENTER].
3 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.
The button indicator lights up. Make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for all channels
are lit green.
4 Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and event recording is armed. However, no
events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Punching In & Out
189
5 Perform the following operations to punch in and out individual events.
Parameters
Channel
OVERWRITE
Set Layer to Iinput,
Fader mode to Fader
Input
Channel Levels
(faders)
Bus Out,
Aux Send
FADER
Stereo Out
Pan
Input
Surround Pan
Input
Effects parameters
(certain
parameters)
User Defined
Remote Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
Input
Effects processors 1–4
Faders
Encoders
Punch Out
Touch fader knob
and adjust1
Release fader knob2
PAN
Set Layer to Input,
Encoder mode to Pan
Press Encoder and
adjust
Press Encoder
SURR
Select Input Layer
and assign Surround
LFE Level or Surround
Pan Wheel to the
Encoders
Press Encoder and
adjust
Press Encoder
Use SELECTED
CHANNEL EQUALIZER section. (If EQ
parameter assigned
to an Encoder, also
use Encoders.)
Adjust SELECTED
CHANNEL control3
Press Encoder and
adjust
Press [SEL] button
Press Encoder and
adjust4
Press Encoder
Set Layer to Input,
Fader mode to Aux
Touch fader knob
and adjust1
Release fader knob2
Set Layer to Input,
Encoder mode to Aux
Press Encoder and
adjust
Press Encoder
Select internal effects
processors
Move the cursor to
the parameter control on the page,
then press [ENTER].
Move the cursor to
the parameter control on the page,
then press [ENTER].
FADER
Select User Defined
Remote Layer
Touch fader knob
and adjust1
Release fader knob2
PAN
Select User Defined
Remote Layer
Press Encoder and
adjust
Press Encoder
EQ
EQ On/Off
Aux Sends 1–8 Level
Set Layer to Master,
Fader mode to fader
Punch In
Stereo Out fader
EQ (F, Q, G)
All channels
Operation
AUX
—
To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the TOUCH SENSE IN button on the Fader1 or 2 page.
To punch out events by performing this operation, turn on the TOUCH SENSE OUT button on the Fader1 or 2 page.
To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the Auto EQ Edit preference.
To punch in events by performing this operation, assign EQ parameters to the Encoders.
6 Stop the Automix.
A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.
16
Automix
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
190
Chapter 16—Automix
[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button
Indicator Is On
While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, you can use the channel [SEL] buttons to turn the
Automix function on and off, arm or disarm channels, or punch channels in and out.
The [SEL] button indicators operate as follows:
• Off .................................. Automix recording or playback disabled.
• Green ............................. Automix stopped or playing
• Orange........................... The channel is armed.
• Red ................................. Automix recording in progress
• Flashing red.................. Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and fader events continue
recording after punch out
• Flashing green.............. Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and faders are disabled after
punch out
Playing Back an Automix
As long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming
timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly.
You can stop playback manually by moving the cursor to the STOP or ABORT button on
the Automix | Main/Memory page, then pressing [ENTER].
Playback will stop automatically if the DM1000 receives no timecode for a while, if the
DM1000 receives MIDI Stop commands (only when the MIDI CLOCK source is selected),
or if the end of the Automix data is reached.
While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, the [SEL] button indicators light up green on the
channel strips available for Automix playback. When Automix playback for an individual
channel is disabled, its [SEL] button indicator turns off.
During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded fader events (as long as the corresponding layer and Fader mode is selected). You can disable fader movement by turning
off the MOTOR button on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 196).
You can view fader events on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 196), and other events on the
corresponding pages. Recorded events of the currently-selected channel are reflected in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays.
Note: If the current effects type is different from that used when the effects parameter edits
were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted.
When you rerecord effects parameter edits from the beginning, it is recommended that you
delete the existing effects events offline.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Automix Main Page
191
Automix Main Page
This section explains the Automix Main page. This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters and record and play back Automixes. To locate the Automix | Main page,
press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears.
2
3
1
5
8
9
K
L
M
4
6
7
J
N
O
P
Q
R
A FREE
The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, as a percentage, and by a bar graph.
B SIZE
The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer are
displayed here in kilobytes.
C TIME REFERENCE
The timecode source and frame rate specified on the Time Ref page (see page 182) are
also displayed here.
D INT START TIME
This parameter sets the start time of the DM1000 internal timecode generator in hours,
minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Move the cursor to a digit you wish to change,
and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
E OFFSET
F UPDATE
This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped.
When the TO END button is on, the DM1000 erases all events (that exist beyond the
point at which rerecording is stopped) for parameters that have been edited during the
current pass. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right
through to the end of the Automix.
When the TO END button is off, existing events are left as they are.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
16
Automix
This parameter specifies an offset relative to the external timecode source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to
the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit
to “00.”
192
Chapter 16—Automix
When the TO END button is on, the way in which fader events are processed depends
on the currently-selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. The following table
shows how the faders operate when the Fader Edit mode is set to Absolute.
TO END
Return
Takeover or Off
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter
on the Fader1 or 2 page.
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
remains at the same position until the next fader
event in the existing data is encountered.
Existing data
Existing data
Return time
OFF
Fader edit
Fader edit
Punch in
Time
Stop recording
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter
on the Fader1 or 2 page. All subsequent events are
erased. The fader remains at that position through to
the end of the Automix.
Existing data
Time
Punch in
Stop recording
At the point at which recording is stopped, all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at
that position right through to the end of the Automix.
Existing data
Return time
ON
Fader edit
Punch in
Time
Stop recording
Fader edit
Time
Punch in
Stop recording
If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to either Takeover
or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to its position when recording was
stopped right through to the end of the Automix.
G EDIT OUT
This parameter sets the Edit Out mode: TAKEOVER, RETURN, or OFF (both buttons
are off). This mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader
data at the punch out point.
Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels,
the Stereo Out level, and Remote layer faders.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
193
Automix Main Page
The following table shows how faders move in each Edit Out mode. You can set the
Return Time (time required by Input and Output Channel faders to return to the previously-recorded position) on the Fader1 or 2 page (see page 196).
Off
Return
At the punch out point, the fader
remains at the same position until the
next fader event in the existing data
occurs.
Takeover
At the punch out point, the fader
returns to the position specified by the
existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the
Fader1 or 2 page.
At the punch out point, recording continues until the fader position intersects
the existing fader data. If you are still
touching the fader knob at the actual
punch out point, the fader is disabled
until you release it.
Existing data
Existing data
Existing data
Return time
Fader edit
Time
Punch in
Fader edit
Fader edit
Time
Punch out
Actual punch out
Time
Punch out
Punch in
Punch out
Punch in
In this example, punch out was performed by pressing the [AUTO] button,
and the fader was moved manually
between the specified punch out point
and actual punch out point.
H FADER EDIT
This parameter determines how fader moves are rerecorded (it has no effect during the
first recording pass). You can select ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE.
In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values (existing fader data is
erased). In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data.
Fader data includes Input Channel level, Bus Out master levels, Aux Out master levels,
the Stereo Out level, Remote layer faders.
The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off).
Absolute
Relative
Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and
existing fader data between the punch in and out
points is erased.
Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing
fader data.
Existing data
Existing data
16
Fader edit
Fader edit
Punch out
Time
Punch in
Punch out
I TOUCH SENSE section
This section enables or disables the Touch Sense function for punching in and out fader
events. The IN button enables the Touch Sense function for punch in. The OUT button
enables the Touch Sense function for punch out. You can set these buttons individually.
If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is set to “Disabled,” on the Setup | Prefer2 page, this
section is grayed out.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Automix
Time
Punch in
194
Chapter 16—Automix
J OVERWRITE section
This section enables you to select parameters to be recorded on the first pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. You can select or deselect these parameters while recording is in progress (see page 184).
K AUTOMIX ENABLED/DISABLED
This parameter enables or disables the Automix. When the parameter is set to DISABLE,
you cannot record or play back an Automix.
L NEW
Move the cursor to the NEW button, then press [ENTER] to create a new Automix.
When you create a new Automix, a Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the
last Scene recalled) is automatically inserted at the start of the Automix. (You can edit
this event so that you will be able to recall another Scene.)
M UNDO
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to undo various Automix operations (Undo function). When you record new events in an Automix, or when you perform an offline edit, the current Automix data is copied to the Undo buffer. You can
retrieve the data from the buffer by moving the cursor to the UNDO button and pressing [ENTER] while Automix is stopped. You can also cancel the Undo operation (Redo
function).
Tip:
• The Undo buffer is cleared when you turn off the power to the DM1000. If you want to save
the contents of the Undo buffer, perform the undo operation, then store the Automix.
• However, you cannot undo the operations performed on the Event Edit page.
N AUTO REC
Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000
in Automix record ready mode. The button becomes highlighted. In this state, when the
DM1000 receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.
Record ready mode is not canceled, even if Automix recording is stopped, unless you
move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER].
O REC
Move the cursor to the REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000 in Automix record ready mode. The button starts to flash. In this state, when the DM1000
receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.
Unlike the AUTO REC button, however, record ready mode is canceled when recording
is stopped.
If you move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER] during Automix playback, the
DM1000 engages record ready mode.
P PLAY
If the timecode source is set to internal, move the cursor to the PLAY button and press
[ENTER]. Automix recording or playback starts.
If you selected an external timecode source, as soon as the DM1000 receives the external
timecode, recording or playback starts, and this button turns on automatically. After you
stop Automix by pressing the STOP button or ABORT button, you can restart recording
or playback by pressing this button as long as the DM1000 is still receiving timecode.
Q STOP
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to stop Automix recording or playback. (If you stop recording, a confirmation window appears asking whether you wish
to update the Automix data.) The button remains highlighted while Automix is stopped.
R ABORT
This button aborts the current recording without updating the existing Automix data.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Automix Memory Page
195
Automix Memory Page
The Automix Memory page enables you to store and recall Automixes. The lower half of this
page is identical to the Automix Main page.
To locate the Automix | Memory page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button
repeatedly until the page appears.
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
K
J
A TITLE EDIT
This button enables you to edit the title of the Automix memory selected in the center
column.
B RECALL
This button recalls the Automix memory selected in the center column.
C STORE
This button enables you to store the current Automix to the memory selected in the center column.
D CLEAR
This button clears the Automix memory selected in the center column.
E TITLE
This parameter displays the title of the current Automix.
F MEMORY TITLE column
G CURRENT
This parameter displays the size of the current Automix.
H UNDO
This parameter displays the size of the current Undo buffer.
I FREE
This parameter displays the amount of free memory available for storing the current
Automix.
J SIZE
This parameter displays the size of the Automix memory selected in the center column.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
16
Automix
This column enables you to select an Automix memory to be recalled or stored. The column lists the titles of Automix memories. An empty Automix memory has a title of “No
Data!”
196
Chapter 16—Automix
K PROTECT ON/OFF
To protect the contents of the Automix memory selected in the MEMORY TITLE column, move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon ( ) appears
next to the titles of Automix memories that are write-protected. You cannot store, clear,
or edit the title of write-protected Automix memories.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library
Operation” on page 165.
Fader1 &2 pages
The Fader1 & 2 pages enable you to edit fader positions while viewing the current fader
position and the fader data recorded in the Automix.
To locate the Fader1 or 2 page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly
until the page appears.
During Automix playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the
Automix | Fader1 or 2 page. The Fader1 page displays fader positions for Input Channel 1
through 48 and Stereo out. The Fader2 page displays fader positions for Bus Outs 1–8 and
Aux Outs 1–8.
1
2
3
4
5
6
When the Fader mode is set to Fader, each page displays Input and Output Channel levels.
When the Fader mode is set to Aux, each page displays Aux Send levels.
During rerecording, the Fader1 and 2 pages display the existing
fader data in bar graphs. While fader events are being recorded,
arrows appear next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indicates that the current fader position is higher than that specified
by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the
current fader position is lower than that specified by the existing
fader data.
A ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE
These buttons are the same as those on the Main page (see page 191).
B MOTOR
This button turns the fader motors on or off for Automix playback. The button is highlighted when the motors are on.
Tip: You cannot turn off the motors during Automix recording. Even if this button is turned
off, the motors are automatically turned on when recording starts.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Fader1 &2 pages
197
C Edit Safe buttons
The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Edit Safe buttons, which prohibit Automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set to safe and excluded from Automix
recording when its button is highlighted. However, you can play existing events and use
faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons on safe channels. This is useful for rehearsing mix
moves.
Tip:
• You can make all channels safe simultaneously by selecting a non-highlighted button and
double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can cancel all safe channels simultaneously by selecting a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
D TOUCH SENSE
This function is the same as that on the Automix Main page.
E UPDATE
This button is the same as that on the Automix Main page.
F EDIT OUT
The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Automix | Main
page. The EDIT OUT section on this page also contains the TIME parameter. This
parameter determines the time required for faders to return to the levels specified by the
existing Automix data when the RETURN button is turned on.
16
Automix
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
198
Chapter 16—Automix
Editing Events Offline
You can edit recorded Automix events offline on the Event Job and Event Edit pages. You
can perform offline editing only while the Automix function is stopped.
Event Job Page
On the Event Job page, you can erase, copy, move/merge, or trim specified events on specified channels between specified in and out points.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Event Job page appears.
1
3
2
A Channel buttons
These button enable you to select the channels for which you want to edit Automix data.
B TIME SETTING section
This section enables you to specify the region of Automix data to be edited (IN and OUT
points).
C JOB TYPE section
This section enables you to select the job type. If you select “MEM” in the SOURCE section, the MERGE button replaces the MOVE button.
2 Use the Channel buttons to select channels for which you want to edit Automix data.
You can select multiple Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, and the Stereo Out.
Tip:
• You can select all Channel buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-highlighted
button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can deselect all selected Channel buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
3 Specify the region of Automix data you want to edit by setting the IN and
OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section.
You can also capture the IN and OUT points on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the IN or
OUT button and pressing the [ENTER] button. To modify the captured positions, move the
cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
Up to eight IN and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture
memories. The currently-selected Capture memory number (1–8) appears to the left of the
IN and OUT buttons. Move the cursor to the Capture memory number, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired Capture memory.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Editing Events Offline
199
4 Move the cursor to the desired Job button in the Job Type section, then press
[ENTER].
The following Jobs are available. Certain Jobs feature an extra parameter below the TIME
SETTING section.
■ ERASE
This button erases the specified range of Automix data.
■ COPY
This button copies the specified range of Automix data to another position. When you select
this button, the SOURCE and COPY TO sections appear below the TIME SETTING section.
• SOURCE section
This section enables you to select the copy source Automix.
• COPY TO section
- TIME
This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be copied. (The
number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can
also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO button and pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
- CH
This parameter specifies the channel to which you want to copy the specified data. If
multiple channels are selected as the copy source, use the CH parameter box to specify
the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in parentheses on the
right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)
For example, if eight channels are selected as the copy source and you specify “17” in the
CH parameter box, the copy destination will be Channels 17 through 24.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
16
Automix
■ MOVE/MERGE
The function of this button changes depending on the SOURCE section setting.
If you select CURRENT (current Automix) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes
the MOVE button, which moves the specified range of Automix data to another position.
If you select MEM (Automix memories 1–16) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes
the MERGE button, which merges the specified range of Automix data with other Automix
data.
When you select this Job, the SOURCE section and MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section
appear below the TIME SETTING section.
200
Chapter 16—Automix
• SOURCE section
These parameters select the source Automix to be moved or merged. If you select CURRENT (the current Automix), you can use the MOVE button. If you select MEM (Automix
memory), you can use the MERGE button. If you select MEM, specify the Automix memory number in the small parameter box on the right.
• MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section
- TIME
This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be moved or
merged. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO
button, then pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify
the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset
the currently-selected digit to “00.”
- CH
This parameter specifies the channel to which the specified data is to be moved or
merged. If multiple channels are selected as the move/merge source, use the CH parameter box to specify the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in
parentheses on the right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)
For example, if eight channels are selected as the move/merge source and you specify
“17” in the CH parameter box, the move/merge destination will be Channels 17 through
24.
■ TRIM
This button enables you to adjust the level of fader
events in the specified range of Automix data. When
you select this Job, the TRIM EDIT section appears
below the TIME SETTING section.
- IN
This parameter determines the time required for the fader to reach the level specified by
the Trim amount parameter.
- OUT
This parameter determines the time required for the fader to return to the previous
level.
- Trim amount
This parameter specifies the trim amount in the range of –96 dB to +96 dB.
Existing data
Trim: –x dB
Trimmed data
TRIM IN
IN
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
TRIM OUT
OUT
Time
Editing Events Offline
201
5 After setting all necessary parameters, move the cursor to the
button
on the right side of the page, then press [ENTER].
The PARAMETERS window appears, which enables you to select parameters to be edited,
and to perform the selected Job.
A parameter is selected when its button is highlighted. (You can specify multiple parameters.) These buttons correspond to the following parameters:
Button
Events
FADER
Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Out masters,
and the Stereo Out)
ON
Channel Mute events
PAN
Input Channel pan events
SURR
Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events
EQ
Channel EQ events
CH
Channel library recall events
GATE
Gate library recall events
COMP
Comp library recall events
EQ
EQ library recall events
SCENE
Scene recall events
FX LIB
1–4
Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor
AUX
1–8
Level events of each Aux Send
ON
1–8
Mute events of each Aux Send
REMOTE
1–2
User Defined Remote Layer events
EFFECT
1–4
Parameter events for each internal effects processor
LIB
16
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Automix
Tip:
• You can select all parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears.
• You can deselect all selected parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a
highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window
appears.
202
Chapter 16—Automix
6 To execute the selected Job, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, then
press [ENTER].
A confirmation window appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]
to execute the Job.
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER] to abort the Job.
• To return to the previous page without executing the Job, move the cursor to the
button, then press [ENTER].
Event Edit Page
The Event Edit page enables you to edit, duplicate, delete events and insert new events.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix
| Event Edit page appears.
1
53
2
4
6
8
9
J
7 K
A Event list
This list contains the Automix event time, channels, and parameter values. The currently-selected event in the list is indicated by a triangular icon (®). Use the Up and
Down cursor buttons to select an event, and use the Left and Right cursor buttons to
select a parameter value of the selected event.
B SYNC
This button synchronizes the event list to the current timecode position. Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to select events closest to the current timecode
position.
C DUPLICATE
This button duplicates the event selected in the list.
D DELETE
This button deletes the event selected in the list.
E SELECTED CH
When this option is on, only events of the channels currently selected by the channel
[SEL] buttons are displayed in the list.
F Event select buttons
These buttons select the type of events to be displayed in the event list.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Editing Events Offline
203
G INSERT
This button inserts a new event in the position selected in the event list.
H LOCATE
This button locates events at (or closest to) the timecode position indicated on the Capture memory display.
I Capture memory display
This display counter indicates the captured timecode position.
J CAPTURE
This button captures the current timecode position. Up to eight timecode values can be
captured and stored in the eight Capture memories.
K Capture memory
This box indicates the number of the currently-selected Capture memory (1–8).
2 Use the Event select buttons to select the type of events to be displayed in
the event list.
The format of the list varies depending on the selected event. The following table shows the
events that correspond to the Event select buttons, and the list format:
Button
Events Listed
List Format
SCENE/LIB
Library and Scene recall events
TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB
FADER
Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus
Out masters, Aux Out masters, and the Stereo
Out)
TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC
ON
Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)
TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF
PAN
Pan
TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R
SURR-PAN
Surround Pan
TIME CODE, CH, SURR
SURR-LFE
Surround LFE
TIME CODE, CH, dB
SURR-DIV
Surround DIV
TIME CODE, CH, DIV
SURR-RDIV
Surround RDIV
TIME CODE, CH, RDIV
EQ-ON
EQ On/Off
TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF
EQ-FREQ
EQ Frequency
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Hz
EQ-Q
EQ Q
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Q
EQ-GAIN
EQ Gain
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/dB
AUX
Aux Send 1–8 levels
TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB
AUX ON
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF
Note: If the data size of the selected event exceeds 2 MB, the message “Automix Work Memory
Full!” appears, and not all events may be displayed. In this case, check the SELECTED CH
check box to display only events of the selected channel.
3 To duplicate or delete events, select an event by moving the triangular icon
®) to the event in the list, then select the DUPLICATE or DELETE button.
(®
4 To modify the event time, channel or parameter value, move the cursor to
a parameter value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
16
Automix
Tip: When the SELECTED CH check box is on, only events of the currently-selected channel
are displayed.
204
Chapter 16—Automix
5 To locate an event, play the Automix and move the cursor to the CAPTURE
button, then press [ENTER].
The current position is captured and indicated in the Capture memory display.
Tip:
• To modify the captured position, move the cursor to the Capture memory display, then rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset
the currently-selected digit to “00.”
• Up to eight timecode values can be captured in the Capture memories. To recall another
Capture memory, move the cursor to the parameter box located to the left of the CAPTURE
button, then select the desired Capture memory number (1–8).
6 To recall the event at the captured position, move the cursor to the LOCATE
button, then press [ENTER].
The event at (or closest to) the captured position is displayed and selected in the event list.
7 To insert a new event, use the Event select buttons to select the type of event
that you want to insert. Use the Capture memory display to specify the point
at which you want to insert the new event. Move the cursor to the INSERT
button, then press [ENTER].
The new event is inserted at the position currently displayed in the Capture memory display.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Remote Control
205
17 Remote Control
This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables you to control external equipment directly from the DM1000 top panel.
About Remote Function
The DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control external DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) equipment, MIDI devices, recorders, etc.
There are three types of Remote functions (Remote 1 &2, and Machine Control):
■ REMOTE 1 (Remote Layer 1)
■ REMOTE 2 (Remote Layer 2)
To use these Remote functions, you must connect the DM1000 to a target device via USB
and operate the faders, Encoders and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the external
device remotely.
You can specify a target device and parameter values on the Remote | Remote1 and Remote
2 pages. These layers are enabled when you turn on the LAYER [REMOTE 1] and
[REMOTE 2] buttons respectively. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel
enable you to control the external device. (You cannot adjust the DM1000’s parameters
unless you select a different layer.)
You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the DM1000
by using Remote Layers 1 and 2. The following targets are available for remote control:
• ProTools ........................You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools.
• Nuendo..........................You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo.
• General DAW................You can remotely control DAW software that supports the protocol used by Pro Tools.
• User Defined.................You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons,
or Encoders to remotely control a connected MIDI device, such
as a synthesizer.
• User Assignable Layer.......You can combine the DM1000 channels to create a custom
layer. (See page 255 for more information on this function.)
Tip: ProTools, Nuendo, and General DAW targets can be assigned to only one layer at a time.
If you have already assigned a ProTools, Nuendo, or General DAW target to Remote Layer 1
or 2, you cannot assign other targets to the other Remote Layer.
■ Machine Control
Tip: To control external devices from the DM1000, you can also use the User Defined buttons
or the CONTROL connector as a GPI (General Purpose Interface). Refer to Chapter 19 “Other
Functions” on page 249 for more information.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
17
Remote Control
From the Remote | Machine Control page, you can control an external recording machine
that is connected to the DM1000 MIDI port, REMOTE connector, USB port, or optional
MY8-mLAN card. There are two types of commands used for machine control.
• MMC..............................MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control. MMC commands
can be transferred via the MIDI ports, USB port, and Slot 1 if
an MY8-mLAN card is installed.
• P2....................................P2 protocol is used by the Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. This command can be transferred via
the REMOTE connector.
206
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Pro Tools Remote Layer
The DM1000 features Remote Layer 1 and 2 targets especially designed for controlling Pro
Tools.
Connections and Configuring Pro Tools
Follow the steps below to connect the DM1000 to your computer via the USB port so that
you can control Pro Tools from the DM1000.
Note: You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure to connect your computer
via the USB or an optional MY8-mLAN card installed in one of the DM1000 slots.
■ Configuring Windows Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a
USB cable.
TO HOST USB port
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
USB
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
1
20dB
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
MIDI
DIO
SETUP
REMOTE
UTILITY
METER
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
VIEW
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
3
L
R
HIGH
4
5
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
2
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
Q
-8
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
AUTOMIX
HIGH MID
6
FREQUENCY
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
LOW MID
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
INC
DEC
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Computer
AUTO
SEL
ON
16
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
15
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
50 30
60 40
70
50
30
40
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
1
17
50 30
60 40
70
50
2
33
AUX 1
18
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
34
AUX 2
19
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
35
AUX 3
20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
36
AUX 4
21
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
37
AUX 5
22
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
38
AUX 6
23
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
39
AUX 7
24
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
42
BUS 2
27
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
43
BUS 3
28
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
44
BUS 4
29
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
45
BUS 5
30
31
50
50
60
70
60
70
15
46
BUS 6
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers.
■ Configuring Macintosh Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using
a USB cable.
2 Install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver.
3 Install OMS.
The DM1000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software.
If you have not installed OMS on your Mac, use the OMS installer included on the DM1000
CD-ROM to install OMS.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
207
4 Launch Pro Tools.
5 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and configure OMS as necessary.
Refer to the documentation that came with
OMS for more information on configuring
the OMS Studio Setup menu. OMS recognizes the DM1000 as a USB MIDI interface
that features eight ports.
6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window.
7 Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab.
8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type, Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s
parameters.
The DM1000 can emulate up to two MIDI controllers.
Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for every eight audio channels.
9 When you finish setting the parameters, close the window.
17
Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
208
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Configuring the DM1000
Follow the steps below to set up the DM1000 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools
from the DM1000 Remote Layer 1.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1
2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port.
3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter
box (on the right), then rotate the Parameter wheel to specify the port ID.
Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use the Remote function. Be sure
to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools.
5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] button.
The Remote | Remote 1 page appears.
2
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
209
6 Select ProTools (as the target device) for the Target parameter (2) located
in the upper-right corner of the page.
By default, Remote Layer 1 target is set to ProTools. If another target has been selected,
rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools.
7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button.
Remote Layer 1 is now available for control, enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools.
Note: When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000’s top panel faders, Encoders
and other channel buttons control Pro Tools. To control the DM1000, you need to select an
Input Channel layer or the Master layer.
Tip:
• If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed
on the MB1000 meters.
• Pressing the [REMOTE 2] button and setting the TARGET parameter to ProTools enables
you to control Pro Tools from the Remote Layer 2. In this case, the Remote Layer 1 Target
parameter is automatically set to No Assign.
17
Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
210
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Display
While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the [F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left
and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the following display modes using these buttons:
■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button)
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, you can assign and edit
plug-ins.
1
2
3
4
5
A TARGET
This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device.
B COUNTER
•
•
•
•
This counter indicates the current position. This counter works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools. The display format of the counter is specified in Pro Tools.
The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the currently-selected format.
TIME CODE:................ Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.”
FEET: ............................. Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.”
BEATS:........................... Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.”
If no check boxes are selected:...........Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples.”
C SELECT ASSIGN
This parameter indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example, Pan, PanR,
SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE (see page 212).
D P.WHEEL MODE
This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel (see
page 214).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
211
E INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section
This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug-in
settings. Use the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters
displayed in this section.
• ASSIGN .........................Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels.
(If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard
effects processors.)
• COMPARE ....................You can compare your edits with the original settings by turning on this button. This button works in unison with the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows.
• BYPASS..........................Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see page 221).
• INSERT/PARAM..........Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug-ins
using four rotary controls on the page. Switching this button to
PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in parameters using the
four rotary controls (see page 220).
• Information box ..........This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm messages from Pro Tools, etc.
• Rotary controls 1–4.....These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the
selected plug-in parameters.
■ Channel Display mode ( [F3] button)
Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the parameter controls for tracks
1–16 are displayed.
17
Remote Control
• Parameter controls 1–16 ................... Channel parameter controls, such as channel
1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are displayed.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
212
Chapter 17—Remote Control
■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button)
Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the level meters for tracks 1–16
are displayed.
• Channels 1–16.............. The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed.
Control Surface Operation
When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000 controls on the top panel engage
the following functions:
■ Channel Strip section
• Encoders
Encoders adjust the panpots or Aux Send levels. Use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] or
[AUX] button to select a parameter to edit.
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and Automation mode. By default, these
buttons select channels.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light
up.
• [ON] buttons
These buttons mute Pro Tools channels.
• Faders
The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master
fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are assigned
starting from the left-most channel.
■ STEREO section
• [AUTO] button
This button switches Pro Tools Automation mode.
■ AUX SELECT Section
• [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons
These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel
send level.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
213
• [AUX 6] button
Press and hold down this button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level.
Press and hold down this button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center. While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the
SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.”
• [AUX 8] button
Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to assign a plug-in to the corresponding
Pro Tools channel.
■ ENCODER MODE section
• [PAN] button
When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Pro Tools channel panpots.
• [AUX] button
When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Send A–E level controls. AUX Send
destination is selected in the AUX SELECT section. When you press this button, Send A is
selected as the destination automatically.
If the Encoders are currently set to control the Send A–E levels, the button indicator lights
up.
■ FADER MODE section
• [FADER/AUX] button
This button selects Flip mode (see page 218) for faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons.
■ DISPLAY ACCESS section
• [AUTOMIX] button
To display channel Automation mode, press this button while a Channel Display mode or
Meter Display mode page is selected.
• [PAIR/GROUP] button
Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to
display a Group ID to which each channel belongs.
• [EFFECT] button
Press this button to display or hide the Inserts window in Pro Tools.
17
■ Display section
• [F1] button
Press this button to turn off the Peak Hold indicator on Meter Display mode pages.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Remote Control
• Tab Scroll buttons
These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display
mode pages.
214
Chapter 17—Remote Control
■ Data Entry section
• [ENTER] button
This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on the display.
• Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the display.
• [INC] & [DEC] buttons
The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. The [DEC]
button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.
• Parameter wheel
The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the
shuttle and scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected parameter (The P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “Prm.”).
■ USER DEFINED KEYS section
• [1]–[12] buttons
You can assign one of 164 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign
any of 53 Remote Control parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport section and select various Pro Tools modes from the DM1000 top panel. See page 257 for more
information on assigning the parameters to the buttons.
Parameter
Function
DAW REC
Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes while
the transport section is stopped. The indicator lights up when recording starts.
DAW PLAY
Starts playback from the current cursor position.
DAW STOP
Stops playback and recording.
DAW FF
Fast forwards the cursor position.
DAW REW
Fast rewinds the cursor position.
DAW SHUTTLE
Switches Wheel mode to Shuttle.
DAW SCRUB
Switches Wheel mode to Scrub (Jog).
DAW AUDITION
You can audition the pre-roll, post-roll, in-point area, or out-point area by
holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a
button to which DAW PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW OUT is assigned.
DAW PRE
Plays back from the pre-roll point up to the beginning of the selected area.
DAW IN
Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as
the pre-roll.
DAW OUT
Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the
post-roll.
DAW POST
Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the
post-roll.
DAW RTZ
Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session.
DAW END
Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session.
DAW ONLINE
Toggles between on-line and off-line.
DAW LOOP
Toggles between Loop Playback on and off.
DAW QUICKPUNCH
Toggles between QuickPunch on and off.
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
Parameter
215
Function
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
Select Automation modes.
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels. When Automation is interrupted, the LED flashes, and channel strip controls maintain the
current settings.
DAW AUTO STATUS
Displays the channel Automation mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off). The
mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter
Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is
assigned.
DAW GROUP STATUS
Displays a Group ID (to which each channel belongs) below each channel
number on a Channel or Meter Display page (in all caps for a main group and
in lowercase letters for a sub-group).
DAW MONI STATUS
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view the
current monitoring mode and the channel strip type.
DAW CREATE GROUP
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute
the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list.
DAW SUSPEND GROUP
Suspends all mix groups temporarily. Press the button again to undo suspension.
DAW WIN TRANSPORT
Shows or hides the Transport window.
DAW WIN INSERT
Shows or hides the Inserts window.
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window. (Both windows are not
displayed at the same time.)
DAW WIN MEM-LOC
Shows or hides the Memory Locations window.
DAW WIN STATUS
Shows or hides the Status window.
DAW UNDO
Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo command.
DAW SAVE
Executes the Edit menu’s Save command.
DAW EDIT MODE
Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects
Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid edit mode in this order.
DAW EDIT TOOL
Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects one
of seven edit tools (Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber,
and Pencil, in this order).
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
DAW ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK –
DAW Channel +
Executes the Bank Swap operation. Pressing the button (to which this function
is assigned) switches the entire 16-channel bank.
Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which these
functions are assigned) enables you to scroll channels horizontally.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
17
Remote Control
DAW Channel –
Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option, Control, and Alt). Pressing one of the buttons (to which these functions are
assigned) along with another button enables you to execute various commands.
216
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Parameter
Function
DAW REC/RDY 1
DAW REC/RDY 2
DAW REC/RDY 3
DAW REC/RDY 4
DAW REC/RDY 5
DAW REC/RDY 6
DAW REC/RDY 7
DAW REC/RDY 8
DAW REC/RDY 9
Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) places the corresponding channel strips in Record Ready mode. At this time, the indicator of
the button you pressed flashes. It lights up when recording starts.
DAW REC/RDY 10
DAW REC/RDY 11
DAW REC/RDY 12
DAW REC/RDY 13
DAW REC/RDY 14
DAW REC/RDY 15
DAW REC/RDY 16
DAW REC/RDY ALL
If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode, pressing the button (to
which this function is assigned) places all channel strips in Record Enabled
mode. The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in
Record Enabled mode. Pressing the button while the button indicator is flashing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips.
Selecting Channels
To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button that corresponds to the desired
channel.
To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while holding down one [SEL] button, press the [SEL] buttons of the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons
again to cancel the selection.
Setting Channel Levels
1 Make sure that the FADER MODE [FADER] indicator is lit steadily.
If the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators are flashing alternately, press the
[FADER/AUX] button to turn on the [FADER] indicator.
2 Operate the faders to set channel levels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the
corresponding channel fader level.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
217
Muting Channels
To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The [ON] button indicators of muted
channels turn off. Grouped channels are muted together.
Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted
channels light up.
There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and Explicit mute. You can check the
mute mode by viewing the [ON] button indicators.
• Implicit mute................This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted
because other channels are soloed. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators flash.
• Explicit mute ................In this mode, the channels are muted or turned off manually.
In this mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off.
Panning Channels
You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings.
1 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button.
2 Press the [F2] button to select Channel Display mode.
On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls 1–16 indicate the pan settings.
3 For stereo channel pan settings, press the [PAN] button again. The button
indicator flashes.
Pressing the [PAN] button repeatedly toggles between the left and right panpots. When the
left panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter of the display indicates “Pan.” When
the right panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.”
4 Turn the Encoders to pan the channels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset
the corresponding channel panpot to center.
Soloing Channels
To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the desired channels. Grouped
channels are soloed together, and other channels are muted.
Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels.
Configuring Sends A–E as Pre or Post
You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E) to pre or post.
2 Press the Encoder push-switches for the desired channels.
Pressing the Encoder push-switches repeatedly toggles between pre and post.
You can set Sends as pre or post by pressing the Encoder push-switches if faders, Encoders,
and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. See page 218 for more information.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
17
Remote Control
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
The selected button indicators light up. Send pre/post status can be viewed in Channel Display or Meter Display mode by pressing and holding down the [AUX1]–[AUX5] buttons.
218
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Setting Send Levels
You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows.
1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
2 Rotate the Encoders for the desired channels.
You can set Send levels by rotating the Encoders if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are
in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Muting Sends A–E
You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons
are in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Panning Sends A–E
You can pan only Sends assigned to stereo destinations by rotating the Encoders if faders,
Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to the next section for more information.
Flip Mode
In Flip mode, you can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control send levels,
pre/post positions, and mute settings as shown in the following table.
Control
Normal mode
Flip Mode
Faders
Channel level
Send level
Encoders
Channel pan/send level
Send pan
Encoder push-switches
Encoder mode is Pan: inactive;
Encoder mode is Send level: Send pre/post
Send pre/post
[ON] buttons
Channel mute
Send mute
1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button.
The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators flash alternately, and the SELECT
ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates “FLIP.”
2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends
(A–E).
The button indicator of the selected send lights up.
3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently-selected
send.
For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and right panpots individually. To do this,
press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button repeatedly. When the button indicator is lit
continuously, you can set the left panpot. When the button indicator is flashing, you can set
the right panpot.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
219
Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools Channels
You can assign plug-ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows.
1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 8] button.
The [AUX 8] button indicator flashes. You can now select a channel to which you want to
insert plug-ins.
3 Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel.
4 Make sure that the INSERT button (1) is selected in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor to the button, then press
[ENTER] to select INSERT.
1
2
5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button (2), then press [ENTER] to turn on
the button.
You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on
the ASSIGN button, the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to other channels,
turn on the ASSIGN button again.
6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls, then rotate the
Parameter wheel to select a plug-in.
By default, the parameter controls enable you to select plug-ins to be assigned to channel
inserts #1–#4. To assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change
the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.
17
8 In the same way, assign plug-ins to other channels.
9 When you finish assigning plug-ins, press the [AUX 8] button.
The button indicator turns off.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Remote Control
7 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other insert positions in the channel strip.
220
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Editing Plug-ins
You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows:
1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
2 Press the corresponding [SEL] button to select the channel that was assigned
the plug-in you want to edit.
3 In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move the cursor to the parameter control (Insert 1–4) that was assigned the parameter you want to edit.
Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change
the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter control.
4 Press [ENTER] to display the parameters.
In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the
Information box indicates the selected plug-in parameters.
You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the [ENTER] button to adjust the parameters.
5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to
change.
Most plug-ins feature five or more parameters. To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters,
use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a
moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
221
6 Move the cursor to a parameter control, then rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [ENTER] button to adjust the value.
One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control. To turn the parameter
setting on or off, press [ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the Parameter
wheel.
7 When you finish adjusting the parameters, move the cursor to the PARAM
button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT.
Bypassing Plug-ins
You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels.
Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding [SEL] button to select a channel to which the plug-ins have been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you wish to bypass in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section, then turn on the BYPASS button.
17
Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
222
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Scrub & Shuttle
By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you
can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the
DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you can shuttle
back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel.
1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User
Defined buttons [1]–[12].
Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must switch layers to cancel the Remote
function. See page 257 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User
Defined buttons.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to enable remote control
of Pro Tools.
3 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.
4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or
DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.
You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function.
5 Rotate the Parameter wheel.
Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle backwards.
The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools
Edit window.
6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press the User Defined button to
which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.
Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined
button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub or Shuttle function is
automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward.
Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore,
whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check the Scrub/Shuttle function status by
viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
223
Automation
You can view the Pro Tools Automation mode as follows:
1 Press the [F3] or [F4] button to display the channels for remote control.
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button.
The channel’s Automation settings are displayed.
While the STEREO [AUTO] button is on, the channel [SEL] button indicators also display
the channel’s Automation mode.
Pro Tools
Display
Auto write
Wrt
Auto touch
Tch
Auto latch
Ltch
Auto read
Read
Auto off
Off
[SEL] Button Indicators
Flashing red (Record Ready)
Red (Recording)
Green
Off
Tip: If you assign the parameter that controls Automation to one of the User Defined buttons,
you can control the Automation settings by holding down the programmed User Defined button and pressing the [SEL] button of the target channel. See page 257 for more information
on assigning parameters to User Defined buttons.
17
Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
224
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Nuendo Remote Layer
You can remotely control Nuendo using Remote Layers 1 and 2.
■ Configuring Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the
required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the
driver.
2 Launch Nuendo, select the Device Setup menu, and set up Nuendo so that
the DM1000 can communicate with the software.
Refer to the Nuendo User’s Manual for more information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the DM1000
1 Refer to page 208 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo.
You can now remotely control Nuendo using the selected Remote Layer.
Other DAW Remote Layers
You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol.
■ Configuring Computers
1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the
required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.
Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the
driver.
2 Launch and set up DAW software so that the DM1000 communicates with
the software.
Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the DM1000
1 Refer to page 208 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.
2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW.
You can now remotely control DAW software using the selected Remote Layer.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
225
MIDI Remote Layer
MIDI Remote Layer
If you select USER DEFINED as the target for Remote Layer 1 or 2, you can remotely control
the parameters of external MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by operating the channel Encoders, [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages.
(This is called MIDI Remote function.)
You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the
DM1000 is shipped from the factory, it includes main MIDI settings in these banks, which
you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function.
If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or
Encoders to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device.
Using the MIDI Remote Function
This section describes how to use Remote Layer 2 to recall and use the factory-preset MIDI
Remote settings stored in the banks.
By default, the DM1000’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks 1–4) contain the following
MIDI messages.
Bank
Control Function
Usage
Encoders
[ON] buttons
Faders
1
Panning and setting GM sound levels
Pan
—
Volume
2
Setting GM sound effect send levels/Adjusting volume levels
Effect Send
—
Volume
3
Panning and setting XG sound levels
Pan
—
Volume
4
Adjusting pan, mute, and levels for Cubase
series mixer
Pan
Mute
Volume
1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI
device.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
1
+48V
ON
OFF
2
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
3
6
+48V
OFF
ON
4
OFF
5
7
+48V
ON
6
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
9
+48V
ON
OFF
8
10
+48V
ON
9
OFF
10
11
+48V
ON
OFF
11
12
+48V
ON
OFF
12
13
+48V
ON
OFF
13
14
+48V
ON
OFF
14
OFF
15
16
15
+48V
ON
REC
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
16
PAD
20dB
20dB
-60
-16
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
0
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
DISPLAY
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
-10
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
Q
3
-8
-10
-12
2
4
5
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
HIGH MID
6
FREQUENCY
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
LOW MID
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
Synthesizer
GAIN
INC
DEC
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
AUTO
SEL
17
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
5
0
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
5
15
20 10
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
5
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
15
20
20
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
15
30 15
40
30 15
1
17
30 15
2
33
AUX 1
18
30 15
3
34
AUX 2
19
30 15
4
35
AUX 3
20
30 15
5
36
AUX 4
21
30 15
6
37
AUX 5
22
30 15
7
38
AUX 6
23
30 15
8
39
AUX 7
24
30 15
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
30 15
30 15
11
42
BUS 2
27
30 15
12
43
BUS 3
28
30 15
13
44
BUS 4
29
30 15
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
Remote Control
50
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
226
Chapter 17—Remote Control
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1
3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE 2 parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI, then press
[ENTER].
If the MIDI port is already in use, a confirmation window for changing the assignment
appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the REMOTE 2 parameter box is grayed out, proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET
parameter, then return to Steps 2 and 3.
4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Remote | Remote 2 page appears.
5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel
to select USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER].
The confirmation window for changing the setting appears. Move the cursor to the YES
button, then press [ENTER]. The display changes as follows:
1
4
3
2
5
6
7
A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE
This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable.
B INITIALIZE
This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter to the
default setting.
C BANK
This parameter enables you to select one of four banks.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Remote Layer
227
D ID, SHORT, LONG
These parameters display the channel names. The ID parameter displays the channel ID
(RM01–RM16) for the currently-controlled MIDI device.
E ON section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the [ON] buttons for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
• LATCH/UNLATCH......This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON] button operation.
• LEARN...........................When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received at the
MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes.
• DATA parameter boxes ...................... These boxes display the type of MIDI messages
(in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the
[ON] button).
F ENCODER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the Encoders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
G FADER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned
to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
6 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),
then press [ENTER].
7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 2] button to select Remote Layer 2.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function.
8 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the MIDI device.
17
Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
228
Chapter 17—Remote Control
Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls
You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks.
However, you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or
Encoders.
This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls, using the
example of assigning Hold On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the
Channel 1 [ON] button.
1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable
the MIDI Remote function on the DM1000.
MIDI OUT
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
MIDI IN
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
+48V
ON
OFF
MIDI IN
16
15
+48V
ON
1
20dB
MIDI OUT
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
-2
-4
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
AUX2
AUX5
AUX3
AUX6
AUX4
AUX7
2
3
4
-8
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
6
FREQUENCY
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
SLOT
BUS
LOW MID
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
INC
DEC
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
HIGH
HIGH MID
Q
-6
-8
-10
5
SCENE
AUXSELECT
AUX1
1
-4
-6
DISPLAY
MIDI keyboard
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
OVER
0
-2
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
AUTOMIX
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
15
50
33
AUX 1
10
5
15
34
AUX 2
0
10
5
15
35
AUX 3
0
10
5
15
36
AUX 4
0
10
5
15
37
AUX 5
10
5
15
38
AUX 6
0
10
5
15
39
AUX 7
0
10
5
15
40
AUX 8
0
10
5
15
41
BUS 1
0
10
5
15
42
BUS 2
0
10
5
15
43
BUS 3
0
10
5
15
44
BUS 4
10
5
15
45
BUS 5
0
10
5
15
46
BUS 6
0
10
5
15
30 15
40 20
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
30
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
29
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
28
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
27
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
10
26
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
25
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
24
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
23
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
22
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
21
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
20
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
19
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
2
18
5
5
20 10
50 30
60 40
70
50
1
17
0
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
30
40
5
5
20 10
30 15
20
5
5
47
BUS 7
15
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
70
60
Foot switch
70
15
31
10
20
16
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then the [F2] button to display
the Remote | Remote 2 page. Rotate the Parameter wheel to set the TARGET
parameter to USER DEFINED.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the previous section for more information on using the MIDI Remote function.
3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),
then press [ENTER].
4 Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels.
Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON, ENCODER, and FADER sections.
Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID, SHORT, and LONG parameters.
5 Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the ON section, then press [ENTER].
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the DM1000 will be assigned to the DATA
parameter boxes in the ON section.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Remote Layer
229
6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch.
The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box.
MIDI messages are described below:
• 00–7F .............................MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal.
• END ...............................This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent
messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be
ignored.
• – ......................................This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the
DATA parameter boxes.
Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the DM1000 automatically
recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and “–.”
7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch, turn off the LEARN button.
8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box (“7F” in this example), then
rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW.
Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section, the current MIDI
messages are output.
Note: Be sure to set variables in the ENCODER and FADER sections. If no variables are
assigned, operation of the Encoders or faders is ignored.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
17
Remote Control
“SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON] button’s on/off status. You can use
the following variables in MIDI messages.
• SW..................................This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are turned on, “7F”
(127 in decimal) is output. When the [ON] buttons are turned
off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output.
• ENC................................This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the ENCODER section. When you operate the Encoders, values
in the range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.
• FAD ................................This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of
the FADER section. When you operate the faders, values in the
range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.
230
Chapter 17—Remote Control
9 Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to
select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the [ON] buttons
to function.
• LATCH .......................... Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On
and Off messages.
• UNLATCH.................... Pressing and holding down the [ON] buttons transmits On
messages, and releasing the [ON] buttons transmits Off messages.
Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the [ON] buttons behave when Latch
or Unlatch is selected.
■ When “SW” is assigned:
- LATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
Off
MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Illuminated
Off
- UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
Off
Illuminated
MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Off
■ When “SW” is not assigned:
- UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission
Off
Illuminated
Off
Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned.
10 To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter
box, then press [ENTER] to display the Title Edit window.
See page 30 for more information on editing names.
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. A window is displayed
that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank.
• You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the
LEARN button.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Machine Control Function
231
Machine Control Function
The DM1000 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording
machines that support MMC and the P2 protocol by transmitting commands via the MIDI
OUT port and REMOTE connector respectively.
Tip: P2 protocol is used by Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. The
DM1000 is capable of transmitting P2 protocol commands via the REMOTE connector.
Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices. Refer to the User’s
Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters.
1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the DM1000 to
an external device.
MIDI OUT
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
MIDI IN
7
+48V
ON
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
14
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
1
20dB
MIDI OUT
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
PAD
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
0
-60
-16
GAIN
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
10
MMC-supported
machine
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
MIDI IN
REMOTE connector
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
6
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
+48V
ON
RS422
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
9
+48V
ON
OFF
10
+48V
ON
OFF
11
+48V
ON
OFF
12
+48V
ON
OFF
13
+48V
ON
OFF
OFF
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
SIGNAL
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
-60
-16
GAIN
SIGNAL
ROUTING
SETUP
UTILITY
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
-8
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
-60
-16
GAIN
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX5
AUX2
AUX3
AUX6
AUX7
AUX4
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
2
3
4
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
5
6
7
8
CLEAR
2TR D2
0
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
10
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
P2 protocolsupported machine
PHONES
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
SIGNAL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
-8
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DIRECT
INC
DEC
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX6
AUX7
AUX4
-10
-10
-12
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
OFF
0
TALKBACK LEVEL
SELECTED CHANNEL
SOLO
2TR D1
GAIN
STEREO
+48V
ON
-60
-16
GAIN
AUX5
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HIGH
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
Q
FREQUENCY
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
STEREO
DIRECT
INC
DEC
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
HIGH
HIGH MID
Q
FREQUENCY
-60
-16
GAIN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DIO
MIDI
OFF
3
20dB
16
15
+48V
ON
2
20dB
SELECTED CHANNEL
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
14
+48V
ON
1
20dB
PAD
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
FADER
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
STORE
RECALL
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
PAN
F4
F3
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
ON
ON
15
ON
16
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6
ON
7
ON
8
ON
9
ON
10
ON
11
ON
12
ON
13
ON
14
AUTO
SEL
ON
ON
15
16
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
0
10
5
15
20 10
10
15
50
33
AUX 1
10
5
15
34
AUX 2
0
10
5
15
35
AUX 3
0
10
5
15
36
AUX 4
0
10
5
15
37
AUX 5
10
5
15
38
AUX 6
0
10
5
15
39
AUX 7
0
10
5
15
40
AUX 8
0
10
5
15
41
BUS 1
0
10
5
15
42
BUS 2
0
10
5
15
43
BUS 3
0
10
5
15
44
BUS 4
10
5
15
45
BUS 5
0
10
5
15
46
BUS 6
0
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
47
BUS 7
0
15
5
20
20
10
30
30
15
40
40
20
15
15
31
5
10
15
50
50
30
60
70
60
40
70
50
48
BUS 8
0
10
5
15
30 15
STEREO
0
10
5
15
34
AUX 2
0
10
5
15
35
AUX 3
0
10
5
15
36
AUX 4
0
10
5
15
37
AUX 5
10
5
15
38
AUX 6
0
10
5
15
39
AUX 7
0
10
5
15
40
AUX 8
0
10
5
15
41
BUS 1
0
10
5
15
42
BUS 2
0
10
5
15
43
BUS 3
0
10
5
15
44
BUS 4
10
5
15
45
BUS 5
0
10
5
15
46
BUS 6
0
10
5
15
30 15
40 20
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
30
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
29
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
28
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
27
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
10
26
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
25
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
24
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
23
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
22
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
21
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
20
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
19
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
2
18
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
33
AUX 1
5
5
20 10
1
17
5
5
20 10
16
32
5
5
10
10
5
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
30
DISPLAY
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
29
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
28
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
27
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
10
26
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
25
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
24
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
23
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
22
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
21
0
5
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
20
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
19
5
5
20 10
30 15
40 20
2
18
5
5
20 10
50 30
60 40
70
50
1
17
0
30 15
40 20
50 30
60 40
70
50
30
40
5
5
20 10
30 15
20
5
5
47
BUS 7
15
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
70
60
70
15
31
10
16
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
2 To control a device that supports the P2 protocol, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | Remote page, then set the
REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “P2-DFLT.”
This page enables you to select the type of signals transmitted or received via the REMOTE
connector. See page 270 for more information.
1
17
Remote Control
Tip: For the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, you can also select P2-VTR1, P2-VTR2, or
P2-VTR3 as a P2 protocol format. These three options are provided to support future P2 protocol supporting devices. Currently, they are identical to P2-DFLT.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
232
Chapter 17—Remote Control
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1
4 Move the cursor to either the MMC button or P2 button in the MACHINE
CONTROL section (1) to specify the remote control method, then press the
[ENTER] button.
In the MACHINE CONTROL section, you can also select the type of commands used on
the Remote | Machine Control page. The MMC button selects MMC commands, and the
P2 button select the P2 protocol.
5 If the MMC button is turned on, press the cursor [ ] button to move the
cursor to the PORT parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select
the MMC destination.
The following ports and slots are available as the MMC destination.
• MIDI.............................. MIDI port
• USB ................................ USB port
• SLOT1............................ Slot 1 with an MY8-mLAN (mLAN card) installed
• REMOTE....................... REMOTE connector
If USB or SLOT 1 is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right),
and select one of eight ports.
6 Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box, then rotate the Parameter
wheel to set the DM1000 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the external device.
MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID. Therefore, the
DM1000’s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Machine Control Function
233
7 To start remote control, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then
press the [F3] button to display the Remote | Machine page.
2
3
1
4
This page contains the following parameters:
A LOCATE/TIME section
•
•
•
•
This section enables you to set the locate points.
LOCATE 1–8 .................These buttons locate the positions (specified by the TIME values) on external machines.
RTZ ................................This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position
on external machines.
TIME..............................Locate points are specified in hour/minute/second/frame format.
CAPTURE .....................These buttons capture the current position on external
machines and import the information into the TIME column.
B TRACK ARMING section
This section controls the tracks on external machines.
• 1–24 buttons.................These buttons turn external tracks 1–24 on or off, and set or
cancel their Record Ready mode.
• ALL CLEAR...................Turning on this button switches all buttons (1–24) simultaneously.
C TRANSPORT section
D FRAMES
This parameter selects the timecode frame rate.
8 To control the transport functions, move the cursor to the desired button in
the TRANSPORT section, then press [ENTER].
9 If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the
LOCATE/TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section, then press the
[ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport functions on external machines.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
17
Remote Control
•
•
•
•
•
This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines.
REW...............................This button starts rewind on external machines.
FF....................................This button starts fast forward on external machines.
STOP..............................This button stops external machines.
PLAY ..............................This button starts playback on external machines.
REC ................................This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to
start recording on external machines.
234
Chapter 17—Remote Control
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
MIDI
235
18 MIDI
This chapter describes the DM1000’s MIDI-related functions.
MIDI & the DM1000
Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI messages enables you to
recall Scenes and edit parameters on the DM1000, and store DM1000 internal data on
external MIDI devices.
The DM1000 supports the following MIDI messages. Each of these MIDI messages can be
individually turned on or off for transmission and reception.
• Program Changes
If you assign the DM1000’s Scenes to Program Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits
Program Changes when it recalls Scenes. Also, the DM1000 will switch Scenes when it
receives Program Changes.
• Control Changes
If you assign the DM1000’s parameters to Control Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits
the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000
changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes.
• System Exclusive Messages
The DM1000 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real-time when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000 notifies certain parameter values when it receives
assigned Parameter Changes.
• MTC (MIDI Timecode)
The DM1000 uses MTC to synchronize Automix with a recorder or computer-based
sequencer.
• MIDI Clock
The DM1000 uses MIDI Clock to synchronize Automix with a MIDI device that does not
support MTC.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
MMC is used for external machine control.
• MIDI Note On/Off
These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect and Auto Pan 5.1.
• Bulk Dump Messages
These messages enable you to store the DM1000’s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer.
When the DM1000 receives these messages, they overwrite the DM1000 data
The DM1000 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
MIDI
• MIDI IN & OUT ports
These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices. Each port
is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports).
18
236
Chapter 18—MIDI
• USB port
This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages. This is a multiport
interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8 ports). If you
connect a computer to the USB port, you must install the appropriate driver software on
the computer. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing drivers.
Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched,
DM1000 performance may be slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as the
MIDI message transmission port.
• REMOTE connector
This connector normally enables you to remotely control a Yamaha AD824 or a device that
supports Sony P2 protocol, or to make a cascade connection with another DM1000. It also
enables you to transfer MIDI messages.
To transfer MIDI messages, you need to set the parameters in the GENERAL section on the
Setup | MIDI/Host page to “MIDI” (see “Tx PORT”).
Note that a connection between the REMOTE connector and a computer’s COMM port
does not transfer MIDI messages.
• SLOT 1
If an optional “MY8-mLAN” I/O card is installed in Slot #1, MIDI data transfer to and from
an external MIDI device is available via the MY8-mLAN card. Up to eight-port MIDI data
(16 channels x 8 ports) can be transmitted and received.
MIDI Port Setup
Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer
To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP]
button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you to set
MIDI message input and output.
1
4
2
3
The following parameters are available on this page:
A GENERAL section
This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages, such
as Program Changes and Control Changes.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Port Setup
237
• Rx PORT .......................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data reception. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or SLOT
(available only with an optional mLAN card installed). If you
select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box.
• Tx PORT........................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmission. The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT
parameter.
B MIDI THRU section
These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port to another
without changes. Select a port for reception in the first parameter box, and select a port
for transmission in the next parameter box (located to the right of the arrow). If you
select USB, specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port
parameter box.
C MACHINE CONTROL section
This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to
control external devices, including hard disk recorders and video equipment.
• TYPE..............................Specify a type (method) of remote control by turning on either
the MMC (MIDI Machine Control) button or the P2 (Sony P2
protocol) button.
• PORT .............................Select MIDI, USB, REMOTE, or SLOT (available only when an
optional mLAN card is installed) for MMC command transfer.
If you select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box.
• DEVICE ID ...................Specify the DM1000’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs
identify connected devices, enabling recognition during MMC
transmission and reception.
D SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section
•
•
•
•
•
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
18
MIDI
This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions.
Studio Manager............In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or REMOTE as the
port used by the included Studio Manager software. In the two
small parameter boxes on the right, specify a port number (if
you selected USB), and an ID number.
DAW...............................Select USB or REMOTE as a port for use with a DAW. If you
select USB, specify in the right parameter box a port number
pair (1–2, 3–4, 5–6, 7–8).
REMOTE 1 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer 1. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you
can select a MIDI message destination port.
REMOTE 2 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer 2. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you
can select a MIDI message destination port.
CASCADE LINK ..........Select MIDI or REMOTE as a port for DM1000 cascade connection. Clicking the TRANSMIT button during cascade connection enables you to copy the internal settings of the
DM1000 you are operating to another DM1000. This enables
both DM1000s to share the identical parameter settings. Clicking the REQUEST button during cascade connection enables
you to copy the internal settings of the other DM1000 to the
DM1000 you are operating.
238
Chapter 18—MIDI
Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception
You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a port specified in the GENERAL section on the Setup | MIDI/Host page (see page 236).
To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page
appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row, and turn the
transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS.
A CHANNEL
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. The following parameters are available in this row:
• Tx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Transmit Channel.
• Rx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel.
B PROGRAM CHANGE
•
•
•
•
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program
Changes.
Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
OMNI ON/OFF............ When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI
Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row settings.
ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Program Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.
C CONTROL CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Control Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.
D PARAMETER CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter
Changes.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall
239
• Tx ON/OFF...................Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether Parameter Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI
OUT port.
E BULK
This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data.
• Rx ON/OFF...................Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled.
F OTHER COMMANDS
• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether other MIDI messages received
at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT
port.
G Fader Resolution
This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the
DM1000’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded DM1000s, or to
record the DM1000 operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH button. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall
You can assign DM1000 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When you
recall a Scene on the DM1000, the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device. When the DM1000 receives a Program Change, the assigned Scene is
recalled.
Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99,
and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these assignments.
Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using
MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F2] button.
The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears.
18
MIDI
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
240
Chapter 18—MIDI
4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column, and rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Program
Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes.
5 Press the cursor button [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the
SCENE NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select Scenes.
Tip:
• If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the Program Change with the lowest
number becomes effective.
• You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to
the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.
7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
Now, when the DM1000 receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels,
the corresponding Scenes are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the DM1000, the
DM1000 transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels.
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time
Control
You can assign DM1000 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When
the DM1000 receives a Control Change, the assigned DM1000 parameter is set accordingly.
Also, when you adjust a parameter on the DM1000, the DM1000 transmits the assigned
Control Change message.
Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by
using MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F3] button.
The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you to assign DM1000 parameters to
Control Changes.
1
Tip: See page 337 for more information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control
241
4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s TABLE button (1), then press
[ENTER].
The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when DM1000
parameters are adjusted. The following options are available for the MODE parameter:
• TABLE............................MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance
with the assignments on this page.
• NRPN.............................The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are
transmitted for remote control.
Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes. They
enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel.
5 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the No. (CH) column, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Control
Changes to which you want to assign parameters.
You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page,
regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception.
Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4.
6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns.
Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column, and specify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER columns.
The following parameters and values are available:
HIGH
NO ASSIGN
MID
LOW
—
—
CHANNEL
INPUT1–48
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
FADER H
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–48
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
CHANNEL
INPUT1–48
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
18
AUX3 SEND
FADER L
AUX4 SEND
MIDI
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–48
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
242
Chapter 18—MIDI
HIGH
MID
LOW
CHANNEL
INPUT1–48
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
ON
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–48
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
PHASE
INSERT ON
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
CHANNEL
INPUT1–48
CHANNEL
INPUT1–48
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
PRE/POST
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–48
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
IN DELAY
TIME LOW
MIX HIGH
INPUT1–48
MIX LOW
FB GAIN H
FB GAIN L
ON
OUT DELAY
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
TIME LOW
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L, R
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control
HIGH
MID
243
LOW
ON
Q LOW
F LOW
G LOW H
G LOW L
Q LO-MID
F LO-MID
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID L
Q HI-MID
EQ
F HI-MID
INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
Q HIGH
F HIGH
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
ATT H
ATT L
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
GATE
RANGE
INPUT1–48
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY H
DECAY L
ON
ATTACK
THRESH H
THRESH L
COMP
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE
CHANNEL
AUX1–2
PAN
AUX3–4
18
INPUT1–48
AUX5–6
BALANCE
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
MASTER
STEREO
MIDI
AUX7–8
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
244
Chapter 18—MIDI
HIGH
MID
LOW
LFE H
LFE L
DIV (F)
DIV R
SURROUND
LR
FR
INPUT1–48
WIDTH
DEPTH
OFS LR
OFS FR
BYPASS
MIX
PARAM1 H
EFFECT
PARAM1 L
EFFECT1–4
:
PARAM32 H
PARAM32 L
Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps (such as Fader and Delay
Time parameters) require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values.
For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control
Changes, you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and select
“FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first
PARAMETER column.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control
245
If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes,
you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers, and
select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and “TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the
parameter boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column.
Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate
combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change.
Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.
8 Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
DM1000 parameters will now be set accordingly when the DM1000 receives corresponding
Control Changes. Also, when you adjust parameters on the DM1000, the DM1000 will
transmit corresponding Control Changes.
Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx
ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row are turned off.
18
MIDI
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
246
Chapter 18—MIDI
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes
You can control DM1000 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that
are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes.
See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available
Parameter Changes.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup
page appears, then turn off the Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row.
The DM1000 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes. Also, when you adjust certain parameters on the DM1000, it transmits corresponding Parameter Changes.
Note: You do not have to specify MIDI Channels to control parameters using Parameter
Changes. Make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row
on the MIDI | Setup page are turned off.
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)
You can back up data stored in the DM1000, such as libraries and Scenes, to an external
MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous
DM1000 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the DM1000.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception
of MIDI messages (see page 236).
2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can
transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F4] button.
Note: Some of the data transmitted from the DM1000 to the sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use
the included Studio Manager software to store DM1000 data to an external device.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)
247
The MIDI | Bulk page appears.
2
3
1
4
The page includes the following parameters:
A CATEGORY section
This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception.
B REQUEST
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit messages from the
DM1000 that request a second DM1000 (connected to the first DM1000) to transmit
the data specified in the CATEGORY section. This button is used primarily when two
DM1000s are connected in cascade.
C TRANSMIT
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit data specified in the
CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device.
D INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in
50 millisecond steps. If the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase this
parameter value.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
18
MIDI
4 In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to the button of the data type
you want to transmit, then press [ENTER].
The following options are available:
• ALL.................................This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When this
button is turned on, all other buttons in this section are turned
off.
• SCENEMEM .................This button selects Scene memories. You can select Scenes you
wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button.
• AUTOMIX ....................This button selects Automix memories. You can select Automixes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the
button.
• LIBRARY.......................This button selects libraries. You can select the type of library in
the TYPE parameter box (next to the button), then specify the
library number in the parameter box on the right.
• BANK.............................This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key
banks (KEYS UDEF), User Defined Remote Layer banks (RMD
UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks (USR LAYER) for bulk
dump. You can select one of these three types in the parameter
box next to the button, and select the banks in the parameter
box on the right.
248
Chapter 18—MIDI
• SETUPMEM ................. This button selects the DM1000 setup data (i.e., system settings).
• PGM TABLE ................. This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings.
• CTL TABLE................... This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings.
• PLUG-IN....................... This button selects the settings of any optional Y56K cards
installed in Slot #1 or #2. You can select Y56K card programs in
the parameter box next to the button.
Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception
port settings and message settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data that
has its reception disabled, if the DM1000 later starts to receive this particular data, DM1000
bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately, and the DM1000 will be unable to receive
subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using
Bulk Dump, be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception.
5 If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected button, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the desired bulk dump data.
Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data selected by the corresponding button
is transmitted as bulk dump data.
6 To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button,
then press [ENTER].
Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk Dump window appears, indicating
the current bulk dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the cursor to the
CANCEL button in the window, then press [ENTER].
Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then
press [ENTER]. If a second DM1000 is connected, it will transmit bulk data to the first
DM1000 in response to the request.
7 To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly
until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then turn on the Rx ON/OFF button in
the BULK row.
Now, when the DM1000 receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
249
19 Other Functions
This chapter describes the DM1000’s miscellaneous functions.
Changing the Input and Output Connector Names
You can change the default name of the input and output connectors, if you desire.
Changing the Input Connector Names
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | In
Port page appears.
3
1
2
You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes (1) in the center column, and Long
names in the parameter boxes (2) in the right column.
2 Use the Parameter wheel to select a port for which you want to change the
name.
3 Move the cursor to a name you want to change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a
newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name.
You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE
button, then pressing [ENTER].
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
19
Other Functions
4 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
250
Chapter 19—Other Functions
Changing the Output Connector Names
To change output connector names, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Out Port page appears.
The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Output Auto Copy check box and
the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Port page.
Setting Preferences
You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the DM1000 by using the
Setup | Prefer1, Prefer2, and Prefer3 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly.
Prefer1 page
This page enables you to set the DM1000 so that when you press a button on the top panel,
the DM1000 displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides confirmation and
alarm messages.
This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order
from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column.)
• Auto ROUTING Display
If this check box is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when you press a routing-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Preferences
251
• Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
If this check box is on, the Pan/Surr pages appear automatically when you operate the Joystick in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. If you want to use the Joystick to adjust the pan
setting, turn on this check box. In Stereo Surround mode, operating the Joystick enables
you to adjust the Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings.
• Auto EQUALIZER Display
If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an
EQ-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto SOLO Display
If this check box is on, the Monitor | Solo C-R page appears automatically when you solo
an Input Channel.
• Auto WORD CLOCK Display
If this check box is on, the DIO | Word Clock page appears automatically if the currently-selected external wordclock source fails.
• Auto Channel Select
If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or
Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO], [ON], or [AUTO] button.
• Store Confirmation
If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name
appears when you store a Scene or library memory.
• Recall Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library
memory.
• Patch Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output
Patches.
• Pair Confirmation
If this check box is on, the confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair.
• L/R Nominal Pan
If this check box is on, left/odd and right/even signals will be at nominal level (0 dB) when
Input Channels are panned hard left or hard right. If this check box is off, the signal level
rises by +3 dB.
• Fast Meter Fall Time
If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly.
• TC Drop Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears if a dropout is detected in the incoming
timecode.
• MIDI Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the
incoming MIDI messages.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
19
Other Functions
• DIO Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital
audio signals received at the Slot 1 or 2, or 2TR Digital Inputs.
252
Chapter 19—Other Functions
• Initial Data Nominal
If this check box is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal (0 dB) when you recall Scene
#0.
• Meter Follow Layer
If this check box is on, a connected optional MB1000 Meter Bridge automatically track a
layer selection made in the LAYER section on the DM1000.
• Scene MEM Auto Update
If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function (see page 159).
• Joystick Auto Grab
If this check box is on, the [GRAB] button is automatically enabled and the Joystick is
engaged in as the surround pan control when you move the Joystick pointer to the current
surround pan position.
• Cascade COMM Link
If this check box is on, various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded
DM1000s (See page 265 for more information on cascade connection). When the check
box is off, only the Solo function is linked.
• Auto Direct Out On
If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from “–” to any
other output, the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the channel
Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct Out is automatically disabled.
Prefer2 page
The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display, and adjust the
display brightness.
1
2
3
4
5
This page contains the following parameters:
A Channel ID/Channel
This parameter selects a style for displayed channel. If the Channel ID check box is
selected, the Channel ID appears (e.g., CH1, BUS1). If the Channel Short Name check
box is on, the Channel Short name appears (see page 249).
B Port ID/PORT
This parameter selects a format for the port name displayed on the pages. When the Port
ID check box is on, the Port ID (such as AD1 or OMN10) appears. When the Port Short
Name check box is on, the Short Port name appears (see page 250).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Setting Preferences
253
C Channel Copy Parameter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons (see page 257). You can select
multiple options.
ALL.................................This button selects all parameters that can be copied. When you
turn on this button, all other options are cancelled.
FADER...........................Copies the fader values.
ON..................................Copies the on/off status of the [ON] buttons.
PAN ................................Copies the pan settings.
SURR .............................Copies the surround pan settings.
AUX................................Copies the Aux Send levels.
AUX ON ........................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals.
EQ...................................Copies the EQ parameter values.
D Fader Touch Sense
•
•
•
•
These parameters control the Touch Sense function.
ENABLED/DISABLED ..This button enables or disables the Touch Sense function.
CONTROL ....................If this button is turned on and the touch sensors are not triggered, fader operations is ignored. During Automix recording,
you can perform “cut-in” style operations by touching a fader.
When this button is off, the DM1000 always recognizes fader
movements.
SELECT .........................If this button is on, you can select channels using the Touch
Sense function.
Sensitivity .....................This parameter adjusts the touch sensitivity in the range of 01
to 10.
E Display Brightness
This parameter sets the brightness of the display, Scene Memory display, and the button
indicators in the range of 1 through 4.
Prefer3 page
This page enables you to set various Automix preferences.
19
• Mix Update Confirmation
If this check box is on, when Automix recording stops, a confirmation message appears asking if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order
from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column).
254
Chapter 19—Other Functions
• Auto EQ Edit in
If this check box is on, EQ settings are automatically punched into the Automix recording
when you adjust an EQ control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto Inc TC Capture
If this check box is on, the Timecode Capture memory is incremented automatically each
time a timecode address is captured on the Automix | Event Edit page (see page 202).
• Link Capture & Locate Memory
If this check box is on, the Capture memories on the Automix | Event Edit page are linked
to the Locate memories.
• Clear Edit Channel after REC
If this check box is on, the previously-recorded channel events are automatically cleared
when Automix recording (with Auto Rec on) stops.
• Timecode Display Relative
If this check box is on, the indicated timecode is offset based on the OFFSET parameter on
the Main page.
• Receive Full Frame Message
If this check box is on, MTC full-frame messages, in addition to the usual quarter-frame
messages, are recognized and Automix follows them. If this check box is off, only the usual
quarter-frame messages are recognized.
• Show Compact Size
Automix data is compressed while recording. If this check box is on, the DM1000 displays
the compressed size of the Automix.
• Automix Store Undo
If this check box is on, you can undo the Automix Store & Clear functions.
• Copy Initial Fader
If this check box is on, the fader value recorded immediately before the specified IN point
is copied to the specified TO point when you copy or move the Fader events. This eliminates
fader position matching problems when no fader event exists at the specified TO point.
• Drop Out Time
This parameter sets an interval (in frames) between the interruption of incoming timecode
and the stoppage of Automix recording or playback.
• Lock Time
This parameter sets the interval (in frames) allowed until the Automix locks to incoming
timecode messages. If the sync operation is unstable, set this value higher.
• Frame Jump Error
This parameter sets the time interval (in frames) required by the DM1000 to recognize an
error after incoming timecode messages jump. If the actual interval is shorter than the value
specified by this parameter, the DM1000 continues the sync operation. If the frame jump
causes the recording or playback to stop during the MTC sync operation, set the parameter
value higher than the number of frames indicated in the error message.
If you set the parameter to a higher value, adjust the Drop Out Time parameter value, if necessary.
• Fader REC Accuracy
This parameter sets the accuracy of recording faders over time to “Little,” “Some,” “More,”
or “Most.” If you set the parameter to lower values, you will save Automix memory space.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer)
255
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User
Assignable Layer)
If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer
by combining any DM1000 channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called
“User Assignable layer.” You can use either Remote 1 or Remote 2 for a User Assignable layer.
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] or [F2] button.
The Remote | Remote1 or Remote2 page appears.
2 Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation window appears.
3 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 displays the page shown below.
1
4 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the
1–16 parameter boxes (1).
You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the
BANK 1–4 buttons.
Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and
pressing [ENTER].
5 Use the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to assign or recall the User
Assignable layer.
You can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels.
Tip: If you connected an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge, its meters indicate the level of the
channels currently-assigned to layer channels 1–16.
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
256
Chapter 19—Other Functions
Using the Oscillator
The DM1000 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks. Follow the steps below to
use the Oscillator:
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F1] button.
The Utility | Oscillator page appears.
1
3
4
2
This page contains the following parameters:
A OSCILLATOR ON
This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off.
B WAVEFORM
These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms.
C LEVEL section
The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level.
D ASSIGN section
The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output.
2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the
ASSIGN section, then press [ENTER] (you can select multiple channels).
3 Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons, then press
[ENTER].
You can select the following waveforms:
• SINE 100Hz .................. 100 Hz sinewave
• SINE 1kHz .................... 1 kHz sinewave
• SINE 10kHz .................. 10 kHz sinewave
• 1kHz/400Hz ................. Sinewave with different frequency output to L, R, and
odd/even buses
• PINK NOISE ................ Pink noise
• BURST NOISE ............. Burst noise (200 msec pink noise pulses at four second intervals)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate
the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum.
Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure. Oscillator levels that
are too high can damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be sure to set the level to
minimum, then raise the level gradually.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using the User Defined Keys
257
5 Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER]
or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the Oscillator.
The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section.
6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate
the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level.
You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter.
Using the User Defined Keys
m
USER DEFINED
KEYS
DISPLAY
You can assign any of more than 200 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12].
If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function that is usually executed on the display pages, you can use the assigned button as a shortcut.
The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored in banks. (See page 287 for more
information on the initial bank settings.) The DM1000 provides eight banks (Banks A–H).
Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly.
Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS.
1 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User Def | User
Def page.
1
3
2
4
This page contains the following parameters:
A INITIALIZE
This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings.
B BANK
These buttons select the desired banks.
C TITILE
This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button.
Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.
D 1–12
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS
[1]–[12].
19
258
Chapter 19—Other Functions
2 Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button, then press [ENTER].
The corresponding bank is selected, and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons
in that bank are displayed in the 1–12 parameter boxes.
Tip: When you select a function that is executed based on specified numbers (for example, a
function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages), an extra
parameter box appears on the right, in which you must specify the number.
3 Move the cursor to one of the 1–12 parameter boxes, then press [ENTER].
The DM1000 displays the User Define Select window, which enables you to assign functions
to the selected buttons.
4 Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function you wish to assign.
A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See page 275 for a complete list
of assignable functions.
5 In the same way, set the center and right column.
The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function
selected in Step 4.
6 To close the window, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
When the window closes, the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined
button.
To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER].
7 If you assigned functions that require numbers (such as recalling a Scene or
library memory), move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the
right and specify the number.
Tip:
• You can store User Defined Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio
Manager software. Be sure to back up important data.
• You can also store the assignment data to an external device, such as a MIDI data filer, by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
259
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The DM1000’s CONTROL port provides a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling
external equipment. You can configure the GPI so that it will output 8-channel trigger signals when you operate the faders or USER DEFINED KEYS, or so that it will receive 4-channel trigger signals to control the DM1000 parameters.
You can assign functions to these trigger signals. In this way, for example, you can control a
“RECORDING” warning light outside a studio from the DM1000, or you can control the
DM1000’s Talkback function or Dimmer function using an outside switch.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
This is an example of the external circuit that operates GPI.
In this example, a trigger signal causes the LEDs to light up
when the
button is selected as the trigger signal polarity
in the OUTPUT section. A trigger signal causes the LEDs to
turn off when the
button is selected as the trigger signal
polarity.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GPO0
13
9
GPO1
1
21
GPO4
9
14
9
GPO5
3
21
GPI0
22
GPO2
10
2
21
15
GPO6
16
9
GPO7
4
21
17
GPI2
GPI1
5
GPO3
6
23
GPI3
5
11
6
1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | GPI
page appears.
1
2
19
This section enables you to select functions that will be controlled via trigger signals 1–4
input at the CONTROL port. Assignable functions are listed in the area below this section.
B OUTPUT section
This section enables you to select the sources that will output trigger signals 1–8. Selectable sources are listed in the area below this section.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
A INPUT section
260
Chapter 19—Other Functions
2 To assign functions to the incoming trigger signals, move the cursor to one
of four trigger signal parameters 1–4 in the INPUT section.
3 Rotate the Parameter wheel to select the desired function from the list below
the INPUT section, then press [ENTER] to confirm the selection.
4 Select one of two buttons located to the right of trigger signal parameters
1–4 to specify how the incoming trigger signals will be detected.
•
...........When the switch is grounded (Low), the trigger signal is active and the
selected parameter changes.
•
...........When the GPI Input goes High (open), the trigger signal is active and the
selected parameter changes.
Trigger =
Input signals from
the CONTROL port
Executes the function.
Executes the function.
Trigger =
Input signals from
the CONTROL port
Executes the function.
Executes the function.
At this point, when the DM1000 receives the trigger signal at the CONTROL port, the
selected parameter changes.
Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters.
5 To select parameters or controls as the trigger signal sources, move the cursor to the OUTPUT section and select the desired trigger signal parameters
1–8 in the same way as for the INPUT section.
6 Use the buttons located to the right of the trigger signal (1–8) parameters
to switch the polarity of the trigger signals that are output when you control
the trigger sources.
•
...........The GPI Output goes High (open) when the trigger signal source is active.
•
...........The GPI Output goes Low (ground) when the trigger signal source is active.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
261
Trigger signal polarity =
Output signals from
the CONTROL port
Trigger signal polarity =
Output signals from
the CONTROL port
At this time, the trigger signal is output from the CONTROL port when you operate the
assigned parameters or controls.
Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters and controls.
■ Parameters available in the INPUT section
No Assign
TALKBACK
DIMMER
AUX1 ON
:
AUX8 ON
BUS
ST ON
SLOT
CH1 ON UNLATCH
STEREO
:
2TRD1
CH48 ON UNLATCH
2TRD2
BUS1 ON UNLATCH
TALKBACK UNLATCH
:
DIMMER UNLATCH
BUS8 ON UNLATCH
BUS UNLATCH
AUX1 ON UNLATCH
SLOT UNLATCH
:
STEREO UNLATCH
AUX8 ON UNLATCH
2TRD1 UNLATCH
ST ON UNLATCH
2TRD2 UNLATCH
UDEF1
CH1 ON
:
:
UDEF12
CH48 ON
BUS1 ON
:
19
BUS8 ON
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Other Functions
• TALKBACK/DIMMER....................... Same as the MONITOR [TALKBACK] and
[DIMMER] button functions.
• BUS/SLOT............................................ Same as the MONITOR [BUS] and [SLOT] button functions.
• STEREO/2TRD1/2TRD2 ................... Same as the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TRD1],
and [2TRD2] button functions.
262
Chapter 19—Other Functions
• xxx UNLATCH............. The assigned button function is enabled only while the incoming trigger signal is active.
• xxx ON .......................... The corresponding channels are turned on or off each time the
incoming trigger signal becomes active.
• xxx ON UNLATCH...... The corresponding channels are turned on only while the
incoming trigger signal is active.
• UDEFxxx ...................... Same as the corresponding User Defined buttons.
■ Trigger sources available in the OUTPUT section
No Assign
ST FADER OFF
CH1 FADER ON
CH1 FADER TALLY
:
:
CH48 FADER ON
CH48 FADER TALLY
BUS1 FADER ON
BUS1 FADER TALLY
:
:
BUS8 FADER ON
BUS8 FADER TALLY
AUX1 FADER ON
AUX1 FADER TALLY
:
AUX8 FADER ON
:
AUX8 FADER TALLY
ST FADER ON
ST FADER TALLY
CH1 FADER OFF
UDEF1 LATCH
:
:
CH48 FADER OFF
UDEF12 LATCH
BUS1 FADER OFF
UDEF1 UNLATCH
:
:
BUS8 FADER OFF
UDEF12 UNLATCH
AUX1 FADER OFF
REC LAMP
:
POWER ON
AUX8 FADER OFF
• xxx FADER ON ............ The trigger signal is transmitted when you raise a fader from
–∞.
• xxx FADER OFF........... The trigger signal is transmitted when you lower a fader to –∞.
• xxx FADER TALLY ...... The trigger signal is transmitted while a fader remains above
–∞.
• xxx LATCH ................... Pressing the corresponding button toggles the trigger signal on
and off.
• xxx UNLATCH............. The trigger signal is transmitted while you are pressing and
holding down the corresponding button.
• REC LAMP.................... The trigger signal is transmitted while the transport section on
the Remote | Machine Control page is in record mode.
• POWER ON.................. The trigger signal is transmitted while the power to the
DM1000 is on.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using Operation Lock
263
Using Operation Lock
The DM1000 features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and
restricts access to panel operation with a password.
To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTILITY] button, then the [F4] button to
display the Utility | Lock page.
1
2
3
This page contains the following parameters:
A OPERATION LOCK
This button enables or cancels Operation Lock. When you turn on this button, the Password window appears.
Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL]
button enters “0”). (The password characters are represented by asterisks.) Move the
cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock.
To cancel Operation Lock, turn off the OPERATION LOCK button. The Password window appears again. Enter the password and select the OK button. Operation Lock is cancelled.
Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to write down
the password.
B OPERATION LOCK SAFE section
This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock. To cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the cursor to the CLEAR
ALL button, then press [ENTER].
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
264
Chapter 19—Other Functions
C PASSWORD
This button enables you to change the current password. Move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window appears, enabling you
to change the password.
Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field, and a new password in the NEW
PASSWORD field. Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below
the NEW PASSWORD field. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to
change the password.
Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor to the CLEAR button, then press
[ENTER]. If you forget the password, initialize the password setting (see page 273).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Cascading Consoles
265
Cascading Consoles
The DM1000 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two
DM1000s in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI
OUT connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big console, integrating each
unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus.
The following DM1000 functions are linked via the cascade connection. To link functions
and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box
on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250).
• Display page selection
• Aux selection
• Solo function
• Fader Mode
• Encoder Mode
• Metering Position
• Peak Hold On/Off
• Meter Fast Fall on/off
• Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit
• The following Automix functions:
- Make New Automix
- Store and Recall Automix
- Automix Title Edit of
- Automix Transport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP,ABORT)
• The following Automix parameters:
- Automix Enable/Disable
- Motor On/Off
- Frame Type
- Return Time
- Int Start Time
- TC Offset
- Write to End
- Fader Return
- Fader Edit Mode
- Touch Sense In
- Touch Sense Out
- Overwrite (FADER/CH ON/PAN/EQ/AUX/AUX ON/SURR)
Tip: The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link
check box.
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
266
Chapter 19—Other Functions
The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two DM1000s
and the inputs and outputs of digital I/O cards installed in the slots of two DM1000s.
1 Install digital I/O cards into Slot 1 or 2 on two DM1000s.
2 Connect two DM1000s as follows:
• If you want to use the REMOTE connector to transfer MIDI messages, connect the
REMOTE connector of each DM1000 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable. If you want to
use the MIDI IN and OUT ports, connect MIDI IN on one DM1000 to MIDI out on the
other DM1000 using a MIDI cable.
The following connection example uses the REMOTE connectors.
• Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting DM1000 (slave) to the digital
I/O card input on the receiving DM1000 (master).
OUT
OUT
MY8-AT
etc.
MY8-AT
etc.
SLOT 1
REMOTE
connector
SLOT 2
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
2
5
4
3
+48V
ON
1
+48V
ON
3
6
+48V
OFF
ON
4
OFF
7
+48V
ON
5
8
+48V
OFF
6
ON
OFF
7
9
+48V
ON
OFF
8
10
+48V
ON
9
OFF
11
+48V
ON
10
OFF
12
+48V
ON
11
OFF
12
13
+48V
ON
OFF
13
14
+48V
ON
OFF
14
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
IN
MY8-AT
etc.
MY8-AT
etc.
SLOT 1
16
15
+48V
ON
15
IN
OFF
2
1
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
OFF
16
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
2
5
4
3
+48V
ON
1
PAD
REMOTE
connector
SLOT 2
+48V
ON
3
6
+48V
OFF
ON
4
OFF
7
+48V
ON
5
8
+48V
OFF
6
ON
OFF
7
9
+48V
ON
OFF
8
10
+48V
ON
9
OFF
11
+48V
ON
10
OFF
12
+48V
ON
11
OFF
12
13
+48V
ON
OFF
13
14
+48V
ON
OFF
14
OFF
16
15
+48V
ON
15
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
ON
16
PAD
20dB
20dB
-60
-16
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
0
20dB
TALKBACK LEVEL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
10
PEAK
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PHONES
20dB
-60
-16
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
ROUTING
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
-2
EFFECT
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX5
AUX3
AUX6
AUX4
AUX7
-10
-12
-14
-14
2
3
4
5
6
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
-2
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
INC
DEC
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
2
3
4
5
6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
FREQUENCY
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
SOLO
CLEAR
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
INC
DEC
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
HIGH
HIGH MID
Q
-6
-10
-12
GRAB
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
1
-4
-6
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
DISPLAY
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
FADER
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
STORE
RECALL
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
PAN
F4
F3
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ENTER
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
DISPLAY
5
5
10
0
15
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
10
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
30
40
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
60
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
60
70
70
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
60
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
60
70
50 30
60 40
70
50
10
PHONES
MONITOR
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
STEREO
GAIN
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
HIGH
HIGH MID
-4
FREQUENCY
10
PHONES
LEVEL
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
Q
-8
-8
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
1
-6
-6
-10
-12
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
-4
-4
OUTPUT
PATCH
0
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
ROUTING
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
TALKBACK LEVEL
-60
-16
GAIN
10
SELECTED CHANNEL
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
SELECTED CHANNEL
0
40
50
1
17
2
33
AUX 1
18
3
34
AUX 2
19
4
35
AUX 3
20
5
36
AUX 4
21
6
37
AUX 5
22
7
38
AUX 6
23
8
39
AUX 7
24
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
11
42
BUS 2
27
12
43
BUS 3
28
13
44
BUS 4
29
14
45
BUS 5
30
15
46
BUS 6
DM1000 (Slave)
31
16
47
BUS 7
32
1
48
BUS 8
STEREO
17
2
33
AUX 1
18
3
34
AUX 2
19
4
35
AUX 3
20
5
36
AUX 4
21
6
37
AUX 5
22
7
38
AUX 6
23
8
39
AUX 7
24
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
11
42
BUS 2
27
12
43
BUS 3
28
13
44
BUS 4
29
14
45
BUS 5
30
70
15
46
BUS 6
31
16
47
32
BUS 7
48
BUS 8
STEREO
DM1000 (Master)
Tip: To link Automixes between two DM1000s in a cascade system, configure the units so that
they can receive the same sync signal (SMPTE or MTC). If necessary, connect a distribution
box to distribute the sync signal to each DM1000.
Note: Do not make any MIDI connections between DM1000s that are cascaded via the
REMOTE connectors, or vice versa. Otherwise, a loop will be created, causing both consoles
to execute endless transmission and reception.
3 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Cascading Consoles
267
4 Assign the Bus signals to the slot channels that are used for the cascade connection.
The following signals are available:
Options
Description
CAS BUS1–BUS8
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS AUX1–AUX8
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R
Stereo Bus L & R Cascade Outs
CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR
Solo Bus L & R Cascade Outs
The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus,
and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade connection.
Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital I/O cards is limited, only Aux
Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as
MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses.
5 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button
repeatedly until the In Patch | Cascade In page appears.
6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are
input from the Slave unit.
The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4,
Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
19
Other Functions
Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit. Incorrect
patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
268
Chapter 19—Other Functions
7 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button repeatedly until
the DIO | Cascade page appears, then adjust the Attenuators using the
parameter controls.
The DIO | Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus
using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls.
8 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to
display the Setup | Remote page, then set the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “MIDI.”
1
9 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup
| MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link parameter to “REMOTE.”
After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages via the
REMOTE connector.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Cascading Consoles
269
10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the master unit so that it will be able to transmit
and receive MIDI messages via the REMOTE connector.
11 To match the parameters of both DM1000s, locate the Setup | MIDI/Host
page on the copy source unit.
12 Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, then
press [ENTER].
Data, such as libraries and Scene memories, on the copy source unit is copied onto the other
DM1000 via the REMOTE connector. If you select the REQUEST button instead of the
TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy direction.
At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on both DM1000s are integrated, and
the data is output via Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the master unit.
If you solo channels on one of the DM1000s, you can monitor the soloed signals via the
Control Monitor.
Note: You can also link the parameters using the MIDI IN and OUT connection if you set
the CASCADE LINK parameter to “MIDI.”
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
270
Chapter 19—Other Functions
Using the AD824
The Yamaha AD824, an 8-channel AD converter, enables you to control its gain and phantom power from a connected DM1000. The DM1000 can control up to four AD824s simultaneously.
If you connect the DM1000 to the AD824 digitally, and connect the DM1000 REMOTE
connector to the AD824 COM PC/RS422 connector using a serial cable, you can use the
AD824 as AD Inputs for which you can preset the gain.
Tip: You cannot store the Phantom power setting as a Scene on the DM1000.
This section describes how to connect and configure the DM1000 and two AD824s.
1 Install digital I/O cards into slots on the DM1000 and AD824.
2 Connect the DM1000 and AD824s as follows.
• Connect the DM1000 REMOTE connector to the COM RS422 connector of the first
AD824 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable.
• Connect the COM PC/RS422 connector of the first AD824 to the COM PC/RS422 connector of the second AD824 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable.
• Connect the outputs of the digital I/O cards on each AD824 to the inputs of the DM1000
I/O card.
Connection methods and cables vary depending on the specifications of the devices. The
following illustration is an example of a system in which two AD824s are connected via
MY8-AE cards.
IN
IN
OUT
MY8-AE
etc.
MY8-AE
etc.
MY8-AE
etc.
REMOTE
connector
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
COM PC/RS422
connector
WORD CLOCK
INTERNAL
44.1kHz 48kHz
BNC
PEAK
SLOT
PEAK
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
SIGNAL
GAIN
POWER
ON
OFF
dB
SIGNAL
+48V
+48V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+48V MASTER
OFF ON
8
SEL
SEL
AD CONVERTER
2
1
+48V
OFF
OFF
1
+48V
ON
OFF
2
5
4
3
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
3
6
+48V
OFF
ON
4
OFF
5
7
+48V
ON
6
8
+48V
OFF
ON
OFF
7
9
+48V
ON
OFF
8
10
+48V
ON
9
OFF
10
11
+48V
ON
OFF
11
12
+48V
ON
OFF
12
13
+48V
ON
OFF
13
14
+48V
ON
OFF
14
OFF
15
16
15
+48V
ON
+48V
ON
OFF
+48V
ON
OFF
AD824
ON
COM RS422
connector
16
PAD
20dB
20dB
-60
-16
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
SIGNAL
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
0
20dB
-60
-16
GAIN
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
0
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
PEAK
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
10
PHONES
LEVEL
GAIN
PHONES
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
MIDI
DIO
SETUP
REMOTE
UTILITY
METER
OVER
0
OVER
0
-2
-2
-4
-4
-6
-6
VIEW
-8
INPUT
PATCH
/
PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY
PAN/
SURROUND DYNAMICS
EFFECT
OUTPUT
PATCH
SCENE
AUXSELECT
DISPLAY
AUX1
AUX2
AUX5
AUX3
AUX6
AUX4
AUX7
1
-10
-12
-14
-14
-18
-18
-24
-24
-30
-30
-36
-36
-42
-42
-48
-48
-56
-56
-72
-72
L
R
2
3
4
5
6
FREQUENCY
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
SOLO
CLEAR
HIGH MID
2TR D1
2TR D2
LOW MID
SLOT
BUS
DIMMER TALKBACK
LOW
STEREO
0
10
MONITOR
LEVEL
GAIN
INC
DEC
MY8-AE
etc.
GRAB
AUX8
ENCODER MODE
OUT
DISPLAY
HIGH
Q
-8
-10
-12
MONITOR
EQUALIZER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AUTOMIX
COM PC/RS422
connector
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
DISPLAY
FADER
STORE
RECALL
AUX
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN
F1
F2
F4
F3
ENTER
WORD CLOCK
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
AUTO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SEL
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INTERNAL
44.1kHz 48kHz
BNC
PEAK
SLOT
PEAK
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
SIGNAL
GAIN
POWER
ON
OFF
dB
SIGNAL
+48V
+48V
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEL
7
+48V MASTER
OFF ON
8
SEL
AD CONVERTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
USER DEFINED
KEYS
+10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
0
0
DISPLAY
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
5
0
10
5
15
0
10
5
15
5
5
5
5
0
10
5
15
5
0
10
5
15
10
15
10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
50 30
60 40
70
50
30
40
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
1
17
50 30
60 40
70
50
2
33
AUX 1
18
50 30
60 40
70
50
3
34
AUX 2
19
50 30
60 40
70
50
4
35
AUX 3
20
50 30
60 40
70
50
5
36
AUX 4
21
50 30
60 40
70
50
6
37
AUX 5
22
50 30
60 40
70
50
7
38
AUX 6
23
50 30
60 40
70
50
8
39
AUX 7
24
50 30
60 40
70
50
9
40
AUX 8
25
10
41
BUS 1
26
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
11
42
BUS 2
27
50 30
60 40
70
50
12
43
BUS 3
28
50 30
60 40
70
50
13
44
BUS 4
29
50 30
60 40
70
50
14
45
BUS 5
30
46
31
50
50
60
70
60
70
15
BUS 6
AD824
16
47
BUS 7
32
48
BUS 8
STEREO
DM1000 (Master)
Note: Set the AD824 COM PC/RS422 switches to “RS422.” (If these switches are set to “PC,”
the system will not work correctly.)
Tip:
• For information on digital I/O cards that are compatible with the AD824, refer to the AD824
Owner’s Manual or visit the Yamaha Pro Audio web site (http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/)
• Multiple AD824s in a system must have unique IDs.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Using the AD824
271
3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |
Remote page appears.
2
1
3
This page contains the following parameters:
A REMOTE FUNCTION
This parameter selects a device to be connected to the DM1000 REMOTE connector.
B AD824 section
This section enables you to specify the slot channels that will receive eight channel signals from AD824s that have their ID numbers set to 1 through 4.
C AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM CONTROL section
This section enables you to set the AD824 channel 1–8 gain and the Phantom power on
or off.
• ID #1–#4........................These buttons select the AD824s you want to control.
• 1–8..................................These parameter controls adjust the gain for AD824 channels
1–8.
• +48V ..............................When you turn on these buttons, the phantom power on the
corresponding channels are turned on.
4 Make sure that the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter is set to “AD824,” and
in the AD824 section select the slot channels that receive signals from the
AD824s.
5 Use the parameter controls and buttons in the AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM
CONTROL section to set the channel gain and switch the channel phantom
power on or off.
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
272
Chapter 19—Other Functions
Checking the Battery and the System Version
The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal memory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [UTILITY] button repeatedly.
1
2
A Status
If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufficient voltage for operation. If the Status is
“Voltage low!,” ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure
to replace a low battery may result in data loss.
Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur.
B Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.)
This indicator identifies the system version number. Check the current system version
number before you update the system software.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Initializing the DM1000
273
Initializing the DM1000
You can delete all currently-recorded settings and restore the factory-preset values, and reset
the Operation Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps below.
Tip:
• If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to first back up the data using the
included Studio Manager software.
• You can also store the data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 246).
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the
POWER ON/OFF switch.
After a moment, the DM1000 displays the following confirmation window.
3 To reset the DM1000 to factory default settings, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].
To cancel the initialization operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press
[ENTER].
When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten, the DM1000 restarts using the factory
settings.
4 To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting, in Step 2, move
the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER].
The password is reset to “1234”.
If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears, the window automatically closes and the DM1000 restarts without being initialized.
19
Other Functions
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
274
Chapter 19—Other Functions
Calibrating the Faders
The DM1000 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating
conditions and environment. You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function.
1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.
2 While holding down the [ENTER] button, turn on the POWER ON/OFF
switch.
After a moment, the DM1000 displays a message indicating that the calibration is in
progress. Calibration takes about two minutes. It is important that you do not touch the
faders while this message is displayed.
When calibration is finished, the DM1000 displays a page that enables you to fine-tune the
fader position.
3 Follow the instructions on the display and lower all faders to –∞, then press
[ENTER].
4 Set faders 1–16 to –15 and the Stereo fader to –30, then press [ENTER].
5 Set faders 1–16 to 0, then press [ENTER].
Proceed to the next step without moving the Stereo fader this time.
6 Finally, set faders 1–16 to +10 and the Stereo fader to 0, then press [ENTER].
This is the end of the fader calibration process. The DM1000 restarts in normal mode.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
USER DEFINED KEYS
275
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Function
No Assign
Scene MEM. Recall +1
Scene MEM. Recall -1
Scene MEM. Recall No. XX
Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-2 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-3 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-4 Lib. Recall -1
Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX
Effect-1 Bypass On/Off
Effect-2 Bypass On/Off
Effect-3 Bypass On/Off
Effect-4 Bypass On/Off
Channel Lib. Recall +1
Channel Lib. Recall -1
Channel Lib. Recall No. XX
GATE Lib. Recall +1
GATE Lib. Recall -1
GATE Lib. Recall No. XX
COMP Lib. Recall +1
COMP Lib. Recall -1
COMP Lib. Recall No. XX
EQ Lib. Recall +1
EQ Lib. Recall -1
EQ Lib. Recall No. XX
Surr Lib. Recall +1
Surr Lib. Recall -1
Surr Lib. Recall No.XX
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Bs
On/Off
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE
On/Off
SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF
SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF
#
Display
No Assign
Scene +1 Recall
Scene -1 Recall
Scene XX Recall
Fx1 Lib+1 Recall
Fx1 Lib-1 Recall
Fx1 LibXXX RCL.
Fx2 Lib+1 Recall
Fx2 Lib-1 Recall
Fx2 LibXXX RCL.
Fx3 Lib+1 Recall
Fx3 Lib-1 Recall
Fx3 LibXXX RCL.
Fx4 Lib+1 Recall
Fx4 Lib-1 Recall
Fx4 LibXXX RCL.
Fx1 Bypass
Fx2 Bypass
Fx3 Bypass
Fx4 Bypass
CH Lib+1 Recall
CH Lib-1 Recall
CH LibXXX Recall
Gate Lib+1 RCL.
Gate Lib-1 RCL.
Gate LibXXX RCL.
Comp Lib+1 RCL.
Comp Lib-1 RCL.
Comp LibXXX RCL.
EQ Lib+1 Recall
EQ Lib-1 Recall
EQ LibXXX Recall
Surr. Lib+1
Surr. Lib-1
Surr. Libxxx
Surr.Mon L Mute
Surr.Mon R Mute
Surr.Mon Ls Mute
Surr.Mon Rs Mute
Surr.Mon C Mute
Surr.Mon Bs Mute
Surr.Mon LFEMute
Surr.SLOT1 ON
Surr.SLOT2 ON
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
Function
Display
SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE
ON/OFF
SURR. MONI SNAP TO 85dB
SPL
Bus to ST Lib. Recall +1
Bus to ST Lib. Recall -1
Bus to ST Lib. Recall No. XX
Input Patch Lib. Recall +1
Input Patch Lib. Recall -1
Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
Output Patch Lib. Recall +1
Output Patch Lib. Recall -1
Output Patch Lib. Recall No.
XX
Input Fader Group Enable A
Input Fader Group Enable B
Input Fader Group Enable C
Input Fader Group Enable D
Input Fader Group Enable E
Input Fader Group Enable F
Input Fader Group EnableG
Input Fader Group Enable H
Input MUTE Group Enable I
Input MUTE Group Enable J
Input MUTE Group Enable K
Input MUTE Group Enable L
Input MUTE Group Enable M
Input MUTE Group Enable N
Input MUTE Group Enable O
Input MUTE Group Enable P
Output Fader Group Enable Q
Output Fader Group Enable R
Output Fader Group Enable S
Output Fader Group Enable T
Output MUTE Group Enable U
Output MUTE Group Enable V
Output MUTE Group Enable W
Output MUTE Group Enable X
Automix REC
Automix PLAY
Automix STOP
Automix ABORT
Automix AUTO REC
Automix ENABLE
Automix RETURN
Automix RELATIVE
Automix TOUCH SENSE
Automix UPDATE TO END
Overwrite FADER
Overwrite ON
Overwrite PAN
Overwrite SURROUND
Overwrite EQ
Bass Manage ON
SNAP TO SPL85
BUS to ST Lib+1
BUS to ST Lib-1
BUS to ST LibXX
IN Patch Lib+1
IN Patch Lib-1
IN Patch LibXX
Out Patch Lib+1
Out Patch Lib-1
Out Patch LibXX
IN Fader Group A
IN Fader Group B
IN Fader Group C
IN Fader Group D
IN Fader Group E
IN Fader Group F
IN Fader Group G
IN Fader Group H
IN Mute Group I
IN Mute Group J
IN Mute Group K
IN Mute Group L
IN Mute Group M
IN Mute Group N
IN Mute Group O
IN Mute Group P
OutFader Group Q
OutFader Group R
OutFader Group S
OutFader Group T
Out Mute Group U
Out Mute Group V
Out Mute Group W
Out Mute Group X
Automix REC
Automix PLAY
Automix STOP
Automix ABORT
Automix AUTOREC
Automix ENABLE
Automix RETURN
Automix RELATIVE
Automix T.SENSE
Amx UPDATETO END
Overwrite FADER
Overwrite ON
Overwrite PAN
Overwrite SURR.
Overwrite EQ
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
276
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
#
Function
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
Overwrite AUX
Overwrite AUX ON
PEAK HOLD On/Off
OSCILLATOR On/Off
SOLO Enable
Control Room Monitor MONO
Pan / Surround Link
Talkback Assign SLOT1-XX
Talkback Assign SLOT2-XX
Talkback Assign OMNI OUT XX
Channel Name ID/Short
Port Name ID/Short
Channel Copy
Channel Paste
Display Back
Display Forward
UDEF KEYS BANK +1
UDEF KEYS BANK -1
UDEF KEYS BANK X
MIDI NOTE No.XX
MIDI Program change No.XX
MIDI Control Change No.XX
Machine REC
Machine PLAY
Machine STOP
Machine FF
Machine REW
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SCRUB
Machine LOCATE X
Machine Set LOCATE X
Machine RTZ
Machine Set RTZ
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Display
Overwrite AUX
Overwrite AUX ON
Peak Hold
OSC ON/OFF
SOLO ENABLE
C-R MONO
PAN/SURR LINK
Talkback SLOT1-XX
Talkback SLOT2-XX
Talkback OMNI XX
CH ID/Short
Port D/Short
Channel Copy
Channel Paste
Display Back
Display Forward
UDEF KEYS BANK+1
UDEF KEYS BANK-1
UDEF KEYS BANK x
MIDI NOTE XXX
MIDI PGM XXX
MIDI CC XXX
Machine REC
Machine PLAY
Machine STOP
Machine FF
Machine REW
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SCRUB
Machine LOCATE X
Machine Capture X
Machine RTZ
Machine Set RTZ
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 24
#
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
Function
Track Arming All Clear
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
175 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW MONITOR STATUS
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GROUP
187 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
DAW WINDOW INSERT
DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT
DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC
DAW WINDOW STATUS
DAW Shortcut UNDO
DAW Shortcut SAVE
DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE
DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL
DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD
DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL
DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH
DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK DAW Channel +
DAW Channel DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY ALL
Display
Track Arming CLR
DAW REC
DAW PLAY
DAW STOP
DAW FF
DAW REW
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUDITION
DAW PRE
DAW IN
DAW OUT
DAW POST
DAW RTZ
DAW END
DAW ONLINE
DAW LOOP
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW MONI STATUS
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GRP
DAW WIN TRANSPORT
DAW WIN INSERT
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
DAW WIN MEM-LOC
DAW WIN STATUS
DAW UNDO
DAW SAVE
DAW EDIT MODE
DAW EDIT TOOL
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
DAW ALT/FINE
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK DAW Channel +
DAW Channel DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY ALL
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
277
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
TITLE
BANK A
BANK B
BANK C
BANK D
Surround Monitor
Scene Recall
Group Enable
Automix
1
Snap to SPL85
Scene 1 Recall
IN Fader Group A
Automix ENABLE
2
Bass Manage ON
Scene 2 Recall
IN Mute Group I
Overwrite FADER
3
Surr.Mon L Mute
Scene 3 Recall
IN Fader Group B
Overwrite ON
4
Surr.Mon R Mute
Scene 4 Recall
IN Mute Group J
Overwrite PAN
5
Surr.Mon C Mute
Scene 5 Recall
IN Fader Group C
Overwrite SURR
6
Surr.Mon Bs Mute
Scene 6 Recall
IN Mute Group K
Overwrite AUX
7
Surr.Mon Ls Mute
Scene 7 Recall
IN Fader Group D
Overwrite AUX ON
8
Surr.Mon Rs Mute
Scene 8 Recall
IN Mute Group L
Overwrite EQ
9
Surr.Mon LFEMute
Scene 9 Recall
IN Fader Group E
Automix ABORT
10
No Assign
Scene 10 Recall
IN Mute Group M
Automix AUTOREC
11
Surr Lib-1 Recall
Scene _1 Recall
IN Fader Group F
Automix RETURN
12
Surr Lib+1 Recall
Scene +1 Recall
IN Mute Group N
Amx UPDATE TO END
TITLE
BANK E
BANK F
BANK G
BANK H
DAW 1
DAW 2
Machine Control
Program Change
1
UDEF BANK F
UDEF BANK E
Machine Locate 1
MIDI PGM 1
2
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
DAW AUTO STATUS
Machine Locate 2
MIDI PGM 2
3
DAW BANK -
DAW BANK -
Machine Locate 3
MIDI PGM 3
4
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK +
Machine Locate 4
MIDI PGM 4
5
DAW CHANNEL -
DAW AUTO READ
Machine SHUTTLE
MIDI PGM 5
6
DAW CHANNEL +
DAW AUTO TOUCH
Machine SCRUB
MIDI PGM 6
7
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW AUTO LATCH
Machine RTZ
MIDI PGM 7
8
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUTO WRITE
Machine REC
MIDI PGM 8
9
DAW STOP
DAW AUTO TRIM
Machine STOP
MIDI PGM 9
10
DAW PLAY
DAW AUTO OFF
Machine PLAY
MIDI PGM 10
11
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
Machine REW
MIDI PGM 11
12
DAW OPTION/ALL
DAW OPTION/ALL
Machine FF
MIDI PGM 12
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
278
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Input Patch Parameters
INPUT
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1
Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
INSERT IN
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1
Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
EFFECT IN
Port ID
Description
–
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35
INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45
NONE
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35
InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45
CASCADE
Port ID
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
2TD1L
Description
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
2TR IN Dig.1 L
Input Patch Parameters
INPUT
Port ID
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2D1L
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INSERT IN
Port ID
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2D1L
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R
Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
EFFECT IN
Port ID
INS CH46
INS CH47
INS CH48
INS BUS1
INS BUS2
INS BUS3
INS BUS4
INS BUS5
INS BUS6
INS BUS7
INS BUS8
INS AUX1
INS AUX2
INS AUX3
INS AUX4
INS AUX5
INS AUX6
INS AUX7
INS AUX8
INS ST-L
INS ST-R
FX1-1
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
Description
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Effect1 OUT 1
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
279
CASCADE
Port ID
2D1R
2D2L
2D2R
Description
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
280
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Initial Input Patch Settings
CHANNEL
EFFECT IN PATCH
1
AD1
1-1
AUX1
2
AD2
1-2
NONE
3
AD3
1-3
NONE
4
AD4
1-4
NONE
5
AD5
1-5
NONE
6
AD6
1-6
NONE
7
AD7
1-7
NONE
8
AD8
1-8
NONE
9
AD9
2-1
AUX2
10
AD10
2-2
NONE
11
AD11
3-1
AUX3
12
AD12
3-2
NONE
13
AD13
4-1
AUX4
14
AD14
4-2
NONE
15
AD15
16
AD16
17
S1-1
18
S1-2
19
S1-3
20
S1-4
21
S1-5
22
S1-6
23
S1-7
24
S1-8
25
S2-1
26
S2-2
27
S2-3
28
S2-4
29
S2-5
30
S2-6
31
S2-7
32
S2-8
33
FX1-1
34
FX1-2
35
FX2-1
36
FX2-2
37
FX3-1
38
FX3-2
39
FX4-1
40
FX4-2
EFFECT1
REVERB HALL
41
2TD1L
EFFECT2
REVERB ROOM
42
2TD1R
EFFECT3
REVERB STAGE
43
2TD2L
EFFECT4
REVERB PLATE
44
2TD2R
45
OMNI1
46
OMNI2
47
OMNI3
48
OMNI4
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
CASCADE IN PATCH
BUS1
NONE
BUS2
NONE
BUS3
NONE
BUS4
NONE
BUS5
NONE
BUS6
NONE
BUS7
NONE
BUS8
NONE
AUX1
NONE
AUX2
NONE
AUX3
NONE
AUX4
NONE
AUX56
NONE
AUX6
NONE
AUX7
NONE
AUX8
NONE
ST L
NONE
ST R
NONE
SOLO L
NONE
SOLO R
NONE
EFFECT TYPE
(mono input)
Initial Input Patch Settings
281
CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID
SHORT
LONG
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH5
CH5
CH6
CH6
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH8
CH8
CH8
CH8
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH11
CH11
CH11
CH11
CH12
CH12
CH12
CH12
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH15
CH15
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH17
CH17
CH17
CH17
CH18
CH18
CH18
CH18
CH19
CH19
CH19
CH19
CH20
CH20
CH20
CH20
CH21
CH21
CH21
CH21
CH22
CH22
CH22
CH22
CH23
CH23
CH23
CH23
CH24
CH24
CH24
CH24
CH25
CH25
CH25
CH25
CH26
CH26
CH26
CH26
CH27
CH27
CH27
CH27
CH28
CH28
CH28
CH28
CH29
CH29
CH29
CH29
CH30
CH30
CH30
CH30
CH31
CH31
CH31
CH31
CH32
CH32
CH32
CH32
CH33
CH33
CH33
CH33
CH34
CH34
CH34
CH34
CH35
CH35
CH35
CH35
CH36
CH36
CH36
CH36
CH37
CH37
CH37
CH37
CH38
CH38
CH38
CH38
CH39
CH39
CH39
CH39
CH40
CH40
CH40
CH40
CH41
CH41
CH41
CH41
CH42
CH42
CH42
CH42
CH43
CH43
CH43
CH43
CH44
CH44
CH44
CH44
CH45
CH45
CH45
CH45
CH46
CH46
CH46
CH46
CH47
CH47
CH47
CH47
CH48
CH48
CH48
CH48
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
282
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Output Patch Parameters
SLOT, OMNI
INSERT IN
DIRECT OUT
Source
Description
Source
Description
Source
Description
–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO-L
STEREO-R
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35
NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35
–
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD16
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
FX1-1
NONE
AD IN 1
AD IN 2
AD IN 3
AD IN 4
AD IN 5
AD IN 6
AD IN 7
AD IN 8
AD IN 9
AD IN 10
AD IN 11
AD IN 12
AD IN 13
AD IN 14
AD IN 15
AD IN 16
OMNI IN 1
OMNI IN 2
OMNI IN 3
OMNI IN 4
Slot1 CH1 IN
Slot1 CH2 IN
Slot1 CH3 IN
Slot1 CH4 IN
Slot1 CH5 IN
Slot1 CH6 IN
Slot1 CH7 IN
Slot1 CH8 IN
Slot1 CH9 IN
Slot1 CH10 IN
Slot1 CH11 IN
Slot1 CH12 IN
Slot1 CH13 IN
Slot1 CH14 IN
Slot1 CH15 IN
Slot1 CH16 IN
Slot2 CH1 IN
Slot2 CH2 IN
Slot2 CH3 IN
Slot2 CH4 IN
Slot2 CH5 IN
Slot2 CH6 IN
Slot2 CH7 IN
Slot2 CH8 IN
Slot2 CH9 IN
Slot2 CH10 IN
Slot2 CH11 IN
Slot2 CH12 IN
Slot2 CH13 IN
Slot2 CH14 IN
Slot2 CH15 IN
Slot2 CH16 IN
Effect1 OUT 1
–
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
S1-4
S1-5
S1-6
S1-7
S1-8
S1-9
S110
S111
S112
S113
S114
S115
S116
S2-1
S2-2
S2-3
S2-4
S2-5
S2-6
S2-7
S2-8
S2-9
S210
S211
S212
S213
S214
S215
S216
OMNI1
OMNI2
OMNI3
OMNI4
OMNI5
OMNI6
OMNI7
OMNI8
2TD1L
2TD1R
2TD2L
2TD2R
OMNI9
OMNI10
OMNI11
OMNI12
—
—
—
—
—
NONE
Slot1 CH1 OUT
Slot1 CH2 OUT
Slot1 CH3 OUT
Slot1 CH4 OUT
Slot1 CH5 OUT
Slot1 CH6 OUT
Slot1 CH7 OUT
Slot1 CH8 OUT
Slot1 CH9 OUT
Slot1 CH10 OUT
Slot1 CH11 OUT
Slot1 CH12 OUT
Slot1 CH13 OUT
Slot1 CH14 OUT
Slot1 CH15 OUT
Slot1 CH16 OUT
Slot2 CH1 OUT
Slot2 CH2 OUT
Slot2 CH3 OUT
Slot2 CH4 OUT
Slot2 CH5 OUT
Slot2 CH6 OUT
Slot2 CH7 OUT
Slot2 CH8 OUT
Slot2 CH9 OUT
Slot2 CH10 OUT
Slot2 CH11 OUT
Slot2 CH12 OUT
Slot2 CH13 OUT
Slot2 CH14 OUT
Slot2 CH15 OUT
Slot2 CH16 OUT
OMNI OUT 1
OMNI OUT 2
OMNI OUT 3
OMNI OUT 4
OMNI OUT 5
OMNI OUT 6
OMNI OUT 7
OMNI OUT 8
2TR OUT Dig.1 L
2TR OUT Dig.1 R
2TR OUT Dig.2 L
2TR OUT Dig.2 R
OMNI OUT 9
OMNI OUT 10
OMNI OUT 11
OMNI OUT 12
—
—
—
—
—
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
2TR OUT Digital
Source
Description
–
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO-L
STEREO-R
INSCH1
INSCH2
INSCH3
INSCH4
INSCH5
INSCH6
INSCH7
INSCH8
INSCH9
INSCH10
INSCH11
INSCH12
INSCH13
INSCH14
INSCH15
INSCH16
INSCH17
INSCH18
INSCH19
INSCH20
INSCH21
INSCH22
INSCH23
INSCH24
INSCH25
INSCH26
INSCH27
INSCH28
INSCH29
INSCH30
INSCH31
INSCH32
INSCH33
INSCH34
INSCH35
NONE
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
STEREO L
STEREO R
InsertOut-CH1
InsertOut-CH2
InsertOut-CH3
InsertOut-CH4
InsertOut-CH5
InsertOut-CH6
InsertOut-CH7
InsertOut-CH8
InsertOut-CH9
InsertOut-CH10
InsertOut-CH11
InsertOut-CH12
InsertOut-CH13
InsertOut-CH14
InsertOut-CH15
InsertOut-CH16
InsertOut-CH17
InsertOut-CH18
InsertOut-CH19
InsertOut-CH20
InsertOut-CH21
InsertOut-CH22
InsertOut-CH23
InsertOut-CH24
InsertOut-CH25
InsertOut-CH26
InsertOut-CH27
InsertOut-CH28
InsertOut-CH29
InsertOut-CH30
InsertOut-CH31
InsertOut-CH32
InsertOut-CH33
InsertOut-CH34
InsertOut-CH35
Output Patch Parameters
SLOT, OMNI
Source
Description
INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45
INSCH46
INSCH47
INSCH48
INSBUS1
INSBUS2
INSBUS3
INSBUS4
INSBUS5
INSBUS6
INSBUS7
INSBUS8
INSAUX1
INSAUX2
INSAUX3
INSAUX4
INSAUX5
INSAUX6
INSAUX7
INSAUX8
INSSTL
INSSTR
Surr L
Surr R
Surr Ls
Surr Rs
Surr C
Surr SW
Surr Ls2
Surr Rs2
CR-L
CR-R
CAS BUS1
CAS BUS2
CAS BUS3
CAS BUS4
CAS BUS5
CAS BUS6
CAS BUS7
CAS BUS8
CAS AUX1
CAS AUX2
CAS AUX3
CAS AUX4
CAS AUX5
CAS AUX6
CAS AUX7
InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Surr Monitor L
Surr Monitor R
Surr Monitor Ls
Surr Monitor Rs
Surr Monitor C
Surr Monitor SW
Surr Monitor Ls2
Surr Monitor Rs2
Control Room L
Control Room R
Cascade Out Bus1
Cascade Out Bus2
Cascade Out Bus3
Cascade Out Bus4
Cascade Out Bus5
Cascade Out Bus6
Cascade Out Bus7
Cascade Out Bus8
Cascade Out Aux1
Cascade Out Aux2
Cascade Out Aux3
Cascade Out Aux4
Cascade Out Aux5
Cascade Out Aux6
Cascade Out Aux7
INSERT IN
Source
FX1-2
FX1-3
FX1-4
FX1-5
FX1-6
FX1-7
FX1-8
FX2-1
FX2-2
FX3-1
FX3-2
FX4-1
FX4-2
2TD1L
2TD1R
2TD2L
2TD2R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Effect1 OUT 2
Effect1 OUT 3
Effect1 OUT 4
Effect1 OUT 5
Effect1 OUT 6
Effect1 OUT 7
Effect1 OUT 8
Effect2 OUT 1
Effect2 OUT 2
Effect3 OUT 1
Effect3 OUT 2
Effect4 OUT 1
Effect4 OUT 2
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TR IN Dig.2 R
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DIRECT OUT
283
2TR OUT Digital
Source
Description
Source
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
INSCH36
INSCH37
INSCH38
INSCH39
INSCH40
INSCH41
INSCH42
INSCH43
INSCH44
INSCH45
INSCH46
INSCH47
INSCH48
INSBUS1
INSBUS2
INSBUS3
INSBUS4
INSBUS5
INSBUS6
INSBUS7
INSBUS8
INSAUX1
INSAUX2
INSAUX3
INSAUX4
INSAUX5
INSAUX6
INSAUX7
INSAUX8
INSSTL
INSSTR
CR-L
CR-R
CAS BUS1
CAS BUS2
CAS BUS3
CAS BUS4
CAS BUS5
CAS BUS6
CAS BUS7
CAS BUS8
CAS AUX1
CAS AUX2
CAS AUX3
CAS AUX4
CAS AUX5
CAS AUX6
CAS AUX7
CAS AUX8
CAS ST_L
CAS ST_R
CAS SO_L
CAS SO_R
SOLO L
SOLO R
—
InsertOut-CH36
InsertOut-CH37
InsertOut-CH38
InsertOut-CH39
InsertOut-CH40
InsertOut-CH41
InsertOut-CH42
InsertOut-CH43
InsertOut-CH44
InsertOut-CH45
InsertOut-CH46
InsertOut-CH47
InsertOut-CH48
InsertOut-BUS1
InsertOut-BUS2
InsertOut-BUS3
InsertOut-BUS4
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
InsertOut-BUS7
InsertOut-BUS8
InsertOut-AUX1
InsertOut-AUX2
InsertOut-AUX3
InsertOut-AUX4
InsertOut-AUX5
InsertOut-AUX6
InsertOut-AUX7
InsertOut-AUX8
InsertOut-STL
InsertOut-STR
Control Room L
Control Room R
Cascade Out Bus1
Cascade Out Bus2
Cascade Out Bus3
Cascade Out Bus4
Cascade Out Bus5
Cascade Out Bus6
Cascade Out Bus7
Cascade Out Bus8
Cascade Out Aux1
Cascade Out Aux2
Cascade Out Aux3
Cascade Out Aux4
Cascade Out Aux5
Cascade Out Aux6
Cascade Out Aux7
Cascade Out Aux8
Cascade STEREO_L
Cascade STEREO_R
Cascade SOLO_L
Cascade SOLO_R
SOLO OUT L
SOLO OUT R
—
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
284
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
SLOT, OMNI
INSERT IN
DIRECT OUT
2TR OUT Digital
Source
Description
Source
Description
Source
Description
Source
Description
CAS AUX8
CAS ST_L
CAS ST_R
CAS SO_L
CAS SO_R
SOLO L
SOLO R
Moni L
Moni R
Moni Ls
Moni Rs
Moni C
Moni Bs
Moni LFE
Cascade Out Aux8
Cascade STEREO_L
Cascade STEREO_R
Cascade SOLO_L
Cascade SOLO_R
SOLO OUT L
SOLO OUT R
Moni Matrix L
Moni Matrix R
Moni Matrix Ls
Moni Matrix Rs
Moni Matrix C
Moni Matrix Bs
Moni Matrix LFE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial Output Patch Settings
SLOT
OMNI OUT
SLOT1-1
BUS1
1
AUX1
SLOT1-2
BUS2
2
AUX2
SLOT1-3
BUS3
3
AUX3
SLOT1-4
BUS4
4
AUX4
SLOT1-5
BUS5
5
AUX5
SLOT1-6
BUS6
6
AUX6
SLOT1-7
BUS7
7
AUX7
SLOT1-8
BUS8
8
AUX8
SLOT1-9
BUS1
9
ST L
SLOT1-10
BUS2
10
ST R
SLOT1-11
BUS3
11
C-R L
SLOT1-12
BUS4
12
C-R R
SLOT1-13
BUS5
SLOT1-14
BUS6
SLOT1-15
BUS7
SLOT1-16
BUS8
SLOT2-1
BUS1
SLOT2-2
BUS2
SLOT2-3
BUS3
SLOT2-4
BUS4
SLOT2-5
BUS5
SLOT2-6
BUS6
SLOT2-7
BUS7
SLOT2-8
BUS8
SLOT2-9
BUS1
SLOT2-10
BUS2
SLOT2-11
BUS3
SLOT2-12
BUS4
SLOT2-13
BUS5
SLOT2-14
BUS6
SLOT2-15
BUS7
SLOT2-16
BUS8
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
285
Initial Output Patch Settings
DIRECT OUT
2TR OUT Digital
1
SLOT1-1
1L
ST L
2
SLOT1-2
1R
ST R
3
SLOT1-3
2L
ST L
4
SLOT1-4
2R
ST R
5
SLOT1-5
6
SLOT1-6
7
SLOT1-7
8
SLOT1-8
9
SLOT2-1
10
11
12
13
14
SLOT2-2
SLOT2-3
SLOT2-4
SLOT2-5
SLOT2-6
15
SLOT2-7
16
SLOT2-8
17
NONE
18
NONE
19
20
21
22
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
23
NONE
24
NONE
25
NONE
26
NONE
27
NONE
28
NONE
29
NONE
30
NONE
31
NONE
32
NONE
33
NONE
34
NONE
35
NONE
36
NONE
37
NONE
38
NONE
39
NONE
40
NONE
41
NONE
42
NONE
43
NONE
44
NONE
45
NONE
46
NONE
47
NONE
48
CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID
SHORT
LONG
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
AUX2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AUX4
AUX4
AUX4
AUX4
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AUX6
AUX6
AUX6
AUX6
AUX7
AUX7
AUX7
AUX7
AUX8
AUX8
AUX8
AUX8
BUS1
BUS1
BUS1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS2
BUS2
BUS2
BUS3
BUS3
BUS3
BUS3
BUS4
BUS4
BUS4
BUS4
BUS5
BUS5
BUS5
BUS5
BUS6
BUS6
BUS6
BUS6
BUS7
BUS7
BUS7
BUS7
BUS8
BUS8
BUS8
BUS8
STEREO
ST
ST
STEREO
NONE
ST IN has no DIRECT OUT
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
286
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
GPI Trigger Source List
#
Source
#
Source
#
Source
#
Source
0
NO ASSIGN
53
CH53 FADER ON
106 CH33 FADER OFF
159 UDEF13 LATCH
1
CH1 FADER ON
54
CH54 FADER ON
107 CH34 FADER OFF
160 UDEF14 LATCH
2
CH2 FADER ON
55
CH55 FADER ON
108 CH35 FADER OFF
161 UDEF15 LATCH
3
CH3 FADER ON
56
CH56 FADER ON
109 CH36 FADER OFF
162 UDEF16 LATCH
4
CH4 FADER ON
57
BUS1 FADER ON
110 CH37 FADER OFF
163 UDEF1 UNLATCH
5
CH5 FADER ON
58
BUS2 FADER ON
111 CH38 FADER OFF
164 UDEF2 UNLATCH
6
CH6 FADER ON
59
BUS3 FADER ON
112 CH39 FADER OFF
165 UDEF3 UNLATCH
7
CH7 FADER ON
60
BUS4 FADER ON
113 CH40 FADER OFF
166 UDEF4 UNLATCH
8
CH8 FADER ON
61
BUS5 FADER ON
114 CH41 FADER OFF
167 UDEF5 UNLATCH
9
CH9 FADER ON
62
BUS6 FADER ON
115 CH42 FADER OFF
168 UDEF6 UNLATCH
10
CH10 FADER ON
63
BUS7 FADER ON
116 CH43 FADER OFF
169 UDEF7 UNLATCH
11
CH11 FADER ON
64
BUS8 FADER ON
117 CH44 FADER OFF
170 UDEF8 UNLATCH
12
CH12 FADER ON
65
AUX1 FADER ON
118 CH45 FADER OFF
171 UDEF9 UNLATCH
13
CH13 FADER ON
66
AUX2 FADER ON
119 CH46 FADER OFF
172 UDEF10 UNLATCH
14
CH14 FADER ON
67
AUX3 FADER ON
120 CH47 FADER OFF
173 UDEF11 UNLATCH
15
CH15 FADER ON
68
AUX4 FADER ON
121 CH48 FADER OFF
174 UDEF12 UNLATCH
16
CH16 FADER ON
69
AUX5 FADER ON
122 CH49 FADER OFF
175 UDEF13 UNLATCH
17
CH17 FADER ON
70
AUX6 FADER ON
123 CH50 FADER OFF
176 UDEF14 UNLATCH
18
CH18 FADER ON
71
AUX7 FADER ON
124 CH51 FADER OFF
177 UDEF15 UNLATCH
19
CH19 FADER ON
72
AUX8 FADER ON
125 CH52 FADER OFF
178 UDEF16 UNLATCH
20
CH20 FADER ON
73
STEREO FADER ON
126 CH53 FADER OFF
179 REC LAMP
21
CH21 FADER ON
74
CH1 FADER OFF
127 CH54 FADER OFF
180 POWER ON
22
CH22 FADER ON
75
CH2 FADER OFF
128 CH55 FADER OFF
23
CH23 FADER ON
76
CH3 FADER OFF
129 CH56 FADER OFF
24
CH24 FADER ON
77
CH4 FADER OFF
130 BUS1 FADER OFF
25
CH25 FADER ON
78
CH5 FADER OFF
131 BUS2 FADER OFF
26
CH26 FADER ON
79
CH6 FADER OFF
132 BUS3 FADER OFF
27
CH27 FADER ON
80
CH7 FADER OFF
133 BUS4 FADER OFF
28
CH28 FADER ON
81
CH8 FADER OFF
134 BUS5 FADER OFF
29
CH29 FADER ON
82
CH9 FADER OFF
135 BUS6 FADER OFF
30
CH30 FADER ON
83
CH10 FADER OFF
136 BUS7 FADER OFF
31
CH31 FADER ON
84
CH11 FADER OFF
137 BUS8 FADER OFF
32
CH32 FADER ON
85
CH12 FADER OFF
138 AUX1 FADER OFF
33
CH33 FADER ON
86
CH13 FADER OFF
139 AUX2 FADER OFF
34
CH34 FADER ON
87
CH14 FADER OFF
140 AUX3 FADER OFF
35
CH35 FADER ON
88
CH15 FADER OFF
141 AUX4 FADER OFF
36
CH36 FADER ON
89
CH16 FADER OFF
142 AUX5 FADER OFF
37
CH37 FADER ON
90
CH17 FADER OFF
143 AUX6 FADER OFF
38
CH38 FADER ON
91
CH18 FADER OFF
144 AUX7 FADER OFF
39
CH39 FADER ON
92
CH19 FADER OFF
145 AUX8 FADER OFF
40
CH40 FADER ON
93
CH20 FADER OFF
146 STEREO FADER OFF
41
CH41 FADER ON
94
CH21 FADER OFF
147 UDEF1 LATCH
42
CH42 FADER ON
95
CH22 FADER OFF
148 UDEF2 LATCH
43
CH43 FADER ON
96
CH23 FADER OFF
149 UDEF3 LATCH
44
CH44 FADER ON
97
CH24 FADER OFF
150 UDEF4 LATCH
45
CH45 FADER ON
98
CH25 FADER OFF
151 UDEF5 LATCH
46
CH46 FADER ON
99
CH26 FADER OFF
152 UDEF6 LATCH
47
CH47 FADER ON
100 CH27 FADER OFF
153 UDEF7 LATCH
48
CH48 FADER ON
101 CH28 FADER OFF
154 UDEF8 LATCH
49
CH49 FADER ON
102 CH29 FADER OFF
155 UDEF9 LATCH
50
CH50 FADER ON
103 CH30 FADER OFF
156 UDEF10 LATCH
51
CH51 FADER ON
104 CH31 FADER OFF
157 UDEF11 LATCH
52
CH52 FADER ON
105 CH32 FADER OFF
158 UDEF12 LATCH
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
287
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)
ID
Name
Short
Long
Controller
ON
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN ENCODER
FADER
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B0
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B0
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B1
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B1
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B3
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B3
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B4
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B4
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B6
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B6
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B7
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B7
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B8
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B8
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B9
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B9
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BA
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BA
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BB
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BB
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BC
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BC
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BD
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BD
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BE
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BE
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BF
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BF
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
288
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)
ID
Name
Short
Long
Controller
ON
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
ON
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER
FADER
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B0
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B0
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B1
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B1
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
FAD END
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B3
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B3
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B4
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B4
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B5
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B6
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B6
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B7
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B7
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B8
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B8
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B9
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B9
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BA
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BA
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BB
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BB
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BC
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BC
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BD
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BD
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BE
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BE
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BF
0C ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
BF
07
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FAD END
289
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)
ID
Name
Short
Long
Controller
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
00
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
00
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM01 XG01
XG-CH01 VOL&PAN
ON
RM02 XG02
XG-CH02 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
01
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
01
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM03 XG03
XG-CH03 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
02
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
02
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM04 XG04
XG-CH04 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
03
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
03
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM05 XG05
XG-CH05 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
04
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
04
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM06 XG06
XG-CH06 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
05
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
05
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM07 XG07
XG-CH07 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
06
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
06
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM08 XG08
XG-CH08 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
07
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
07
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM09 XG09
XG-CH09 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
08
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
08
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM10 XG10
XG-CH10 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
09
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
09
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM11 XG11
XG-CH11 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0A
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0A
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM12 XG12
XG-CH12 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0B
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0B
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM13 XG13
XG-CH13 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0C
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0C
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM14 XG14
XG-CH14 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0D
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0D
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM15 XG15
XG-CH15 VOL&PAN
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0E
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0E
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
RM16 XG16
XG-CH16 VOL&PAN
Data Format
1
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0F
0E
ENC
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
0F
0B
FAD
F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
290
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)
ID
Name
Short
RM01 CH1
RM02 CH2
RM03 CH3
RM04 CH4
RM05 CH5
RM06 CH6
RM07 CH7
RM08 CH8
RM09 CH9
RM10 CH10
RM11 CH11
RM12 CH12
RM13 CH13
RM14 CH14
RM15 CH15
RM16 CH16
Long
VST MIXER CH1
VST MIXER CH2
VST MIXER CH3
VST MIXER CH4
VST MIXER CH5
VST MIXER CH6
VST MIXER CH7
VST MIXER CH8
VST MIXER CH9
VST MIXER CH10
VST MIXER CH11
VST MIXER CH12
VST MIXER CH13
VST MIXER CH14
VST MIXER CH15
VST MIXER CH16
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Controller
Data Format
1
2
ON
B0
40
ENCODER
B0
FADER
B0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B1
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B1
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B1
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B2
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B2
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B2
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B3
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B3
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B3
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B4
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B4
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B4
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B5
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B5
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B5
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B6
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B6
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B6
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B7
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B7
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B7
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B8
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B8
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B8
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B9
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
B9
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B9
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BA
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BA
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BA
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BB
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BB
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BB
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BC
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BC
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BC
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BD
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BD
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BD
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BE
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BE
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BE
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BF
40
SW END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ENCODER
BF
0A
ENC END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BF
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Effects Parameters
291
Effects Parameters
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
1
Gate open time
DECAY
2
Gate closing speed
1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz),
0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
292
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE
Type-A, Type-B
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MONO DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Max. value depends on tempo
setting)
STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Range
Parameter
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
293
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
1.
(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)
2.
DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Range
Parameter
Description
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE C
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
294
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
L->R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
R->L FBG
–99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FBL
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY L
NOTE FBR
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY R
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
295
FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
296
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left and right modulation phase balance
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
AUTO PAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
Description
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
297
TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
298
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #1 pitch shift
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #2 pitch shift
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values
for reverse phase)
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1
delay
NOTE 2
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2
delay
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
ROTATE
STOP, START
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Rotation stop, start
Effects Parameters
299
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OSC, SELF
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE FM
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
1.
MOD. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation
phase difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
1.
DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
300
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
AMP TYPE
1
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
BASS
0–100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
0–100
Middle tone control
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F
100–8.00 kHz
Parametric equalizer frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
Parametric equalizer bandwidth
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Filter frequency change decay speed
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output Level
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
301
DYNA. FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
DYNA. PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
302
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused
reverb, 100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
303
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all
flange)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
304
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/SYM
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all
symphonic)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic
reverb, 100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
305
REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% =
all early reflections)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
306
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early
reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
307
DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel
DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb,
100% = all delay)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
308
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the
tempo setting)
2.
MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE 1
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
TYPE 2
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
TYPE 3
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
LEVEL 3
0–100
Filter 3 level
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
RESO. 3
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
309
FREEZE
One input, one output basic sampler.
Parameter
Range
Description
REC MODE
MANUAL, INPUT
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC
and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is
engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is
triggered by the input signal.
REC DLY
–1000 to +1000 ms
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the
trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before
the trigger is received.
TRG LVL
–60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger
recording or playback)
TRG MASK
0–1000 ms
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are
ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.
PLY MODE
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the
PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues
once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of
times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
START
1
Playback start point in milliseconds
END
1
Playback end point in milliseconds
LOOP
1
Loop start point in milliseconds
LOOP NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample plays
START
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Loop start point in samples
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Playback pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
MIDI TRG
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off
messages.
1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz),
0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)
ST REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
310
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
REVERB 5.1
One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DIV.
0–100%
Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to
the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s fed
only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center).
When set to 50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100%, it’s fed to only the Center
channel (i.e., Real Center).
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Size of simulated room’s reverb
POS L/R
L63–R63
Left/right listening position
POS F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear listening position
POS CTRL
OFF, NOR, INV
1
ER L/R
L63–R63
Left/right early reflections position
ER F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear early reflections position
ER LVL
0–100%
Early reflections level
ER CTRL
OFF, NOR, INV
1
REV L/R
L63–R63
Left/right reverb position
REV F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear reverb position
REV LVL
0–100%
Reverb level
REV CTRL
OFF, NOR, INV
1
POS RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track at the listening position
ER RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track for early reflections
REV RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track for reverb
1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL
PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inversely.
When set to OFF, Joystick control is off.
OCTA REVERB
Eight input, eight output reverb.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
311
AUTO PAN 5.1
Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OFF, HOLD, INPUT1,
INPUT2, INPUT3,
INPUT4, INPUT5,
INPUT6, MIDI
Source specifies the trigger that will initiate auto pan. When
you press the TRIGGER button in the screen, auto pan will
begin regardless of the setting of this parameter.
OFF: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be off.
HOLD: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be on.
INPUT 1-6: The input signal to effect inputs 1-6 will be the
trigger.
MIDI: MIDI note-on messages will be the trigger.
TRG LVL
–60 to 0 dB
If SOURCE is set to INPUT, any signal with a level greater
than the setting of this parameter will be detected as a trigger.
TRG MASK
0–1000 ms
Trigger Mask specifies the time from when a trigger is
received until the next trigger will be accepted.
TIME
0.1 s–10.0 s
The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered
SPEED
0.05–40.00 Hz
Autopan speed
DIR.
Turn L, Turn R
Autopan direction
OFFSET
–180 to +180 degrees
Pan offset
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
• When you press the RESET button, the phase will be initialized to the setting of the OFFSET parameter.
CHORUS 5.1
Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
312
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
FLANGE 5.1
Six input, six output flanger for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
SYMPHO. 5.1
Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
313
M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction
metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.
CMP. THRE
24.0 to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
CMP. RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor ratio
CMP. ATK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
CMP. REL
1
Compressor release time
CMP. KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
CMP. BYP
OFF, ON
Compressor bypass
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 to –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
EXP. THRE
–54.0 to –24.0 dB
Expander threshold
EXP. RAT
1:1 to ∞:1
Expander ratio
EXP. REL
1
Expander release time
EXP. BYP
OFF, ON
Expander bypass
LIM. THRE
–12.0 to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
LIM. ATK
0–120 ms
Limiter attack
LIM. REL
1
Limiter release time
LIM. BYP
OFF, ON
Limiter bypass
LIM. KNEE
0–5
Limiter knee
SOLO LOW
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.
SOLO MID
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.
SOLO HIGH
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
314
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
COMP 5.1
Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and
gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),
center (C), or LFE channels.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.
THRE.
–24.0 to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
RATIO
1:1 to ∞:1
Compressor ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
RELEASE
1
Compressor release time
KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
KEY LINK
2
Key-in linking
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 to –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
SOLO LOW
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.
SOLO MID
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.
SOLO HIGH
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked
5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)
3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent)
2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
315
COMPAND 5.1
Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and
gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),
center (C), or LFE channels.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered
and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative
values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands
are affected the same.
THRE.
–24.0 to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
RATIO
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Attack time
RELEASE
1
Release time
WIDTH
1–90 dB
Compressor effect range and expander effect width
TYPE
Soft, Hard
Compander type
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
KEY LINK
2
Key-in linking
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 to –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
SOLO LOW
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.
SOLO MID
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.
SOLO HIGH
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.
1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s
(fs=96 kHz)
2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked
5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)
3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent)
2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
316
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Preset EQ Parameters
#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Parameter
Title
Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum 2
Snare Drum 1
Snare Drum 2
Tom-tom 1
Cymbal
High Hat
Percussion
E. Bass 1
E. Bass 2
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
1.2
10
0.9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.4
4.5
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
F
132 Hz
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
Q
1.2
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
10
0.7
0.1
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
Q
1.4
10
1.2
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
106 Hz
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
Q
—
8
0.9
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
0.5
1
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
5
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.5 dB
+0.5 dB
F
112 Hz
112 Hz
2.24 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
0.1
5
6.3
—
317
Preset EQ Parameters
#
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Parameter
Title
Syn. Bass 1
Syn. Bass 2
Piano 1
Piano 2
E. G. Clean
E. G. Crunch 1
E. G. Crunch 2
E. G. Dist. 1
E. G. Dist. 2
A. G. Stroke 1
A. G. Stroke 2
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
0.1
8
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.6
8
2.2
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–6.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
8
0.9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
5.6
10
0.7
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
0.18
10
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
140 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
8
4.5
0.63
9
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
Q
8
0.4
0.16
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+5.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
355 Hz
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
—
9
10
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+6.0 dB
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
—
10
4
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
0.9
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
Q
—
9
4.5
—
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
318
#
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Parameter
Title
A. G. Arpeg. 1
A. G. Arpeg. 2
Brass Sec.
Male Vocal 1
Male Vocal 2
Female Vo. 1
Female Vo. 2
Chorus & Harmo
Total EQ 1
Total EQ 2
Total EQ 3
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
—
4.5
4.5
0.12
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
Q
—
7
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
2.8
2
0.7
7
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
F
190 Hz
1.00 kHz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
0.11
10
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
Q
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
—
0.16
0.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
2.8
2
0.7
7
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
Q
7
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
95 Hz
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
18.0 kHz
Q
7
2.8
5.6
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+1.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
67 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
Q
—
0.28
0.7
—
319
Preset EQ Parameters
#
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Parameter
Title
Bass Drum 3
Snare Drum 3
Tom-tom 2
Piano 3
Piano Low
Piano High
Fine-EQ Cass
Narrator
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
Q
2
10
0.4
0.4
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
4.5
2.8
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.5 dB
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
8
10
9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
10
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
10
6.3
2.2
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.8
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4
7
0.63
—
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
320
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Preset Gate Parameters
#
1
Title
Gate
2
3
GATE
A. Dr. SN
Parameter
–26
Range (dB)
–56
2.56
Decay (ms)
331
Threshold (dB)
–19
Range (dB)
–22
Attack (ms)
1
Title
Comp
1.20 S
Decay (ms)
6.32 S
Threshold (dB)
–11
Range (dB)
–53
1.93
Decay (ms)
400
Threshold (dB)
–8
Range (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
1
Hold (ms)
0.63
Decay (ms)
238
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
Type
COMP
3
Expand
Compander (H)
EXPAND
COMPAND-H
Parameter
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
60
Out gain (dB)
0.0
250
Threshold (dB)
–23
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
1
Out gain (dB)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
3.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
70
Threshold (dB)
–10
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Threshold (dB)
COMPAND-S
2
Release (ms)
Release (ms)
Compander (S)
Value
Threshold (dB)
Width (dB)
4
0
Hold (ms)
Knee
2
93
Hold (ms)
Preset Compressor Parameters
#
0
Hold (ms)
Attack (ms)
GATE
Value
Threshold (dB)
Attack (ms)
DUCKING
A. Dr. BD
4
Type
GATE
Ducking
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
1
0.0
6
250
–8
Ratio ( :1)
4
Attack (ms)
25
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
24
Release (ms)
180
321
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
5
6
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
COMP
COMPAND-H
A. Dr. SN
COMP
3
Attack (ms)
9
Out gain (dB)
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
2
Release (ms)
58
Threshold (dB)
–11
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB)
–17
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
2
Release (ms)
12
Threshold (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPAND-S
E. B. Finger
COMP
0
0.5
2
151
–8
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
10
Release (ms)
128
Threshold (dB)
–20
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
2
2
5.0
2
Release (ms)
749
Threshold (dB)
–24
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
38
Out gain (dB)
–3.5
Width (dB)
54
Release (ms)
842
Threshold (dB)
–12
Ratio ( :1)
12
2
Threshold (dB)
Knee
11
8
3.5
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
10
7
192
Release (ms)
A. Dr. SN
1
–1.5
Release (ms)
Knee
9
5.5
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
8
–24
Ratio ( :1)
Width (dB)
7
Value
2
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
4.5
Knee
Release (ms)
2
470
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
322
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
#
13
14
15
16
Title
E. B. Slap
Syn. Bass
Piano1
Piano2
Type
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
–12
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
4.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
133
Threshold (dB)
–10
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
COMP
3.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
250
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
17
Out gain (dB)
1.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
A. Guitar
COMP
Strings1
COMP
–8
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Strings2
COMP
4
261
Threshold (dB)
–10
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
5
1.5
2
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–11
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
33
Out gain (dB)
1.5
2
Release (ms)
749
Threshold (dB)
–12
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
93
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
Release (ms)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
7
2.5
Release (ms)
Knee
20
2
174
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
19
7
6.0
Threshold (dB)
Knee
18
9
Out gain (dB)
Release (ms)
E. Guitar
6
Out gain (dB)
Knee
17
Value
4
1.35 S
323
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
21
Title
Strings3
Type
COMP
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
–17
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
76
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
22
BrassSection
COMP
Syn. Pad
COMP
186
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
18
Out gain (dB)
4.0
25
SamplingPerc
Sampling BD
COMPAND-S
COMP
226
Threshold (dB)
–13
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
58
Out gain (dB)
2.0
27
28
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
COMP
COMPAND-S
COMP
1
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
8
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB)
–14
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
2
Out gain (dB)
3.5
Knee
4
Release (ms)
35
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
26
1
Release (ms)
Knee
24
2
Release (ms)
Knee
23
Value
Attack (ms)
4
8
Out gain (dB)
8.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
354
Threshold (dB)
–23
Ratio ( :1)
20
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
15
Release (ms)
163
Threshold (dB)
–20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
31
Out gain (dB)
2.0
Knee
Release (ms)
1
342
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
324
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
#
29
Title
Solo Vocal2
Type
COMP
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
26
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
Release (ms)
30
Chorus
COMP
Click Erase
EXPAND
–9
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
39
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Announcer
COMPAND-H
226
Threshold (dB)
–33
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
1
Out gain (dB)
Limiter1
COMPAND-S
Threshold (dB)
–14
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
35
Total Comp1
COMP
COMP
18
Release (ms)
180
Total Comp2
COMP
3
Attack (ms)
20
Out gain (dB)
–3.0
90
3.90 s
Threshold (dB)
0
Ratio ( :1)
∞
Attack (ms)
0
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
319
Threshold (dB)
–18
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
94
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
447
Threshold (dB)
–16
6
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
6.0
Knee
Release (ms)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
–9
Ratio ( :1)
Ratio ( :1)
36
1
–2.5
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Limiter2
2
284
Width (dB)
34
2.0
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
33
2
Release (ms)
Knee
32
3
331
Threshold (dB)
Knee
31
Value
1
180
General Spec
325
Appendix B: Specifications
General Spec
Number of scene memories
99
Internal
Sampling Frequency
Signal Delay
External
Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6%
Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT
fs=96 kHz
Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT
100 mm motorized with touch sense × 17
+10 to –138, –∞ dB input faders
Fader Resolution
Frequency Response
(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)
Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6%
fs=48 kHz
Fader
Total Harmonic Distortion1
(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)
(Input Gain=Min.)
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz
0 to –138, –∞ dB master faders, stereo fader
fs=48 kHz
Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω
fs=96 kHz
Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω
fs=48 kHz
20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω
fs=96 kHz
20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω
110 dB typ. DA Converter (OMNI OUT)
Dynamic Range
(maximum level to noise level)
106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=48 kHz
106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=96 kHz
–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise
–86 dB residual output noise. OMNI OUT (STEREO OUT off)
Hum & Noise2
(20 Hz–20 kHz)
Rs=150 Ω
Input Gain=Max. –86 dB (90 dB S/N) OMNI OUT
Input Pad =0 dB (STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)
Input Pad =0 dB
Input Sensitivity
=–60 dB
–64 dB (68 dB S/N) OMNI OUT
(STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)
Maximum Voltage Gain
74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–16) to OMNI OUT (STEREO, BUS, AUX)
Crosstalk
(@ 1 kHz)
80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–16)
80 dB input to output
Input Gain=Min.
Phantom switch
+48 V DC
Pad switch
0/20 dB attenuation
Gain control
44 dB (–60 to –16), detented
Peak indicator
LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at digital domain
Signal indicator
LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at
digital domain
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)
Analog Input
(OMNI IN 1–4)
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)
Option Input (SLOT 1–2)
Available cards
Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
Digital Input
(2TR IN DIGITAL 1–2)
SRC
On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)
AD Input (1–16)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
326
Appendix B: Specifications
Input patch
—
Phase
Normal/reverse
Gate-type3
On/off
Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48)/AUX1–8
On/off
Comp-type4
Key in: self /Stereo Link
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
Attenuator
EQ
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ (TYPE1)5
On/off
Input Channel CH1–48
Delay
0–43400 samples
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8)
Aux send
Solo
OSCILLATOR
Pre fader/after pan
Surround pan
127 × 127 positions
[(Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)] x [(Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63)]
LFE level
–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)
Routing
STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT
Direct out
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off
Level control
Analog rotary potentiometer
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)
Talkback select
Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–16/OMNI IN 1–4
On/off
—
Level
0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)
On/off
—
Waveform
Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, 400 Hz/1 kHz, pink noise, burst noise
Routing
BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L, R
Output patch
STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,
DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH1–48, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO),
MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8,
STEREO, SOLO)
DA converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)
Dither
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–2
On/off
Word length 16, 20, 24-bit
Output patch
STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT
OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT
(BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO)
Available card
Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
Output patch
STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,
DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO),
MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8,
STEREO, SOLO)
Dither
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
On/off
127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)
OMNI OUT 1–12
Option Output (SLOT 1–2)
AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader
Pan
Metering
TALKBACK
On/off
On/off
Word length 16/20/24-bit
General Spec
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
327
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
STEREO
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Balance
127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)
Delay
0–29100 samples
Displayed on LCD
Metering
Peak hold on/off
32-elements x2 LED meters
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
BUS1–8
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Delay
0–29100 samples
Level (–∞, –138 dB to 0 dB)
Bus to stereo
On/off
Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)
Metering
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
AUX1–8
INTERNAL EFFECTS
(EFFECT 1–4)
Peak hold on/off
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Delay
0–29100 samples
Metering
SURROUND MONITOR
Displayed on LCD
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off
Mute
On/off
Solo
On/off
Source
BUS1–8, SLOT 1–2
Monitor to C-R
On/off
Oscillator
Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz
Monitor matrix
6.1→6.1, 6.1→5.1, 6.1→3-1, 6.1→ST, 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST,
3-1→3-1, 3-1→ST
Bass
management
5 presets
Monitor
alignment
ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec 0.02 msec step)
Bypass
On/off
In/out
Effect-in from
8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1): depends on effects type
2-in, 2-out (EFFECT2–4): depends on effects type
AUX1–8/INSERT OUT/effect-out (out 1, 2 only)
Effect-out 1, 2 to Input patch/effect-in
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
328
Appendix B: Specifications
Power Requirements
Dimensions
U.S./Canada
120 V, 60 Hz 135 W
Other
220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 135 W
(H x D x W)
200 x 585 x 436 mm (7.8" x 23.0" x 17.1")
With MB1000 and SP1000 installed: 295 x 635 x 486 mm (11.6" x 25.0" x
19.1")
Net weight
20 kg (75 lbs)
Operating free-air temperature range
10–35°C (50–95°F)
Storage temperature range
–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)
Supplied Accessories
AC Cable, CD-ROM (Studio Manager), Owner’s Manual, Studio Manager
Installation Guide
Options
Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB1000
SIDE PANEL: SP1000
RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1
1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.
2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave
attenuation.
3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 328.
4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 329.
5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 328.
EQ Parameters
LOW/HPF
L-MID
H-MID
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
low shelving
HPF
Q
F
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
Gate Parameters
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Range
–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz
Hold
0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Decay
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Range
–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz
Ducking
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
high shelving
LPF
21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step)
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
HPF: on/off
G
Gate
HIGH /LPF
Hold
0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Decay
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
LPF: on/off
General Spec
329
Comp Parameters
Compressor
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Out gain
0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)
Knee
Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Threshold
Expander
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Out gain
0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)
Knee
Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Compander H
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)
Out gain
–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Width
1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Compander S
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)
Out gain
–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Width
1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
330
Appendix B: Specifications
Libraries
Effect library (EFFECT 1–4)
Compressor library
Gate library
EQ library
Channel library
Surround Monitor library
Input patch library
Output patch library
Bus to Stereo library
Presets
52 (EFFECT 2–4: 44)
User memories
76
Presets
36
User memories
92
Presets
4
User memories
124
Presets
40
User memories
160
Presets
2
User memories
127
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Analog Input Spec
Input
PAD
GAIN
Actual Load
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
Sensitivity1
–60 dB
0
3k Ω
INPUT 1–16
–16 dB
50–600 Ω
Mics & 600 Ω
Lines
20
OMNI IN 1–4
—
10k Ω
600 Ω Lines
Input level
Nominal
Max.
before clip
–70 dB
(0.245 mV)
–60 dB
(0.775 mV)
–40 dB
(7.75 mV)
–26 dB
(38.8 mV)
–16 dB
(0.123 V)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
–6 dB
(388 mV)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+24 dB
(12.28 V)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+24 dB
(12.28 V)
Connector
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)2
1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit
is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)
2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
All input AD converters (INPUT 1–16, OMNI INPUT 1–4, TALKBACK) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1,
48 kHz)
+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–16) XLR type connectors via individual switches.
Analog Output Spec
Actual
Source
Impedance
For Use With
Nominal
OMNI OUT 1–12
150 Ω
600 Ω Lines
PHONES
100 Ω
Output
Output level
Connector
Nominal
Max.
before clip
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+24 dB
(12.28 V)
8 Ω Phones
4 mW
25 mW
Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)
40 Ω Phones
12 mW
75 mW
(Unbalanced)2
XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)1
1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
All output DA converters (OMINI OUT 1–12, PHONES) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz)
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Digital Input Spec
331
Digital Input Spec
Input
2TR IN DIGITAL
Format
Data length
Level
Connector
1
AES/EBU
24-bit
RS422
2
IEC-60958
24-bit
0.5 Vpp/75 Ω
XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1
Phono
1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
Digital Output Spec
Output
Format
1
2TR OUT DIGITAL
2
AES/EBU1
Professional use
IEC-609584
Consumer use
Data length
24-bit2
24-bit2
Level
RS422
Connector
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)3
0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono
1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1
Type:
linear PCM
Emphasis:
NO
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration
2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit
3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2
Type:
linear PCM
Category code: Digital signal mixer
Copy prohibit: NO
Emphasis:
NO
Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
332
Appendix B: Specifications
I/O Slot Spec (1–2)
Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. SLOT #1 has a serial interface.
Maker
Model
Function
INPUT
OUTPUT
1
Format
Resolution
Frequency
The
number of
Available
cards
Note
MY8-AT
Digital I/O
8
8
ADAT
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode
MY16-AT
Digital I/O
16
16
ADAT
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode
MY8-TD
Digital I/O
8
8
TASCAM
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode
MY8-AE
Digital I/O
8
8
AES/EBU
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
Can handle
24 bit/96 kHz by
double channel mode
MY8-AE96S Digital I/O
8
8
AES/EBU
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
2
Sampling Rate Converter for input
Yamaha
Waves
Apogee
MY8-AE96
Digital I/O
8
8
AES/EBU
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
2
MY4-AD
ANALOG IN
4
—
—
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
MY8-AD
ANALOG IN
8
—
—
20 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
MY8-AD24
ANALOG IN
8
—
—
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
MY8-AD96
ANALOG IN
8
—
—
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
2
MY4-DA
ANALOG OUT
—
4
—
20 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
MY8-DA96
ANALOG OUT
2
—
8
—
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
MY8-mLAN mLAN Interface
8
8
IEEE1394
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
2
Y56K
Effect & I/O
8
8
ADAT
24 bit
44.1/48 kHz
1
AP8AD
ANALOG IN
8
—
—
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
2
4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz
AP8DA
ANALOG OUT
—
8
—
24 bit
44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
2
4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz
Maximum 5 nodes
1. Selectable from STEREO/BUS/AUX/DIRECT/EXT INSERT/SURROUND MONITOR/CR MONITOR.
Details depend on each interface card.
Control I/O Spec
I/O Port
TO HOST USB
IN1
MIDI
OUT
Level
USB
0 V–3.3 V
Connector in Console
MIDI
—
DIN Connector 5P
DIN Connector 5P
B type USB connector
MIDI
—
SMPTE
Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω
IN
—
TTL/75 Ω
BNC Connector
OUT
—
TTL/75 Ω
BNC Connector
TIME CODE INPUT
WORD CLOCK
Format
C-MOS IN, Open collector OUT
1pin: 150 mA, 8pin total: 500 mA
XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)2
CONTROL
—
REMOTE
—
RS422
D-SUB Connector 9P (Male)
METER
—
RS422
D-SUB Connector 15P (Female)
1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC.
2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
D-SUB Connector 25P (Female)
REMOTE Port
333
REMOTE Port
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GND
6
RX+/GND1
2
RX–/RX–1
7
RTS/RX+1
3
TX–/TX+1
8
CTS/TX–1
4
TX+/GND1
9
GND
5
N.C.
1. RS422 (for AD824)/SONY 9 pin protocol (P2)
CONTROL Port
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GPO0
14
GPO1
2
GPO2
15
GPO3
3
GPO4
16
GPO5
4
GPO6
17
GPO7
5
GND
18
GND
6
GND
19
GND
7
GND
20
GND
8
GND
21
+5V
9
+5V
22
GPI0
10
GPI1
23
GPI2
11
GPI3
24
N.C.
12
N.C.
25
N.C.
13
N.C.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
334
Appendix B: Specifications
154
87
355
154
200
112
430(Not included Screw heads)
436(Included Screw heads)
32
Dimensions
156
280
101
374
565
585
Unit: mm
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Dimensions
335
295
486
Dimensions with the MB1000 and SP1000 installed:
635
Unit: mm
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time
without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
European Models
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 28 A
Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
336
Appendix C: MIDI
Appendix C: MIDI
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
1
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
Program
Change#
Initial
Scene #
01
44
44
87
87
2
02
3
03
45
45
88
88
46
46
89
4
89
04
47
47
90
90
5
05
48
48
91
91
6
06
49
49
92
92
7
07
50
50
93
93
8
08
51
51
94
94
9
09
52
52
95
95
10
10
53
53
96
96
11
11
54
54
97
97
12
12
55
55
98
98
13
13
56
56
99
99
14
14
57
57
100
00
15
15
58
58
101
—
16
16
59
59
102
—
17
17
60
60
103
—
18
18
61
61
104
—
19
19
62
62
105
—
20
20
63
63
106
—
21
21
64
64
107
—
22
22
65
65
108
—
23
23
66
66
109
—
24
24
67
67
110
—
25
25
68
68
111
—
26
26
69
69
112
—
27
27
70
70
113
—
28
28
71
71
114
—
29
29
72
72
115
—
30
30
73
73
116
—
31
31
74
74
117
—
32
32
75
75
118
—
33
33
76
76
119
—
34
34
77
77
120
—
35
35
78
78
121
—
36
36
79
79
122
—
37
37
80
80
123
—
38
38
81
81
124
—
39
39
82
82
125
—
40
40
83
83
126
—
41
41
84
84
127
—
42
42
85
85
128
—
43
43
86
86
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
User
Scene #
User
Scene #
User
Scene #
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
337
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
CHANNEL1
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
Low
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
338
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL2
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
Low
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
BUS5
BUS6
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
BUS7
BUS8
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
339
CHANNEL3
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
MASTER
MASTER
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
AUX1
AUX2
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
AUX3
AUX4
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
340
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL4
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
MASTER
MASTER
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
AUX7
AUX8
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
341
CHANNEL5
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
MASTER
MASTER
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
BUS5
BUS6
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
BUS7
BUS8
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
342
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL6
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
ON
ON
Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
MASTER
MASTER
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
AUX5
AUX6
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
AUX7
AUX8
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
343
CHANNEL7
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
344
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL8
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
345
CHANNEL9
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
346
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL10
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
347
CHANNEL11
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
348
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL12
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
349
CHANNEL13
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
350
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL14
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
351
CHANNEL15
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
352
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL16
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
MIDI Data Format
353
MIDI Data Format
1. DATA FORMAT
1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE
1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
Command
8n NOTE OFF
9n NOTE ON
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE
rx/tx
rx
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
Control the internal effects
Control the internal effects
Control parameters
Switch scene memories
rx/tx
rx
rx
function
MTC
Used when TIME REFERENCE is
MIDI CLOCK.
1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
F8 TIMING CLOCK
FA START
FB CONTINUE
FC STOP
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF RESET
rx/tx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
rx
function
MIDI clock
Start automix (from the beginning)
Start automix (from the middle)
Stop automix
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status
1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive
Command
rx/tx
F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC
tx
COMMAND
F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx
F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx
function
MMC command
MMC response
MTC full message
1.4.2 System Exclusive Message
Data name
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
BULK DUMP DATA
rx/tx
BULK DUMP REQUEST
tx/rx
tx/rx
‘S’
‘a’
tx/rx
tx/rx
‘R’
‘O’
‘H’
‘G’
‘Y’
‘Q’
‘E’
‘J’
‘K’
‘P’
‘C’
‘L’
‘V’
‘U’
‘N’
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx/tx
DM1000-specific parameter change
rx/tx
General purpose digital mixer
parameter change
General purpose digital mixer
parameter request
rx/tx
1 (01)
2 (02)
3 (03)
4 (04)
15 (0F)
16 (10)
17 (11)
18 (12)
19 (13)
20 (14)
32 (20)
33 (21)
Type (HEX)
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
tx/rx
function
Edit buffer
Patch data
Setup data
Backup data
Cascade data
Function (recall, store, title, clear)
Function (pair, copy)
Function (effect)
Sort table
Function (attribute, link)
Key remote
Remote meter
34 (22)
35 (23)
80 (50)
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
84 (54)
126 (7E)
127 (7F)
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx
Remote time counter
Automix status
Function response (recall, store,
title, clear)
Function response (attribute, link)
System Attribute
Active sense
* ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the DM1000, and
‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the DM1000.
2. Format Details
function
Scene Memory & Request
(compressed data)
Setup Memory & Request
Automix data & Request
(compressed data)
Input patch library & Request
Output patch library & Request
Channel library & Request
Gate library & Request
Compressor library & Request
Equalizer library & Request
Effect library & Request
Bus to Stereo library & Request
Surround Monitor library & Request
Program change table & Request
Control change table & Request
User define layer & Request
User define key & Request
User assignable layer & Request
Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request
(8n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM1000.
‘m’
function
DM1000-specific parameter change
2.1 NOTE OFF
1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump
Command
F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
DATA
F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
REQUEST
rx/tx
rx/tx
The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM1000.
1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER
FRAME
F2 SONG POSITION POINTER
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 0C … F7 RARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 0C … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)
2.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off)
2.3 CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
Reception
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON,
and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings.
The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON
and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the
four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
354
Appendix C: MIDI
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON.
The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign
Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be
transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h,
26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter
List.
This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since
there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter
Change messages will always be used.)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn
01100010
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
01100011
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00000110
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00100110
0vvvvvvv
Bn
62
vv
Bn
63
vv
Bn
06
vv
Bn
26
vv
Control change
NRPN LSB
LSB of parameter number
NRPN MSB
11111010 FA Start
2.8 CONTINUE
(FB)
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the CONTINUE message.
STATUS
11111011 FB Continue
2.9 STOP
(FC)
11111100 FC Stop
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an
interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such
as by clearing the Running Status.
Control change *1
MSB of data entry
MSB of parameter data
Control change *1
STATUS
LSB of data entry
11111110 FE Active sensing
LSB of parameter data
(Cn)
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene
memory is recalled.
If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the
lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio
Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is
no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will
always be used.)
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
2.5 SONG POSITION POINTER
(F2)
11110010 F2 Song position pointer
0vvvvvvv vv Song position LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Song position MSB
2.6 TIMING CLOCK
(F8)
Reception
If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message is used
to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note.
11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.11 SYSTEM RESET
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by
clearing the Running Status.
STATUS
11111111 FF System reset
2.12 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
2.12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL
(F0)
(MMC)
These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the
DM1000 is operated.
2.12.2 BULK DUMP
This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within
the DM1000.
The basic format is as follows.
For DUMP DATA
F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7
For DUMP REQUEST
F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7
n
cc cc
Reception
If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
STATUS
2.10 ACTIVE SENSING
MSB of parameter number
Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI
OUT.
If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will
be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the
channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according
to the settings of the [Program Change Table].
STATUS
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when the
next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message.
STATUS
Control change *1
2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
STATUS
DATA
(FA)
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop.
*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during
transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present.
STATUS
DATA
2.7 START
4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31
tt
mm mm
cs
Device Number
DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that
follow this, ending before the checksum)
Model ID
DATA TYPE
DATA NUMBER
CHECK SUM
A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a
DM1000.
CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this
sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Reception
This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device
number included in the SUB STATUS.
When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified
memory.
When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted.
MIDI Data Format
Transmission
This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.
A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request.
The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight
words of 7-bit data.
Conversion from actual data into bulk data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
Restoration from bulk data into actual data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
2.12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress)
The DM1000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01101101
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
6D
mh
System exclusive message
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
total block number(minimum number is 0)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
355
0mmmmmmm mh m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
EOX
0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format
Of the setup memory of the DM1000, this bulk-dumps data other than the User
define layer, User define plug-in, User define keys, Control change table, and
Program change table.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
53
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘S’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Setup data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
2.12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘m’
m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
0mmmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192
current block number(0-total block number)
Scene data of block[bb]
DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010011
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
53
02
00
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘S’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
2.12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format
(compress)
2.12.2.5 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that
is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01101101
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
6D
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘m’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
356
Appendix C: MIDI
DATA NAME
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
4C
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
‘L’
2.12.2.8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define layer data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.12.2.6 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4C
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
56
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘V’
b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format
‘’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘L’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
55
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User assignable layer data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
‘9’
‘1’
2.12.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format
‘V’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define key data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
DATA NAME
EOX
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
System exclusive message
‘M’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
EOX
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
56
00
bb
F7
‘L’
2.12.2.7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
55
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
2.12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01000011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
43
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000011
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
43
02
00
F7
‘C’
EOX
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010000
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
50
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010000
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
50
02
00
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘P’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
2.12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format
current block number(0-total block number)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)
Control change table data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘C’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
2.12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
‘1’
2.12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
2.12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘9’
357
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
51
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Q’
0-127(EQ Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
EQ Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
2.12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format
‘L’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘9’
‘1’
‘P’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Program change table data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
51
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Q’
0-127(EQ Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
358
Appendix C: MIDI
2.12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
59
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
00110001
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
DATA NAME
31
47
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
‘1’
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
GATE Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
data count = ch * 128 + cl
2.12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘9’
‘1’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
COMP Library data of block[bb]
DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
47
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format
2.12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UNDO
256-263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (52-127, 256-259,
8192)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
59
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
45
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Effect Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
2.12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format
EOX
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
2.12.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
45
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
48
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
359
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
52
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Input patch Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
2.12.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format
‘L’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Channel Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
52
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
End of exclusive
2.12.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format
2.12.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
48
mh
ml
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4F
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘O’
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
360
Appendix C: MIDI
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
2.12.2.30 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format
256(Current data)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Output patch Library data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.12.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4F
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4A
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘J’
0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.31 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format
‘8’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘O’
0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001011
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4B
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘K’
0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Surround Monitor Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
‘J’
0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Bus to stereo Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
2.12.2.32 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
End of exclusive
DATA NAME
EOX
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
System exclusive message
‘’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
EOX
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4A
mh
ml
F7
‘’
2.12.2.29 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001011
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4B
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘K’
0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
2.12.2.33 Automix bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number.
0:Library no.1 – 15:Library no.16, 256:current automix data
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
DATA NAME 01100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
61
mh
ml
bh
bl
th
tl
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘a’
0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)
current block number(0-total block number)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
DATA NAME
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0000iiii
0000iiii
0000jjjj
0000jjjj
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
61
mh
ml
F7
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘a’
0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)
End of exclusive
2.12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.
0:SLOT 1 – 1:SLOT 2
The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than
the card that is installed in the slot.
The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
DATA NAME
System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
EOX
current block number(0-total block number)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
Developer id (High)
Developer id (Low)
Product id (High)
Product id (Low)
Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110001
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
31
4E
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘1’
‘N’
m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)
End of exclusive
2.12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
2.12.3.1 Basic behavior
Reception
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number
included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter
is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request
is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control
Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.
As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.
2.12.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
data count = ch * 128 + cl
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
tt
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Data type
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See
above)
2.12.2.34 Automix bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘N’
2.12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format
Automix memory data of block[bb]
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
(See above)
4E
mh
ml
bh
bl
th
tl
0i
0i
0j
0j
ds
:
de
ee
F7
361
DATA *)
‘’
‘8’
EOX
‘C’
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.
‘9’
‘1’
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
362
Appendix C: MIDI
2.12.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
tt
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
2.12.3.3 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Data type
EOX
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.
2.12.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
tt
ee
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
tt
ee
DATA
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
EOX
2.12.3.2 Parameter change
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
01
ee
(Edit buffer)
EOX
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
Universal
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Edit Buffer
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
(Patch data)
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000010
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
02
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Patch data
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000010
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
02
ee
(Patch data)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Patch data
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
(Setup memory)
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000011
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
03
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Setup data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Edit Buffer
Universal
2.12.3.6 Parameter change
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
EOX
System exclusive message
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Data type
Consult your dealer for parameter address details.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Universal
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
2.12.3.5 Parameter request
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
2.12.3.1.5 Parameter Address
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DM1000
2.12.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
(Edit buffer)
System exclusive message
2.12.3.4 Parameter change
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
EOX
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
Data type
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
01
ee
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA *)
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
EOX
2.12.3.7 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000011
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
03
ee
(Setup memory)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Setup data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
2.12.3.8 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
(Backup memory)
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000100
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
04
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Backup data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
EOX
2.12.3.9 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00000100
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
04
ee
(Backup memory)
System exclusive message
Backup data
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
(Cascade data)
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
0F
ss
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Cascade data
Set:0, Response:1
2.12.3.11 Parameter request
(Cascade data)
Reception
This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Data received from a port that is assigned to [Cascade Link] and whose Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the [Rx CH] will be received for
processing.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted
as a Parameter response.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00001111
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
0F
ee
EOX
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Cascade data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low
End of exclusive
function
SCENE RECALL
EQ LIB RECALL
GATE LIB RECALL
COMP LIB RECALL
EFF LIB RECALL
CHANNEL LIB RECALL
INPATCH LIB RECALL
OUTPATCH LIB RECALL
Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL
Surround Monitor LIB RECALL
AUTOMIX LIB RECALL
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
number
0-99, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
0-128, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
1-16
channel*1)
256
0-513
0-95
0-513
0-3
0-513
256
256
256
256
256
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
SCENE STORE
EQ LIB STORE
GATE LIB STORE
COMP LIB STORE
EFF LIB STORE
CHANNEL LIB STORE
INPATCH LIB STORE
OUTPATCH LIB STORE
Bus to Stereo LIB STORE
Surround Monitor LIB STORE
AUTOMIX LIB STORE
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
1-99
41-128
5-128
37-128
53-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-16
256, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-47, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-3, 16383
0-513, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item.
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk reception)
(only transmitted by the DM1000)
2.12.3.12.1 Parameter change (Function call response:
Library store/recall)
Transmission
If store/recall is executed by a parameter change received from Studio Manager,
the result of execution is transmitted as the following parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00001111
0sssssss
0eeeeeee
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
Reception
This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Data received from a port that is assigned to [Cascade Link] and whose Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the [Rx CH] will be received for
processing.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
DATA
Transmission
If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for
which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmitted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH].
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
2.12.3.10 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If
this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Response.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
2.12.3.12 Parameter change (Function call: Library store /
recall)
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
DM1000
363
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
DATA
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
50
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call response
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
364
EOX
Appendix C: MIDI
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7
result HH
result HL
result LH
DATA
result LL
End of exclusive
2.12.3.13 Parameter change
(Function call: title)
Reception
When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed.
If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be
executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the
[Tx CH].
When the title is changed on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with
the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
11110111
function
SCENE LIB TITLE
EQ LIB TITLE
GATE LIB TITLE
COMP LIB TITLE
EFF LIB TITLE
CHANNEL LIB TITLE
INPATCH LIB TITLE
OUTPATCH LIB TITLE
Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE
Surround Monitor LIB TITLE
AUTOMIX LIB TITLE
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
dd
:
dd
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title
EOX
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
End of exclusive
number
0-99,256(0:response only)
1-128(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-52:response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
1-16
size
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
(Function call: title)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
6f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
number High
number Low
DATA
End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B
number
1-99
41-128
5-128
37-128
53-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-16
Transmission
When a scene or library is cleared as a result of receiving a parameter change
from Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
title
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
43
1n
3E
7F
50
4f
result HL
2.12.3.17 Parameter change (Function call response:
Scene/Library Clear)
Function call
Transmission
If the title is modified by a parameter change received from Studio Manager, the
result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
0100ffff
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
function
SCENE LIB CLEAR
EQ LIB CLEAR
GATE LIB CLEAR
COMP LIB CLEAR
EFF LIB CLEAR
CHANNEL LIB CLEAR
INPATCH LIB CLEAR
OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR
Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR
Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR
AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR
2.12.3.15 Parameter change (Function call response: title)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
result HH
title x(depend on the library)
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
F7
number Low
Transmission
When a memory or library is cleared on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].
title 1
Reception
When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device
number set to [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
number High
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed,
and then the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter
response.
number Low
:
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7
2.12.3.16 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library
Clear)
number High
2.12.3.14 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
50
6f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
result HH
result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive
2.12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be
changed.
MIDI Data Format
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11110111
function
SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE
EQ LIB ATTRIBUTE
GATE LIB ATTRIBUTE
COMP LIB ATTRIBUTE
EFF LIB ATTRIBUTE
CHANNEL LIB ATTRIBUTE
INPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE
OUTPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE
Bus to Stereo LIB ATTRIBUTE
Surround Monitor LIB
ATTRIBUTE
AUTOMIX LIB ATTRIBUTE
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
th
tl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
attribute
number High
number Low
attribute(protect:0x2000, normal:0x0000)
End of exclusive
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
number
0-99(0:response only)
1-128(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-52:response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0x0B
1-16
2.12.3.19 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
DATA
EOX
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
54
0f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ooooooo
0ooooooo
11110111
function
SCENE LIB LINK
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
ih
il
oh
ol
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
inpatch
outpatch
End of exclusive
0x20
number
0-99(0:response only)
2.12.3.22 Parameter request
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Function call
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
Transmission
When an attribute is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from
Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.
Universal
attribute
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified.
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
2.12.3.20 Parameter change (Function call response:
attribute)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
2.12.3.21 Parameter change
365
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
2.12.3.23 Parameter change (Function call response: link)
Transmission
When link data is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from Studio Manager, the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
DATA
attribute
number High
number Low
result HH
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
01010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
0eeeeeee
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
54
2f
mh
ml
ee
ee
ee
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
result HH
result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive
result HL
result LH
result LL
End of exclusive
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
366
Appendix C: MIDI
2.12.3.24 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010001
0000ffff
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
11
0f
sh
sl
dh
dl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Pair
Source channel H
Destination channel L
End of exclusive
channel
*1)
*1)
*1)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending
on the effect type).
EOX
function
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button
Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Library sort table
Library type
End of exclusive
(Key remote)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100000
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0ppppppp
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
20
kk
kk
kk
pp
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Key remote
Key address H
Key address M
Key address L
Release:0, Press:1
End of exclusive
2.12.3.29 Parameter change
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the
specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When
you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Effect Event
function
Release:0, Press:1
Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)
End of exclusive
channel
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
(Sort Table)
System exclusive message
Transmission
When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by
Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a
duration of 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Library sort table
Library type
Data
(Remote Meter)
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When scene memory sort is executed on the DM1000, the memory sort table
will be transmitted to Studio Manager.
Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.
If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to
the DM1000.
DATA
System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
13
0f
ds
:
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
13
0f
F7
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
2.12.3.26 Parameter change
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00010011
0000ffff
0ddddddd
:
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00010011
0000ffff
11110111
System exclusive message
• This does not activate when the effect type is different.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
2.12.3.28 Parameter change
Destination channel H
2.12.3.25 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect )
DATA
(Sort Table)
When the DM1000 receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data.
Source channel L
0x00
0x01
0x02
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
12
0f
00
pp
00
ee
F7
2.12.3.27 Parameter request
EOX
*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible.
• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel
as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010010
0000ffff
00000000
0ppppppp
00000000
0eeeeeee
11110111
0ddddddd de Data
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.
function
function
PAIR ON with COPY
PAIR ON with RESET BOTH
PAIR OFF
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
:
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
21
mm
mm
mm
dd
dd
:
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Data1 H
Data1 L
End of exclusive
* The meter data can be either the unadjusted DECAY value of the DSP,
or the table-converted value. The interpretation of the data will depend on the parameter.
MIDI Data Format
2.12.3.30 Parameter request
(Remote Meter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the
port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds.
If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted
immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
21
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter,
the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you
want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100010
0000tttt
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
22
0t
dd
dd
dd
dd
F7
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100010
0ddddddd
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
22
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote Time counter
0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.12.3.33 Parameter change
(Automix Status)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status, the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When you want
to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the Request must be
transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds interval. The data is
transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
ADDRESS LL
2.12.3.31 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
367
Transmission
When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10 seconds. The
data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when
the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100011
00000000
0000dddd
0000dddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0C
23
00
0d
0d
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Automix status
Automix status H
Automix status L
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Remote Time counter
0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock
Hour / Measure H
Minute / Measure L
Second / Beat
Frame / Clock
End of exclusive
2.12.3.32 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be
halted immediately. (disable)
2.12.3.34 Parameter request
(Automix Status)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] every second for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be
halted immediately (disable).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001100
00100011
0ddddddd
F0
43
3n
3E
0C
23
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DM1000
Automix status
0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
368
Appendix D: Options
Appendix D: About Optional Product
MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge
Installing the Meter Bridge
2-1
2-1
16
4
15
3
OMNI
IN
14
2
13
1
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
INPUT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2-2
2-2
SLOT
SLOT
POWER
ON
OFF
AC IN
METER
SMPTE IN
REMOTE
MIDI
OUT
IN
TO HOST
USB
CONTROL
WORD CLOCK
OUT
2TR IN
DIGITAL
1
IN
2
AES/EBU
1
2
COAXIAL COAXIAL
AES/EBU
1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge.
Align the holes on the lower part of the meter bridge with the holes on the upper part of the
brackets (as shown in the illustration below), then use four 8 mm screws (1) included in
the MB1000 package to affix the brackets to the meter bridge.
2 Install the meter bridge to the DM1000 following the steps below:
a) Insert two of four 12 mm screws (2-2) included in the MB1000 package into the lower
holes (2-2), then tighten them with your fingers. Leave the screws projecting by about
4 mm.
b) Align these screws with the notches on the included meter angles, then align the holes
on the upper part of the meter angles with the holes on the upper part of the DM1000
(2-1).
c) Insert the other two 12 mm screws (2-1) into the upper holes (2-1), then tighten
them securely.
d) Tighten the screws (2-2) that were finger-tightened in Step a) securely to firmly attach
the meter bridge to the DM1000.
3 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM1000’s METER connector.
Upper
2-1
2-2
1
2-1
Lower
2-2
1
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Meter angle
MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge
369
BUS 8
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
8
BUS 4
S
M
BUS 5
BUS 6
B INPUT METERING POSITION indicators
REMOTE 2
MASTER
17-32
33-48
H
BUS 1
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
REMOTE 1
E TIME CODE display
BUS 8
F [1-16] / [17-32] / [33-48] / [REMOTE 1] /
BUS 6
BUS 7
[REMOTE 2] / [MASTER] buttons
These buttons select the layers of the channel meters displayed on the meter bridge. The button indicator of the
currently-selected layer lights up.
If you turn on the Meter Follow Layer check box on the
Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 250), the layer selection
on the meter bridge follows the layer selection on the
DM1000.
BUS 5
G Level meters
AUX 8
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
BUS 2
BUS 1
This button turns the Peak Hold function on or off.
When the Peak Hold function is turned on, the button
indicator lights up. This button works in unison with
the PEAK HOLD button displayed on the Meter display.
This display indicates the timecode or MIDI clock value
the DM1000 is receiving or generating.
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
1 -16
6
BUS 4
16
32
48
15
31
47
14
30
46
13
29
45
12
28
44
C OUTPUT METERING POSITION indicators
D [PEAK HOLD] button
11
27
43
BUS 3
10
26
42
9
25
41
7
These 12-segment LED level meters display the channel
levels of the selected layer.
H Bus meters
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
These 12-segment LED meters display the signal levels
of Bus Outs 1-8.
OVER
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-48
AUX 2
AUX 1
AUX 3
8
24
40
7
23
39
3
19
35
2
18
34
1
17
33
1
4
20
36
5
21
37
6
22
38
INPUT METERING POSITION
PRE FADER
POST FADER
PRE EQ
2
These indicators display the current metering position
specified for the Input Channels.
These indicators display the current metering position
specified for the Output Channels.
BUS 2
MEASURE
TIME CODE
PEAK HOLD
OUTPUT METERING POSITION
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
POST FADER
3
These indicators display the channels for which the levels are currently displayed (Input Channels 1-16, 17-32,
33-48, Aux Outs 1-8, Bus Outs 1-8).
BUS 3
5
4
A Channel indicators
BUS 7
CLOCK
BEAT
PEAK METER BRIDGE MB1000 FOR
F
Meter Bridge Controls
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
370
Appendix D: Options
Rack Mounting the MB1000 Using Rack Angle Brackets
You can rack mount the MB1000 meter bridge using the rack angle brackets that came with
the meter bridge.
1 Detach the MB1000 from the DM1000. Also, remove the SP1000 side panels
if they are attached.
2 Hold a rack bracket against one side of the meter bridge so that the rack
angle bracket ear projects to the side, and align two holes on the brackets
with the holes on the side of the meter bridge, as shown in the illustration
below.
3 Affix the bracket using the screws included in the meter bridge package.
4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the MB1000 in the same way.
Side of Meter Bridge
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
Rack angle bracket
Installing the SP1000 Side Panels
371
Installing the SP1000 Side Panels
The figure below illustrates how to attach the left side panel to the DM1000. Attach the right
side panel to the DM1000 in the same way.
Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount
Kit
You can rack mount the DM1000 using the optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit.
1 Remove the side panels if they are attached.
2 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the DM1000 so that the bracket
ear projects to the side, and align five holes on the bracket with the holes
on the side of the DM1000, as shown in the illustration below.
3 Affix the bracket using five screws included in the RK1 package.
4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the DM1000 in the same way.
Caution: Do not rack mount the DM1000 and an MB1000 connected together as a unit. Be
sure to rack mount them separately using the dedicated brackets.
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
372
Index
Index
Symbols
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page .............. 61
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page ............ 61
ø/INS/DLY | DLY 33-48 page ............ 61
ø/INS/DLY | Insert page ................... 112
ø/Ins/Dly | Insert page ...................... 150
ø/INS/DLY | Out Dly page ........... 81, 93
ø/INS/DLY | Phase page ..................... 60
ø/INSERT/DELAY button ................. 17
+48V ON/OFF switches ..................... 14
Phantom power ............................ 51
Numerics
1–12 buttons ........................................ 21
1-16/17-32/33-48 buttons .................. 20
2TR D1/D2 buttons ............................ 22
2TR IN D1/D2 buttons ....................... 53
2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ........... 25
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 .......... 25
2TR IN DIGITAL connectors ............ 52
2TRD1/2 ....................................... 46
2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ....... 25
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 ..... 25
2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors ........ 52
2TRD1/2 .............................................. 46
A
ABORT .............................................. 194
About the display ................................ 27
AC IN connector ................................. 25
AD input .............................................. 14
AD input and output section ............. 23
AD Input section ................................. 51
AD824 ................................................ 270
AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM
CONTROL .................... 271
ADAT I/O card .................................... 53
AES/EBU I/O card .............................. 53
AMP SIMULATE .............................. 300
Analog inputs & outputs .................... 51
ASSIGN button ................................... 16
Assignable parameters ........................ 36
Assigne
Control changes ......................... 240
MIDI messages ........................... 228
Parameters to the encoder ........... 35
Program changes ........................ 239
Remote layer ............................... 205
USER DEFINED KEYS .............. 214
Attenuator ...............................64, 81, 92
Output signals .............................. 88
AUTO button ...................................... 15
Auto Channel Select preference ....... 251
Auto Direct Out On preference ....... 252
Auto EQ Edit in preference .............. 254
Auto EQUALIZER Display
preference ............................. 251
Auto Inc TC Capture preference ..... 254
AUTO PAN ....................................... 296
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
AUTO PAN 5.1 ..................................311
Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
preference .............................251
AUTO REC ........................................194
Auto ROUTING Display preference 250
Auto SOLO Display preference ........251
Auto update function ........................159
Auto WORD CLOCK Display
preference .............................251
Automix ..............................................181
ABORT ........................................194
ABSOLUTE .................................193
AUTO button ....................... 15, 190
AUTO REC .................................194
AUTOMIX button ........................17
Automix main page ....................191
Automix memory page ..............195
COPY ...........................................199
EDIT OUT .......................... 192, 197
Edit safe buttons .........................197
Editing events offline ..................198
ERASE ..........................................199
Event edit page ............................202
Event job page .............................198
FADER EDIT ..............................193
Fader Edit mode ..........................192
Fader1 &2 pages ..........................196
FRAMES ......................................182
INT START TIME ......................191
MOTOR ......................................196
MOVE/MERGE ..........................199
NEW ............................................194
OFFSET .......................................191
OVERWRITE ..............................194
Parameter events can be
recorded .........................181
PLAY ............................................194
Playing back .................................190
PROTECT ...................................196
Punching in & out ......................188
REC ..............................................194
Recording ....................................184
Recording the event ....................185
RELATIVE ...................................193
RETURN .....................................192
SEL button ...................................190
Setting up .....................................182
Setup | Time Sig page .................183
STOP ............................................194
TAKEOVER ................................192
TIME REFERENCE ....................191
TIME REFERENCE section .......182
Time signature map ....................183
Timecode source .........................182
TO END button ..........................191
TRIM ...........................................200
UPDATE ......................................191
Automix | Event Edit page ................202
Automix | Event Job page .................198
Automix | Fader1 or 2 page ..............196
Automix | Main page ................ 184, 191
Automix | Memory page ...................195
AUTOMIX button ..............................17
Automix main page ...........................191
Automix memory page .....................195
Automix Store Undo preference ......254
AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons .......................16
AUX button .........................................16
AUX indicator ...............................16, 33
AUX SELECT section .........................16
Aux send mode ..................... 97, 98, 101
Aux sends .......................................91, 96
Attenuating ...................................92
Comp settings ...............................93
Copying channel fader
positions ........................104
Delaying .........................................93
EQ settings ..............................92, 94
Excluding certain channels ........103
Fixed mode ....................................98
Mix minus ...................................103
Panning .......................................102
Setting from the control surface ..92
Setting from the display .........92, 97
Setting levels ..................................92
Variable mode ...............................98
Viewing settings ............................94
Viewing settings for multiple
channels .........................100
Aux1 | Pan1–32 page .........................102
Aux1 | Pan33–48 page .......................102
Aux1 | Send1-32 page ....................71, 97
Aux1 | Send33-48 page ........................97
Aux1 | View1–16 page .......................100
Aux1 | View17–32 page .....................100
Aux1 | View33–48 page .....................100
B
Bass Management ..............................134
Battery ................................................272
Bulk dump .........................................246
Messages ......................................235
BUS button ..................................22, 132
Bus out .................................................79
Attenuating ...................................81
Compressing .................................82
Delaying .........................................81
EQ’ing ......................................82, 86
Naming ..........................................89
Pairing ...........................................87
Routing signals to the stereo bus .83
Setting from the control surface ..86
Setting from the display ...............81
Setting the levels ...........................86
Viewing the settings ......................84
Bus to stereo library ..........................173
BUS1–BUS8 .......................................125
Buttons .................................................29
C
Cascade COMM Link preference ....252
Cascading consoles ............................265
Cascade page ...............................268
Reverse cable .................................24
SYNC parameter .........................269
Index
CATEGORY ........................................55
Changing names ................................249
Channel Copy Parameter
preference .............................253
Channel faders .....................................15
Channel ID/Channel preference ......252
Channel library ..................................167
Channel strip section ..........................15
CHORUS ...........................................294
CHORUS 5.1 .....................................311
CLEAR button .....................................22
Clear Edit Channel after REC
preference .............................254
COMP 5.1 ..........................................314
COMPAND 5.1 .................................315
Compressor library ...........................175
Preset ...........................................175
Compressors ............................63, 82, 93
Compressor link .........................141
DYNAMICS button .....................18
Linking ........................................144
Parameter table ...........................329
Preset parameters .......................320
Confirmation messages ......................30
Connections .........................................41
Configuring a recording system
that uses a DAW .............43
Configuring a recording system
with a hard disk recorder 42
Configuring an analog 32-channel
mixing system .................41
Contrast control ..................................18
Control changes .........................235, 240
CONTROL connector ........................24
CONTROL port pin assignments ....333
CONTROL ROOM DIMMER
LEVEL ...................................117
Control room monitor .....................115
Control surface ....................................13
AD input section ..........................14
AUX SELECT section ...................16
Channel strip section ...................15
Data entry section .........................21
DISPLAY ACCESS section ..........17
Display section ..............................18
ENCODER MODE section .........16
FADER MODE section ................16
Headphones & talkback section ..21
LAYER section ..............................20
MONITOR section .......................22
SCENE MEMORY section ..........20
SELECTED CHANNEL section ..19
STEREO section ...........................15
USER DEFINED KEYS section ...21
COPY ...................................................56
Copy Initial Fader preference ...........254
Cursor buttons ....................................21
D
Daisy chain distribution .....................44
Data entry section ................................21
DAW .................................................. 224
Nuendo ....................................... 224
Other ........................................... 224
Pro tools ...................................... 206
Recording system ......................... 43
Remote ........................................ 205
DEC & INC buttons ........................... 21
DEL button .......................................... 30
Delay ........................................61, 81, 93
DELAY SCALE ............................. 61
FB.GAIN ....................................... 62
DELAY LCR ...................................... 293
DELAY SCALE .................................... 61
DELAY+ER. ...................................... 305
DELAY+REV ..................................... 307
DELAY->ER. ..................................... 306
DELAY->REV ................................... 307
Digital I/O & control section ............. 24
Digital inputs & outputs ..................... 52
Dimensions ........................................ 334
DIMMER button ................................ 22
DIO | Cascade page ........................... 268
DIO | Format page ..................54, 56, 57
DIO | Word Clock page ................ 45, 53
DIO button .......................................... 17
DIO Warning preference ................. 251
Direct outs ......................................... 111
Display ................................................. 18
DISPLAY ACCESS section ................. 17
Display Brightness preference .......... 253
DISPLAY button .....................16, 21, 22
Display section .................................... 18
DIST->DELAY .................................. 308
DISTORTION ................................... 299
Dithering .............................................. 56
DIV ..................................................... 127
DOUBLE CHANNEL ......................... 57
DOUBLE SPEED ................................ 57
Drop Out Time preference .............. 254
DUAL PITCH ................................... 298
DYNA. FILTER ................................. 300
DYNA. FLANGE ............................... 301
DYNA. PHASER ............................... 301
Dynamics | Comp Edit page ..63, 82, 93
Dynamics | Comp Lib page .............. 175
Dynamics | Gate Edit page ................. 62
Dynamics | Gate Lib page ................. 174
DYNAMICS button ............................ 18
E
EARLY REF. ...................................... 291
ECHO ................................................ 294
EDIT indicator .................................... 27
Edit indicator ....................................... 20
Editing events offline ........................ 198
Effect | FX1 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX1 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX2 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX2 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX3 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX3 Lib page ......................... 170
Effect | FX4 Edit page ........................ 151
Effect | FX4 Lib page ......................... 170
373
Effect | P-IN Edit 2 page ....................153
Effect | P-IN Edit1 page .....................153
EFFECT button ....................................18
Effects
Bypass ..........................................151
EFFECT button .............................18
Internal effects .............................147
Parameter tables ..........................291
Plug-ins ........................................153
Effects library .....................................169
Preset ............................................170
programs ......................................170
Effects parameters ..............................291
Effects processor 1 .............................147
EMPHASIS ...........................................55
Encoder | Encoder page .......................35
ENCODER MODE section .................16
Encoders .................................. 15, 34, 36
Assigning parameters ...................35
Encoder mode ...............................34
ENTER button .....................................21
Enter titles
Title edit window ..........................30
EQ ................................65, 82, 86, 92, 94
Preset ............................................316
EQ | ATT 1-16 page .............................64
EQ | ATT 17-32 page ...........................64
EQ | ATT 33-48 page ...........................64
EQ | EQ Edit page ................... 65, 82, 94
EQ | EQ Library page .........................177
EQ | Out Att page ......................... 81, 92
EQ library ...........................................177
Preset ............................................177
EQ link ................................................141
EQUALIZER DISPLAY button ..........19
EQUALIZER FREQUENCY
control .....................................19
EQUALIZER GAIN control ...............19
EQUALIZER HIGH button ................19
EQUALIZER HIGH-MID button ......19
EQUALIZER LOW button .................19
EQUALIZER LOW-MID button .......19
EQUALIZER Q control .......................19
Event edit page ...................................202
Event job page ....................................198
F
F & R ...................................................127
F1–F4 buttons ......................................18
Fader groups ............................. 141, 142
FADER indicator .......................... 16, 33
FADER MODE section .......................16
Fader REC Accuracy preference .......254
Fader Touch Sense preference ..........253
FADER/AUX button ...........................16
Fader1 &2 pages .................................196
Fading .................................................160
ALL CLEAR .................................160
AUX1–8 .......................................161
BUS1–8 ........................................161
Global fade time ..........................160
INPUT CH1–48 ..........................160
STEREO .......................................161
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
374
Index
FAST ................................................... 126
Fast Meter Fall Time preference ...... 251
FB.GAIN .............................................. 62
Features ................................................ 11
Automix ........................................ 12
Channel configuration ................. 12
Effects ............................................ 12
Hardware ...................................... 11
Inputs and Outputs ...................... 11
MIDI ............................................. 12
Remote control ............................. 12
Scene memory .............................. 12
Sonic specifications ...................... 11
Surround sound ........................... 12
Fixed mode .................................. 98, 101
FLANGE ............................................ 295
FLANGE 5.1 ...................................... 312
Follow pan function ............................ 68
FOLLOW SURROUND ................... 148
Frame Jump Error preference .......... 254
FRAMES ............................................ 182
FREEZE .............................................. 309
FS .......................................................... 55
G
GAIN controls ............................... 14, 51
Gain of the AD card ............................ 41
GANG .................................................. 67
Gate library ........................................ 174
GATE REVERB ................................. 292
Gates ..................................................... 62
DYNAMICS button ..................... 18
KEYIN SOURCE .......................... 62
Parameter table ........................... 328
Preset parameters ....................... 320
GPI ..................................................... 259
Parameters .................................. 261
Sources ........................................ 262
Trigger source list ....................... 286
GRAB button ....................................... 19
Grounding screw ................................. 25
Group ................................................. 141
Fader groups ............................... 142
Mute groups ............................... 142
H
Hard disk
Recording system ......................... 42
Headphones & talkback section ......... 21
Higher sampling rates ......................... 57
HORIZONTAL ................................... 75
HQ. PITCH ....................................... 297
I
I/O card ................................................ 53
Installing ....................................... 26
SLOT 1–2 ...................................... 52
IEEE1394 ............................................. 53
In Patch | Cascade In page ................ 267
In Patch | CH Name page ................... 76
In Patch | Effect page ........................ 148
In Patch | In Patch page .............. 47, 106
In Patch | Insert In page ................... 114
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
In Patch | Library page ......................168
INDIVIDUAL ......................................67
INIT ....................................................125
Initial Data Nominal preference .......252
Initializing the DM1000 ....................273
Input channels .....................................59
Attenuating ....................................64
Compressing .................................63
Delaying .........................................61
EQ ..................................................72
EQ’ing ............................................65
Gating ............................................62
Levels ..............................................71
Naming ..........................................76
Pairing ............................................73
Panning ................................... 67, 71
Routing ................................... 68, 72
Setting from the control surface ..71
Setting from the display ...............60
Switching the signal phase ...........60
Viewing the settings ......................69
INPUT connectors ....................... 23, 51
Input patch .........................................105
Initial settings ..............................280
Parameters ...................................278
INPUT PATCH button .............. 17, 106
Input patch library .............................168
Input sensitivity
GAIN controls ...............................14
INS button ............................................30
Insert in ..............................................114
Insert patching ...................................112
Installing a card ....................................26
INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2,
INT 96k ...................................46
INT START TIME .............................191
Internal effects
Aux sends .....................................148
Editing ..........................................151
Effects processors 2 through 4 ...147
FOLLOW SURROUND .............148
Inserting into channels ...............150
Meters ..........................................152
MIDI CLK ...................................152
MIX BALANCE ..........................151
TAP TEMPO ...............................152
TEMPO ............................... 151, 152
INV GANG ..........................................67
J
Joystick ..................................................19
Reverb 5.1 effect ..........................310
Joystick Auto Grab preference ..........252
K
KEYIN SOURCE .................................62
L
L/R Nominal Pan preference ............251
LAST SOLO ........................................116
LATCH ...............................................230
LAYER section .....................................20
Layers ....................................................31
Initial bank settings ....................287
LEARN button ...................................228
Levels ..............................................86, 92
LFE ......................................................127
Libraries ..............................................165
Bus to stereo library ....................173
Channel library ...........................167
Compressor library .....................175
Effects library ..............................169
EQ library ....................................177
Gate library ..................................174
General operation .......................165
Input patch library .....................168
Output patch library ..................169
specifications ...............................330
Surround monitor library ..........179
Link .....................................................141
Compressors ...............................144
EQ ................................................144
Link Capture & Locate Memory
preference .............................254
Lock Time preference .......................254
M
M.BAND DYNA. ..............................313
Machine control ................................231
MASTER button ..................................20
MASTER MODE .................................38
MB1000 peak meter bridge ..............368
Meter | CH1-32 page ...........................37
Meter | CH1-48 page ...........................37
Meter | CH33-48 page .........................37
Meter | Effect page ...............................37
Meter | Master page .............................37
Meter | Position page ..........................37
Meter | Stereo page ..............................38
Meter bridge ......................................368
METER button ..............................17, 37
METER connector ..............................24
Meter Follow Layer preference .........252
Metering ...............................................37
Meters
Stereo meters .................................18
MIDI ...........................................207, 235
Bulk dump ..................................246
Bulk dump messages ..................235
Control changes ..........................240
Data format .................................353
FADER H/L .................................244
Initial parameter to control
change table ...................337
MIDI clock ..................................235
MIDI IN & OUT ports .........24, 235
MIDI indicator .............................27
MIDI note on/off ........................235
Parameter changes ......................246
Parameters ...................................241
Program changes ........................239
REMOTE connector ..................236
Scene memory to program
change table ...................336
Setup ............................................236
Index
SLOT 1 ........................................236
System exclusive messages .........235
Transmission and Reception .....238
USB port ......................................236
MIDI | Bulk page ...............................247
MIDI | Ctl Asgn page ........................240
MIDI | Pgm Asgn page ......................239
MIDI | Setup page .............................238
MIDI button ........................................17
MIDI interface ...................................207
MIDI machine control ......................235
MIDI remote .....................................225
Banks ...........................................225
LATCH ........................................230
LEARN button ............................228
MIDI messages ...........................228
TARGET parameter ...................226
UNLATCH ..................................230
MIDI timecode ..................................235
MIDI Warning preference ................251
mini-YGDAI I/O cards .......................53
Mix minus ..........................................103
MIX SOLO .........................................116
Mix Update Confirmation
preference .............................253
MIXDOWN .......................................116
mLAN I/O card ...................................53
MMC ................................. 205, 231, 235
MOD. DELAY ...................................293
MOD. FILTER ...................................299
Monitor | Solo/C-R page ..................116
Monitor | Surr Lib page ....................179
Monitor | Surr Patch page ................139
Monitor | Surr Setup page ........133, 138
Monitor | Surround page ..................137
Monitor | Talkback page ...................119
Monitor alignment ............................136
MONITOR LEVEL control ................22
Monitor matrix ..................................133
MONITOR section .............................22
Monitoring ........................................115
CONTROL ROOM DIMMER
LEVEL ............................117
Digital input channel status .........55
DIMM (Dimmer) .......................115
LAST SOLO ................................116
MIX SOLO ..................................116
MIXDOWN ................................116
MONO ........................................117
MUTE/SOLO section .................137
RECORDING .............................116
SETTING section .......................137
Solo function ...............................118
SOLO SAFE .................................117
Solo safe function .......................117
Solo setup ....................................116
SPEAKER SETUP .......................138
STATUS section .........................137
Talkback function .......................119
MONO ...............................................117
MONO DELAY .................................292
MS buttons ..........................................74
MS microphone .............................74, 77
MTC ................................................... 235
MULTI FILTER ................................ 308
Mute groups ..............................141, 142
MUTE/SOLO section ....................... 137
Muting ............................................... 217
N
Naming .......................................... 76, 89
Nuendo ......................................205, 224
O
OCTA REVERB ................................ 310
OFFSET .............................................. 191
OMNI IN connectors ................... 23, 51
OMNI OUT connectors .........23, 48, 52
Omni outs ............................................ 52
OMS ................................................... 207
ON buttons .......................................... 15
Operating basics .................................. 27
About the display ......................... 27
AUX indicator .............................. 33
Buttons .......................................... 29
Channel name .............................. 28
Confirmation messages ............... 30
FADER indicator .......................... 33
Metering ........................................ 37
Page area ....................................... 28
Page tabs ....................................... 28
Page title ........................................ 28
Parameter boxes ........................... 29
Rotary controls & faders .............. 29
Sampling rate indicator ............... 28
Selecting channels ........................ 32
Selecting display pages ................. 28
Selecting encoder modes ............. 34
Selecting fader modes .................. 33
Selecting layers .............................. 31
Tab scroll arrows .......................... 28
Timecode counter ........................ 28
Title edit window ......................... 30
OPERATION LOCK ........................ 263
Operation lock .................................. 263
Optional card ...................................... 26
Installing ....................................... 26
Options .......................................... 6, 368
I/O card ......................................... 53
MB1000 ....................................... 368
RK1 .............................................. 371
SP1000 ......................................... 371
Oscillator ........................................... 256
Other functions ................................. 249
Preferences .................................. 250
Out Patch | 2TR Out page ................ 110
Out Patch | CH Name page ................ 89
Out Patch | Direct Out page ............. 111
Out Patch | Library page ................... 169
Out Patch | Omni Out page ....... 48, 109
Out Patch | Slot Out page .110, 125, 266
Output patch ..................................... 108
Initial settings ............................. 284
Parameters .................................. 282
OUTPUT PATCH button .................. 17
Output patch library ......................... 169
375
P
P2 ............................................... 205, 231
Straight cable .................................24
Package contents ....................................6
PAD switches ................................ 14, 51
Pair Confirmation preference ...........251
PAIR/GROUP button .........................17
Pair/Grup | Fader1–32 page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Fader33–48 page ............142
Pair/Grup | In Comp page ................145
Pair/Grup | In EQ page .....................144
Pair/Grup | Input page ........................74
Pair/Grup | Mute1–32 page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Mute33–48 page ............142
Pair/Grup | Out Comp page .............145
Pair/Grup | Out EQ page ..................144
Pair/Grup | Out Fader page ..............142
Pair/Grup | Out Mute page ...............142
Pair/Grup | Output page .....................87
Pairing ........................................... 73, 87
HORIZONTAL .............................75
Using the display ...........................74
Using the SEL buttons ..................73
VERTICAL ....................................75
PAN button ..........................................16
Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page .....................126
Pan/Surr | Pan1-32 page .....................67
Pan/Surr | Pan33-48 page ...................67
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page ...............123
Pan/Surr | Surr1-16 page ...................130
Pan/Surr | Surr17-32 page .................130
Pan/Surr | Surr33-48 page .................130
PAN/SURR LINK ..............................123
PAN/SURROUND button .................17
Panning ....................................... 67, 102
F.S button ......................................87
FOLLOW PAN .............................71
Follow pan function .....................68
GANG ............................................67
INDIVIDUAL ...............................67
INV GANG ....................................67
PAN buttons ..................................68
Parameter boxes ...................................29
Parameter changes .............................246
Parameter lists ....................................275
Parameter wheel ..................................21
Patch Confirmation preference ........251
Patching ..............................................105
2TR digital outputs .....................110
Direct outs ...................................111
Input and Output .........................47
Input channels ..............................47
INPUT PATCH button ......... 17, 47
Input patching .............................105
Input patching from the display 106
Insert in ........................................114
Insert patching ............................112
Omni outs ............................ 48, 109
OUTPUT PATCH button ............17
Output patching .........................108
PAN/SURROUND button ...........17
Slot outputs .................................110
Using the encoders .....................107
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
376
Index
PEAK indicators ............................ 14, 51
Peak level ............................................. 39
Phantom power ................................... 51
+48V ON/OFF switches .............. 14
Phase .................................................... 60
PHASER ............................................. 296
PHONES jack .............................. 21, 115
PHONES LEVEL control ................... 21
PLAY .................................................. 194
PLUG-IN ........................................... 248
Plug-ins .............................................. 219
Y56K ............................................ 153
Port ID/PORT preference ................ 252
POWER ON/OFF switch ................... 25
Power section ...................................... 25
Prefer1 page ....................................... 250
Prefer2 page ....................................... 252
Prefer3 page ....................................... 253
Preferences ......................................... 250
Preset compressor parameters ......... 320
Preset EQ parameters ....................... 316
Preset gate parameters ...................... 320
Pro tools .............................205, 206, 217
Automation ................................ 223
Channel display mode ............... 211
Channel levels ............................. 216
Control surface operation ......... 212
Display ........................................ 210
Explicit mute .............................. 217
Flip mode .................................... 218
Implicit mute .............................. 217
Insert display mode .................... 210
Meter display mode ................... 212
MIDI ........................................... 207
Muting ........................................ 218
OMS ............................................ 207
Panning ...............................217, 218
Plug-ins ....................................... 219
Pre or Post .................................. 217
Scrub & Shuttle .......................... 222
Selecting ...................................... 216
Send levels ................................... 218
Soloing ........................................ 217
Program changes .......................235, 239
PROTECT button ............................. 158
Punching in & out ............................. 188
R
Rear panel ............................................ 23
AD input and output section ...... 23
Digital I/O & control section ....... 24
Power section ............................... 25
SLOT section ................................ 24
REC .................................................... 194
RECALL button .................................. 20
Recall Confirmation preference ....... 251
Recall safe function ........................... 162
Receive Full Frame Message
preference ............................. 254
RECORDING .................................... 116
Remote ............................................... 205
AD824 ......................................... 270
Display ........................................ 210
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
FRAMES ......................................233
Insert display mode ....................210
LOCATE/TIME section .............233
Machine control ................. 205, 231
MACHINE CONTROL section 232
MIDI messages ............................228
MIDI remote ...............................225
MMC ...........................................205
Nuendo ........................................205
P2 ..................................................205
ProTools ......................................205
REMOTE 1/2 ...............................205
Target parameter ........................209
TRACK ARMING section ..........233
TRANSPORT section .................233
Remote | Channel page .....................223
Remote | Insert page ..........................209
Remote | Machine page .....................233
Remote | Meter page ..........................212
Remote | Remote 1 page ....................208
Remote | Remote 2 page ....................226
REMOTE 1/REMOTE 2 buttons .......20
REMOTE button ........................ 17, 205
REMOTE connector ................... 24, 236
Remote layer
Nuendo ........................................224
Pro tools .......................................206
RESET BOTH ......................................74
REV+CHORUS .................................302
REV+FLANGE ..................................303
REV+SYMPHO. ................................304
REV->CHORUS ................................302
REV->FLANGE .................................303
REV->PAN ........................................305
REV->SYMPHO. ..............................304
REVERB 5.1 .......................................310
REVERB HALL ..................................291
REVERB PLATE ................................291
REVERB ROOM ................................291
REVERB STAGE ................................291
Reverse cable ............................. 266, 270
REVERSE GATE ................................292
RING MOD. ......................................299
RK1 rack mount kit ...........................371
ROTARY ............................................298
Rotary controls & faders .....................29
Routing .................................................68
Routing | Bus To St page .....................83
Routing | CH1-16 page .......................68
Routing | CH17-32 page .....................68
Routing | CH33-48 page .....................68
Routing | Library page .......................173
ROUTING 1–8 buttons ......................19
ROUTING DIRECT button ...............19
ROUTING DISPLAY button ..............19
ROUTING STEREO button ...............19
S
Sampling rates ............................... 53, 55
DOUBLE CHANNEL ...................57
DOUBLE SPEED ..........................57
Sampling rate indicator ................28
Setting the higher sampling rates 57
SINGLE .........................................58
SRC sections ..................................54
Scene | In Fade page ..........................160
Scene | Out Fade page .......................161
Scene | Rcl Safe page ..........................162
Scene | Scene page .............................158
Scene | Sort page ................................163
SCENE button .....................................18
Scene MEM Auto Update
preference .............................252
Scene memories .................................155
Auto update function .................159
Edit indicators .............................156
Fading ..........................................160
PROTECT button ......................158
Recall safe function .....................162
Scene numbers ............................156
Shadow memory .........................159
Sorting .........................................163
Storing and Recalling .................157
Using the Scene Memory Page ..158
What is stored .............................155
Scene memory #0 ..............................156
Scene memory #U .............................156
Scene memory display ........................20
SCENE MEMORY section .................20
Scene numbers ...................................156
Scene up/down buttons ......................20
SEL buttons ..........................................15
SELECTED CHANNEL section .........19
Selecting channels ................................32
Selecting display pages ........................28
Selecting fader modes ..........................33
SET SPL85 ..........................................137
Setting levels .........................................96
SETTING section ..............................137
Setup .....................................................41
Setup | GPI page ................................259
Setup | In Port page ...........................249
Setup | MIDI/Host page
....................... 208, 232, 236, 268
Setup | Out Port page ........................250
Setup | Output Att page ......................88
Setup | Prefer1 page ...........................250
Setup | Prefer2 page ...........................250
Setup | Prefer3 page ...........................250
Setup | Remote page ..................268, 271
Setup | Surr Bus page ........................125
Setup | Time Ref page .......................182
Setup | Time Sig page ........................183
SETUP button .....................................17
Shadow memory ...............................159
SHIFT LOCK button ..........................30
Show Compact Size preference ........254
SIGNAL indicators ........................14, 51
SINGLE ................................................58
SLOT 1 ...............................................236
SLOT 1/2 ................................. 24, 46, 52
SLOT button ................................22, 132
SLOT section .......................................24
SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT
connector ................................24
SNAP TO SPL85 ................................138
Index
Solo .....................................................116
2TR DIN FLIP ............................117
LAST SOLO ................................116
LISTEN ........................................116
MIX SOLO ..................................116
MIXDOWN ................................116
RECORDING .............................116
SOLO ...........................................116
Solo function ...............................118
SOLO INTERRUPTION ...........117
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL ............117
Solo safe function .......................117
SOLO TRIM ...............................117
SOLO buttons ......................................15
SOLO indicator ...................................22
SOLO SAFE .......................................117
SP1000 side panels ............................371
SPEAKER SETUP ..............................138
Specifications .....................................325
SRC sections ........................................54
Star distribution ..................................44
STATUS section ................................137
STEREO button ...................................22
STEREO DELAY ...............................292
STEREO fader ......................................15
Stereo meters .......................................18
Stereo out .............................................79
Attenuating ...................................81
Compressing .................................82
Delaying ........................................81
EQ’ing ......................................82, 86
Naming ..........................................89
Pairing ...........................................87
Setting from the control surface ..86
Setting from the display ...............81
Setting the levels ...........................86
Viewing the settings .....................84
STEREO section ..................................15
STOP ..................................................194
STORE button .....................................20
Store Confirmation preference ........251
Storing and Recalling ........................157
SURR. MODE ...................................133
Surround ............................................121
BASS MANAGEMENT .............134
BUS1–BUS8 ................................125
DIV ..............................................127
F & R ............................................127
F.S button ......................................87
FAST ............................................126
GRAB button ................................19
INIT .............................................125
Joystick ..........................................19
LFE ...............................................127
LINK ............................................127
MONITOR ALIGNMENT ........136
Monitoring ..................................131
Monitoring matrix .....................131
Oscillator .....................................138
Pan graph ....................................126
PAN/SURR LINK .......................123
PAN/SURROUND button ..........17
Panning from the display ...........126
PATTERN ................................... 127
Setting up and Selecting ............. 123
Slot ............................................... 139
SPEAKER SETUP ...................... 138
ST LINK ...................................... 127
Surround effects ......................... 153
SURROUND MODE ........... 69, 123
Surround mode indicator ............ 28
Surround pan ............................. 121
Trajectory patterns ..................... 126
SURROUND MODE ........................ 123
Surround mode indicator .................. 28
Surround modes ...............121, 123, 133
Factory-default ........................... 122
Surround monitor ............................ 131
Bass management ....................... 133
Configuring basic ....................... 133
Monitor alignment ..................... 133
Monitor matrix .......................... 133
Monitoring level ......................... 137
Surround monitor library ................ 179
Surround pan .................................... 121
SYMPHO. 5.1 .................................... 312
SYMPHONIC ................................... 295
SYNC parameter ............................... 269
System exclusive messages ............... 235
System version ................................... 272
T
Tab scroll arrows ................................. 28
Tab scroll buttons ............................... 18
TALKBACK button .................... 22, 119
Talkback function ............................. 119
TALKBACK LEVEL control .............. 21
Talkback mic ....................................... 21
Target parameter ............................... 209
Tascam I/O card .................................. 53
TC Drop Warning preference .......... 251
TIME REFERENCE .......................... 191
TIME REFERENCE section ............. 182
Time signature map .......................... 183
Timecode counter ............................... 28
Timecode Display Relative
preference ............................. 254
Timecode source ............................... 182
Title edit window ................................ 30
TO END button ................................ 191
TO HOST USB port ........................... 24
Trajectory patterns ............................ 127
TREMOLO ........................................ 297
Trigger signals ................................... 259
377
Utility | Battery page ..........................272
Utility | CH Status page .......................55
Utility | Lock page ..............................263
Utility | Oscillator page ......................256
UTILITY button ..................................17
V
Variable mode ............................. 98, 101
VERTICAL ...........................................75
View | Fader page .................... 70, 84, 95
View | Library page ............................167
View | Parameter page ............ 69, 84, 94
VIEW button .......................................17
W
WC IN ..................................................46
Web site ........................................... 6, 53
Welcome ...............................................11
Window
Changing the surround mode ...124
Channel Pairing ............................73
Copy operation ...........................104
Password ......................................263
Set Password ................................264
User Define Select .......................258
Wordclock ............................................44
About wordclock ..........................44
Connections ..................................44
Daisy chain distribution ...............44
Source ............................................46
Specifying source ..........................45
Star distribution ............................44
WC IN ...........................................46
WORD CLOCK IN connector ....25
WORD CLOCK OUT connector 24
Y
Y56K ...................................................153
Yamaha web site ............................. 6, 53
U
UNLATCH ........................................ 230
UPDATE ............................................ 191
USB ...................................................... 24
OMS ............................................ 207
USB port ..................................... 236
User assignable layer ......................... 255
User Def | User Def page .................. 257
USER DEFINED KEYS ...................... 21
Initial assignments ..................... 277
User defined keys .............................. 257
DM1000—Owner’s Manual
YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters]
Model: DM1000
Function...
Date: 26 Aug. 2002
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Memorized
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X
Memorized
Note
Number
True Voice
X
**************
0–127
X
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
O
After
Key’s
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Assignable
0–127
**************
0–127
0–99
Assignable
O
O
*1
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
0-95,102-119
:True#
System Exclusive
Effect Control
System
Common
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
X
X
X
O
X
X
Automix
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
O
O
Automix,
Effect Control
Aux
Messages
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Notes
MTC quarter frame message is recognized.
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
DM1000 Block Diagram
(Gain Reduction)
METER METER
(Out Meter)
[INPUT]
(1-16)
ON
PAD
0
20
AD
GAIN
–60 ~ –16
x4
AD 1-16
METER
(Gain Reduction)
METER
[OMNI IN]
(1-4)
METER
OMNI 1-4
[SLOT]
(1-2)
SLOT1
OUTPUT
DELAY
AUX 8
ATT 4BAND EQ
(Gain Reduction)
LFE
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
METER
METER METER
ON
PRE/POST
INSERT
Keyin
Self or Stereo Link
INSERT
METER
OUTPUT
DELAY
66
SINE100Hz
SINE1kHz
SINE10kHz
1kHz/400Hz
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE
FX1 Return 1-2
FX2 Return 1-2
FX3Return 1-2
FX4 Return 1-2
Surr1
FX3 SEND 1-2
16
LEVEL
ON
BUS to STEREO
TO INPUT PATCH
OSCILLATOR
FX1-4
FX2 SEND 1-2
BUS 1(...8)
EFFECT
8
SELECT
INSERT
OUT
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
ATT 4BAND EQ
DIRECT OUT 1(...48)
Surr1 Return 1-8
AUX1-8
(Out Meter)
AUX
PAN
FX1 SEND 1-8
STEREO R
COMP
METER
COMP
SLOT2 1-16
METER
STEREO L
PAN
Keyin
12ch Group(1-12,13-24....)
AUX 1-8
TO SURROUND
MONITOR
16
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL
Same as the stereo master L
SLOT1 1-16
16
SLOT2
SOLO
INSERT
METER
PAN
INPUT
DELAY
ATT 4BAND EQ
TO TALKBACK
SELECT
16
INSERT
ON LEVEL
INSERT
TO TALKBACK
SELECT
AD
INSERT
METER
(Out Meter)
GATE
AUX 1
INPUT 1(...48)
SOLO L
SOLO R
x 16
+48V
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
PEAK
SIGNAL
OFF
STEREO L
STEREO R
COMP
INPUT PATCH
FX4 SEND 1-2
BUS 1(...8)
LEVEL
same as the above
ON
AUX1(...8)
TO INPUT PATCH
AUX1(...8)
to OUT PATCH for cascade
BUS1 BUS
TRIM
CASCADE SELECT
ON
BUS8 BUS
STEREO L BUS
STEREO R BUS
SOLO L BUS
SOLO R BUS
AUX1 BUS
AUX8 BUS
2
[2TR IN DIGITAL1]
SRC
2TRD1 L/R
SRC
2TRD2 L/R
AES/EBU
2
[2TR IN DIGITAL2]
COAXIAL
4
TO MONITOR SELECT
SOLO TRIM
TALKBACK
[TALKBACK]
USE AD IN (1-16) or OMNI IN (1-4)
AS TALKBACK
8
SOLO OUT
2
STEREO
2
BUS1-8
8
AUX1-8
8
DIRECT OUT 1-48
48
7
INSERT OUT
66
CONTROL ROOM
2
for cascade
STEREO BUS
BUS1-8 BUS
AUX1-8 BUS
SOLO BUS
2
8
8
2
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
OMNI 9
OMNI 10
OMNI 11
OMNI 12
DA
1
[OMNI OUT]
(1-12)
DA
SLOT1
SLOT2
16
16
2TR D1
2
2TR D2
2
DITHER
DITHER
DITHER
SLOT1 1-8
SLOT2 1-8
12
SLOT1
SLOT2
8
8
MONITOR SELECT
STEREO 2
2
2TR D1
OMNI IN1/2
2
2TR D2
OMNI IN3/4
OUTPUT
PORT
ATTNUATOR
8x8Patch SLOT
8
8
8
8
CONTROL ROOM
MONITOR
LEVEL
CR to SURROUND MONITOR
PINK
NOISE
MONITOR
LEVEL
SURROUND
MONITOR
500-2kHz
BPF
1kHz,50Hz
[SLOT]
(1-2)
BUS1-8
8
STEREO
2
BUS
8
MONITOR
MATRIX
BASS
MANAGEMENT
[2TR OUT DIGITAL1]
AES/EBU
DITHER
[PHONES]
DA
OUTPUT SOLO
[2TR OUT DIGITAL2]
COAXIAL
MONITOR MATRIX OUT
MONITOR
ALLIGNMENT
DIMM
SURROUND MONITOR
MONITOR MATRIX OUT
OMNI 1
OMNI 2
OMNI 3
OMNI 4
OMNI 5
OMNI 6
OMNI 7
OMNI 8
PHONES
LEVEL
DIMM
BUS1-8
DA
SOLO LOGIC
MONO
8
METER
TALKBACK DIMM
BUS1-8
SOLO R
AD 1-16
OMNI 1-4
AUX1-8
OUTPUT PATCH
AUX1-8
8
SOLO L
AD
TO OUTPUT PATCH
DM1000 Level Diagram
Analog
Analog
Digital
dBu
dBFS
+24
+20
+10
+4
0
–2
0
–10
–20
–30
–10
–40
–20
–50
–30
–60
–40
–70
–50
–80
–60
–90
–70
–100
–80
–110
–90
–120
–100
–130
–110
–140
–120
–150
–130
–160
–140
–170
–150
–180
–160
–190
–170
–200
–180
–210
–190
PAD
GAIN
INSERT
Digital
AD
INPUT
PATCH
PHASE
Digital
GATE
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
INSERT
COMP
DELAY
ON
LEVEL
INSERT
PAN
BUS
Adder
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
INSERT
COMP
MASTER
ON
MASTER
LEVEL
INSERT
BAL
DELAY
Analog
OUTPUT
PATCH
Analog
DA
dBu
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]
[0dBFS = Full Scale]
Max.
Input [+24dBu]
CASCADE IN
CASCADE OUT
Max. Output
[+24dBu]
Digital Clipping Level
[+18dBu]
[+4dBu]
Nominal
Input
Nominal Output
[+4dBu]
[–2dBu]
OMNI OUT 1-12
GAIN MIN.,
PAD ON
+24
+20
+10
+4
0
–10
–20
–30
Max.
Input
[–40dBu]
–40
–50
Nominal
[–60dBu]
In
Input
–60
GAIN MAX.,
PAD OFF
–70
–80
–90
–100
–110
–120
–130
–140
–150
–160
DSP Noise Floor
–170
–180
–190
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,
Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032
FRANCE
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
Yamaha Musique France, S.A.
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
ASIA
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
TAIWAN
DENMARK
OTHER COUNTRIES
INDONESIA
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.
Shanghai Branch
United Plaza 25F 1468 Nan Jing Road West
Jingan Shanghai 200040, China
Tel: 21-6247-2211
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Central Europe,
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA05
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
This document is printed on recycled
chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation
WA83970 306IPAP121.1-02B0
Printed in Japan